(EIA/EMP) Proposed Onshore Oil and Gas Explorat

DRAFT ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT & ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (EIA/EMP)

for

Proposed Onshore Oil and Gas Exploration and Appraisal in HF-ONHP-2017/1 Block - Bilaspur and Mandi District, Himachal Pradesh By Vedanta Limited. (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) [ToR Letter No: IA-J-11011/118/2019-IA-II (I) dated 28th April 2019] [Schedule 1 (b) Category–“A” As per EIA Notification 2006 and its Amendment thereof]

ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT ECO CHEM SALES & SERVICES Office Floor, Ashoka Pavilion - A New Civil Road, Surat, 395001 NABET/EIA/1720/SA 085 E-mail: [email protected] Tel No. +91 261 2231630

Doc No: 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 August 2019 NABET CERTIFICATE

Scanned with CamScanner Scanned with CamScanner UNDERTAKING BY CONSULTANT

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

1.0 Introduction

Vedanta Limited (division: Cairn Oil & Gas) has been allocated HF-ONHP-2017/1 block for exploration and exploitation of hydrocarbons by Government of India under the Revenue sharing contract (RSC).The Revenue sharing contract (RSC) was signed between the Government of India and Vedanta Limited on 1st October, 2018.

Vedanta Ltd (Divison Cairn Oil & Gas) proposes to carry out exploration (including exploratory and appraisal well drilling) and early production of oil and gas in the block.

The proposed exploratory appraisal drilling project could possibly result in the discovery of hydrocarbon, and subsequent development and production would help in reducing India’s dependence on imports. The proposed project would also contribute to the State Government in Himachal Pradesh in terms of Royalty through the mining lease. Additionally, the proposed project would generate direct and indirect employment in the region.

The application (form 1, proposed ToR and PFR) was submitted on 27th March 2019.The MoEF&CC approved the standard ToR for the proposed project vide File No IA-J-11011/118/2019-IA-II(I), dated 28th April 2019.

2.0 Project Description

The HF-ONHP-2017/1 block located in Mandi and Bilaspur districts of Himachal Pradesh. It encloses an area of 666 Sq.Km Vedanta Limited (Divison: Cairn Oil & Gas) proposed to carry out Exploration and Appraisal (E&A) Drilling of 7 wells in the HF-ONHP-2017/1 Block. The geographic location of the block is included within the Survey of India’s Topo- Sheet No. H43E13, H43E14, H43E15. Block map on SOI topo sheet is presented below. Setting up of Quick Production Units (QPUs) for produced well fluid processing and early production of up to 4000 BOPD of crude oil and 0.6 mmscfd of associated natural gas.

III

2.1 Drill Site Preparation

Land Requirement: An area of about 300m X 300m would be taken on temporary short term lease basis for the preparation of well pad (drill site) for exploratory and appraisal wells. For the preparation of suitable access roads connecting to well pads, accommodating OHL and other utilities in future, a suitable width of RoU will be required.

Drill Site Selection: An initial assessment of the exploratory well site will be carried out through analysis of satellite imageries. Field surveys will be carried out to earmark the drill site location maintaining maximum possible distance from any settlement and sensitive receptors. Ease of accessibility to the site will also be considered.

Site Preparatory Works: Detailed site surveys will be carried and the boundary of the drill site earmarked. Site leveling and excavation works will be carried out for site preparation. New approach roads to drill sites will be constructed wherever required or existing village roads will be strengthened / widened to provide access for the drilling equipment and machinery.

Mobilization of rig: After completion of the site preparation activities and with the provision of the basic facilities, drill rig will be transported to the site. The drill equipment’s are designed as modular/ skid mounted type, which facilitates quick mobilization and demobilization. Rig essentially comprises of a mast, a draw work, rotary table, kelly or top drive, mud pumps engines, drilling fluid storage and handling tanks and generators. The proposed drilling shall be carried out by using a standard land rig or a “Mobile Land Rig” with standard water based drilling fluid treatment system. This rig will be suitable for deep drilling up to the desired depth of about 4500 meters (TVDSS) as planned for the project.

2.2 Drilling Process

The drilling process will involve drilling of the well across various stratigraphic levels and simultaneous data logging. If evidence of hydrocarbon reserves is found, a well test will be performed to establish the oil and gas flow potential of various zones of interest. In case, the well tests yield encouraging results, appraisal wells will be drilled at identified locations to delineate the extent and quantum of the reserve.

The drilling activity will involve well spudding followed by sectional hole drilling. Each section is cased with a steel pipe and annular space between hole and casing will be cemented up to the surface. Drilling mud will be used for removal of drilled rock (i.e. cuttings), lubrication and cooling of the drill bit and string. Drilling mud will also provide hydrostatic head in the well to counter natural formation pressures and to prevent hole collapse or ingress of uncontrolled fluids or gases from the formation. Water based mud (WBM) will be used as drilling fluid for initial, shallower sections where massive shale not encountered. Synthetic based mud (SBM) will be used for drilling at further depths. Hydraulic fracking will be conducted in wells located in low permeability and low pressure formation. Blowout preventers (BOP) will be installed in order to control the wells during accidental blow-out.

Well Testing & Flaring During the exploration and appraisal drilling, where a hydrocarbon formation is found, initial well tests ( generally about one month of duration) will be carried out to establish flow rates, formation pressure and other parameters. However, depending on the need, based on nature of the reservoirs, the exploratory and appraisal wells will be tested for longer/extended durations to ascertain the reservoir parameters. During the well testing, crude oil, natural gas and produced water could be generated and will be treated/ disposed appropriately. Hydrocarbons will be flared. Efficient test flare burner will be used to minimize incomplete combustion. As an alternative option, if feasible, crude oil/ slop oil will be transferred to nearby refinery (terminals / depots) for processing or will be sent to authorized recyclers.

Associated Facilities: Each drill site will be provided with facilities such as drilling rig foundation and cellar pit, waste and water storage pits, chemical storage area including fuel storages, drill cutting disposal pit, flare pit and septic tank with soak pits. The drill cutting and spent mud disposal pits will be provided with a HDPE lining for temporary storage. Adequate drainage and wastewater conveyance system also will be installed.

Camp Site: Drilling camp sites will be set-up within the vicinity of the drilling sites to allow for easy movement of the crew between the camp and the drilling sites. The camp site would comprise of 30-40 transportable container cabins (portable cabin) of 20 feet x40 feet size to provide accommodation for about 120 project crew.

2.3 Demobilization

In the event that economic quantities of hydrocarbons are found, the well will be suspended with a well head in place, but all other equipment, materials, fuel and wastes will be removed from the drilling site and reused for other drilling activities or disposed as per the applicable regulatory requirements.

If hydrocarbons are not found, a full abandonment plan will be implemented. All concrete or steel installations would be removed to at least 1m below ground level, to ensure that there will be no protruding surface structures. All waste at the site will be removed and the pits will be closed. The drill sites and associated sites (for camps and liquid mud plant) will be restored to its original conditions or as required by the landowner.

2.4 Resource Requirement

A. Water:

Water Requirement during Drilling Operations The water requirement in drilling rig is mainly meant for preparation of drilling mud apart from washings and domestic use. While former constitutes majority of water requirement, latter or the water requirement for domestic and wash use is minor. The water requirement per well is shown in below table:

Description Quantity (m3/d) Water for Water based mud 600-1000 (m3/well) Water for synthetic based mud 150-300 (m3/well) Water for domestic use 20-30 (m3/day/well) Water for Drilling 25-50 (m3/day/well)

The water requirement for all the project activities will be sourced locally through approved/ authorized sources of surface water and/ or ground water (e.g. PHD bore wells, privately owned bore wells, Irrigation Dept./ Water Resources Dept. of State Govt.). In case, required water could not be sourced from locally available approved sources, ground water will be extracted after obtaining permission from CGWA/ State Govt.

B. Power a) Power requirement during Exploratory and Appraisal well drilling The power requirement of drill rig will be met by three (03) DG sets (including one as standby) (3*1000 KVA) OR 2*1850 (1 working + 1 standby- Depending on the rig capacity & rig availability during E&A drilling phase), 2*350 KVA for drilling camp site and 2* 100 KVA for the radio room respectively.

V b) Power Requirement during Early Production For the Early Production, power requirement will be met through state electricity grid / or installation of Diesel / Gas Engine Generator (GEG) (1 MW output) and DG set (500 KVA).

Manpower: During the site preparation for drilling, approximately 30-35 workmen will be employed per drill site. During the drilling phase, about 50 workmen per shift will be working on site. This will include technical experts, who will be responsible for various drilling related activities and some technical manpower engaged are either from Vedanta Limited (Cairn Oil & Gas) or contractor’s crew as applicable. It is anticipated that, at any given time, there will be about 80 - 100 personnel working on site including technical staff, drilling crew, security staff etc.

2.5 Project Cost

The cost of the project has been estimated to be INR 201.835 Crores. 3.0 Baseline Environmental Status

To understand the existing physical, biological, socioeconomic environment both primary and secondary data was collected involving stakeholder consultations. The study period for primary data collection was 15th March 2019 to 15th June 2019.

Type of project The proposed project is a green field project. There is no interlinked and inter-dependent project.

Land use: The entire block area is divided into Agriculture land, Land with scrubs, Land without scrubs, Habitation and Water bodies. Among this agriculture land is major land use type in the block.

Accessibility: Roads: The proposed block HF-ONHP-2017/1 is located in Mandi and Bilaspur districts of Himachal Pradesh. Nearest town is Mandi which is located within the block. The block is connected with major National Highways. The two important National Highways NH 154 and NH 20 pass within the block.

Railways: The nearest railway station currently is the Jogindernagar Railway Station approx 34 km in NW direction from the block; this is the current terminus of the Kangra Valley Railway.

Airport: The nearest airport to Mandi is the Kullu Airport at Bhuntar, about 31 km from the block boundary in NE direction. This is a small domestic airport; only small aircraft fly to Kullu. Flights to Kullu are limited only from Delhi, and Shimla.

Hydrology: As per district Ground Water Brochure published by CGWB, Dug wells form major source of water for domestic and irrigation water supply. The depth of the wells ranges from 8 m to 26 m bgl, where depth to water level ranges from near surface 0.86m bgl to 9.92m bgl. In low plains, water levels are shallow and less than 5m and become deeper in terraces and fringe areas. Large number of tube wells, ranging in depth from 38.25 m to 140.98m have been drilled/constructed by tapping granular horizons, where water level ranges from artesian/free flow to about 19.35m bgl. The yield of the wells ranges from 15 to 999.24 lpm for economic drawdown. The stage of ground water development in Balh valley in Mandi district is 15.36% and falls under “Safe” category. There is thus, a scope for further ground water development.

Climate and Meteorology: Maximum wind blow was in the direction of NW-SE and wind speed range 0.1 to 18.0 km/hr during the study period. Based on the wind direction and wind speed it is interpreted that maximum dispersion of air pollutant will be in SE direction during the period of March 2019 to June 2019.

Temperature and Humidity was recorded in the range 10.1ᵒC to 44.6ᵒC and 10% to 98% respectively. Micro meteorology data study was also conducted with last 10 years and no major deviation was observed.

Ambient Air Quality: Ambient air quality was monitored at 8 locations for a period of 12 weeks. During the study PM2.5 was observed in the range of 12.0 – 39.7 µg/m3. Maximum concentration of PM2.5 was found at Mandi and minimum concentration at Radu village. PM10 was observed in the range of 27.9 – 77.1 µg/m3. Maximum concentration of PM10 was found at Mandi and minimum concentration at Radu village. SO2 concentration was observed in the range of 6.6 – 16.7 µg/m3, which is well within the standard limit. NOx concentration in was observed in the range of 9.8- 23.0 µg/m3, which is well within the standard limit. Concentration of other parameter such as O3, NH3, Benzene, BaP, Arsenic, lead Nickel, CO, Methane HC, Non-methane HC and Total VOC as isobutylene are found BDL. All the results of ambient air quality parameters have been found within the limit as per NAAQS. Based on comparison study of results for tested parameters with NAAQS, it is interpreted that ambient air quality of studied locations is good.

Ambient Noise Levels: Noise levels were monitored at 8 locations within the study area. Equivalent noise level was recorded in the range of 38.6 to 45.5 dB (A) in residential area during day time. Equivalent noise level was recorded 35.3 to 40.8 dB (A) in residential area during night time. Based on noise level data obtained during the survey for residential area and silence zone, it is interpreted that noise levels of the studied locations are within the standard norms prescribed by MoEF & CC.

Ground Water: Total of 8 ground water samples were collected and analysed for parameters as per IS: 10500 standards. pH was observed in the range of 6.68 – 7.79, which meets with drinking water desirable norms. Turbidity was found in the range of 0.8 – 1.1 NTU. Total Dissolved Solid (TDS) were recorded in the range of 202 - 406 mg/L with minimum at Bhadyal village and maximum at Baloh Village. Conductivity varies from 322 to 632 µmho/cm. The ratio of TDS to conductivity was observed in the range of 0.6 to 0.65 which is within the desired range. Total Hardness was in the range of 92 - 228 mg/L with minimum at well no.2 and maximum at well no.4. Total Alkalinity was found in the range of 96 - 208 mg/L with minimum at well no.5 and maximum at well no.7. Chloride was found in the range of 36 to 122 mg/L and Sulphate varies from 1.1 to 33 mg/L. Iron was found in the range of 0.05-0.26 mg/L with minimum at well no.5 and maximum at well no.2. As microbiological parameters, Total coliform and Fecal coliform were also tested and it was found absent. Based on comparison of test results with drinking water standard, it is interpreted that the water quality of ground water samples meet with the drinking water standard IS 10500: 2012.

Surface Water: To assess the quality of Surface water, samples were collected from 8 numbers of locations. During the analysis pH of the samples was found in the range of 6.86 – 7.35. TDS analysis was also carried out for surface water sample and it was found in the range of 140 - 262 mg/L. TSS was found in the range of 2 – 4 mg/L. Total Hardness ranges from 69 – 176 mg/L with maximum in the water sample of well no.5. DO is one of the important parameter to indicate towards the contamination of organic matter. DO level decrease as soon as organic contamination increases. During analysis DO was found in the range of 5.5-6.1 mg/L. COD and BOD analysis were also carried out during the study period and results were found more than the expected value for the Rivers. Various literatures show that BOD should be less than 4.0 mg/L for the better survival of aquatic life. Total Nitrogen was found in the range of 0.7 – 0.9 mg/L. Iron content was found in the range of 0.02- 0.18 mg/L and other heavy metals were found well within the limit. For Faecal coliform MPN test was also carried out for the surface water sample and it was found positive. It indicates towards the faecal contamination in surface water body.

Soil Quality: Soil samples were collected from 8 locations. Based on soil analysis data it is concluded that soil at the project site is non-saline (EC<0.8 dS/m). The soils are high in nitrogen, low in phosphorus and low to high in available potassium. The levels of total Fe, Cu, Cr, B and Zn are within the limits; however, copper is deficient, which needs supplementation. However, for successful greenbelt development liberal quantity of organic manure (50 tons/ha) and double the quantity of recommended doses of P fertilizer should be applied. The nitrogen and potassium are adequate; hence 20 % less than the recommended dose for green belt should be applied. As sulphur status is high, apply dolomite to bring down the soil pH to near neutral.

VII

Ecology: Studied area is enriching with floral diversity because the soil of the studied locations are fertile and they support to the growth of flora. Dense flora supports to wild life. Total 18 species of shrubs belong to 13 families, total 29 species of trees belong to 15 families, total 16 species of herbs belong to 12 families have been identified during the survey. Dominant trees of the studied region are Krishna siris, Kala siris, Kher and Shisham. Among the enumerated flora in the study area, none of them were assigned any threat category by RED data book of Indian Plants. No faunal species was cited in the study region comes under the category of threatened. Shikari devi wild life sanctuary, Nargu and Bandli wild life sanctuary are within 10 km arial distance from the well. Shannon index for aquatic biodiversity have been found more than 3 which indicate towards the clean water (uncontaminated in surface water bodies).

Traffic survey: NH-154, SH-13 and NH-21 connect the upcoming well. To assess the traffic load, 4 no. of surveyors were appointed to survey for NH-154, SH-13 and NH-21.

Existing Traffic Scenario with respect to LOS V (Volume in C (Capacity in Road Existing V/C Ratio LOS PCU/hr) PCU/hr) NH-154 1058 3000 0.35 B Nr. Well No.4 SH-13 682 1250 0.54 C Nr. Well No.2 NH-154 1102 3000 0.37 B Well no.5 & 6 NH-21 899 3000 0.30 B Nr. Well No.7 &1

Socio-economic Environment: During the primary survey it was observed that pakka road facility is available in all villages within 10 km radius. Literacy rate of the study region is from 46.15% to 90.91%. On the basis of survey for literacy rate data it is interpreted that there is need to promote educate more and more people. Almost all the villages have more than 50 % people as non-workers. It indicates that the problem of unemployment can be solved by providing proper training and education. There is also need to establish more industries so that maximum number of employment can be generated. Basic amenities like Education facilities Health care facilities, water supply, electric power supply, mode of transportation etc. are available in all villages.

4.0 Impact Assessment and Mitigation Measures

4.1 Site Selection & Land Acquisition

Impact An area of approximately 300m X 300m would be taken on temporary short‐term lease basis for the construction of well pad (drill site) for exploratory and appraisal wells. For the preparation of suitable access roads connecting to well pads, accommodating OHL and other utilities in future, a width of 30m (approx.) RoU will be required. Most of the drill sites are planned to be located in agricultural land and their procurement for project purposes will result in loss of landowner’s income for the lease period. As observed during field consultations, the expectation for compensation is significantly higher than the market rates and determining compensation will be pose a challenge. The procurement of land on lease can lead to moderate impact mainly due to expectations on compensation package.

VIII

Mitigation Measures  Final well location to be selected after considering all options to avoid agricultural land such as siting in fallow land in the vicinity and possibility for horizontal directional drilling;  Shortest possible distance between well site and road head to be considered for access road;  Consultations to be carried out with land owners for finalizing compensation packages; 4.2 Site Preparation

Impact The site preparation works at camp site and drill site may result in clearance of vegetation, dust generation and loss of topsoil. The earthworks to be carried will typically involve excavation; levelling / grading; and rolling and compaction.

Mitigation Measures  Water sprinkling to be carried out, while working in proximity of agricultural fields or settlements/habitations;  Runoff from drill sites located near ponds and catchment of tanks to be channelized through silt trap;  If any tree felling is involved, permission from the cocern forest department to be undertaken. 4.3 Construction of Drill Site

Impact Construction of cellar pit, water storage pit, and drilling waste storage pits will result in excavation of soil from each site. Noise from construction activity generated from bull dozer, DG sets and concrete-mixing plant, will be low and temporary in nature.

Mitigation Measures  Temporary storage sheds to be provided for storing of construction material such as cement;  Excavated soil to be used for construction at other project sites;  Detailed Health & Safety Plan to be provided to all civil contractors. 4.4 Installation of Campsite

Impact The campsites will be located in the vicinity of the drill site. Installation of porta-cabins with associated facilities will involve Health and Safety issues pertaining to transportation, loading - unloading of cabins and installation of cabins. Mitigation Measures  Crane to be is equipped with a legible, durable load chart that shows the manufacturer's recommended load configurations and maximum load weights; and  Surface conditions to be examined prior to movement of crane.

4.5 Transportation of Drilling Rig and Other Components

Impact Transportation of drilling rig, drilling equipment, materials and manpower will involve movement of about 80 trailer loads spread over 10 days use the existing roads till they reach the access road for each well site. The potential impacts may include Congestion of roads, wear and tear of existing roads.

Mitigation Measures  Movement of rig & associated machinery to be avoided to the extent possible during peak traffic hours; Local administration & village administration to be informed during movement of rigs through village roads;

 Only trained drivers with knowledge of Cairn’s requirement on defensive driving to be involved in the movement of rigs. All vehicles (light, medium and heavy) to be required to have valid PUC (Pollution under Check) certificate.  Periodic maintenance of all project vehicles and machinery to be carried out as per the preventive maintenance schedule. 4.6 Drilling and Well Testing

Impact Possibility of contamination of subsurface and unconfined aquifers may exist if the casing and cementing of the well is not carried out properly leading to infiltration or seeping of drilling chemicals or mud into porous aquifer region. The same is also valid for disposal of drilling waste and mud in an open/unpaved pit. However, with the project proponent catering to the use of water based mud and storage of drill cuttings and waste drilling mud in an HDPE lined pit, impact is considered to be of low significance.

Mitigation Measures  Optimized use of water during drilling operation.  Regular record keeping and audit will be done for the water consumption  Proper treatment of all wastewater and produced water and any water discharge from well site should comply with CPCB Inland Water Discharge Standards for Oil and Gas Industries  Waste mud to be stored in the HDPE lined pit  Drainage and sediment control systems at the well site will be efficiently designed  Construction activities viz. stripping, excavation etc during monsoon season will be restricted to the extent possible.  All chemical and fuel storage areas, process areas will have proper bunds so that contaminated run-off cannot escape into the storm-water drainage system.  An oil-water separator will be provided at the storm water drainage outlet, to prevent discharge of contaminated run-off. 4.7 Handling, transport and storage of Chemicals and wastes Impact

The drilling operations will involve generation of spent drilling mud, drill cuttings, waste oil and used containers

Mitigation Measures  Two separate drill cutting disposal pits to be provided for WBM and SBM;  Drill pits to be provided with HDPE lining on bottom and side surfaces;  The drill waste disposal pits to be located within the boundary of the drill site to prevent the spillage of waste mud and cuttings to nearby areas.  Used chemicals and waste oil to be sent to HPPCB authorized recyclers;  Fuel tanks to be provided with secondary containment facilities and maintained as per statutory requirements. 4.8 Noise Generation Impact

The noise generation sources will include DG sets, pumps for rig and other miscellaneous equipment. The noise modeling results indicate that the noise generated during drilling activities will meet the ambient noise level standards of approx. 55 dB (A) (during day time) and approx.45 dB(A) (during night time) in the nearest adjoining settlement area.

Mitigation Measures  The center of the drill site to be located as far as possible from any habitation and sensitive locations such as schools, health centers etc.;

 Rotary equipment on rig for drilling to be provided with silencers, rubber claddings and noise isolators;  PPE’s such as ear plugs and muffs to be provided to workers at site;  Preventive maintenance of vehicles and machinery to be undertaken;  DG sets to be provided with acoustic enclosures in conformance with Environment (Protection) Rules 1986. 4.9 Air emissions

Impact The drilling activities will lead to emissions from operation of diesel generator sets, GEG (Gas Engine Generators) and flaring during well testing.

Mitigation Measures  GLC’s value of PM,SO2 and NOx are 63.38 µg/m3, 19.20 µg/m3 and 22.72 µg/m3  DG set emissions shall be as per CPCB standards  In case of Ground Flaring To minimize the effects of flaring, the flare pit shall be made of RCC surrounded by a permanent wall of minimum 5m height (with refractory bricks), to reduce the radiation and glaring effects in the adjoining areas.  In case of Elevated flaring – Elevated flare system to be adopted, and designed with proper height  Location of the flare stack to be decided at the design stage taking into consideration nearest habitations, vegetation, public amenities or any sensitive locations;  Flaring of crude oil to be avoided, and crude oil to be effectively separated at the drill site and stored in barrels/tankers for transportation to the nearest terminal for management; 4.10 Occupational Health & Safety Risks Impact

The health and safety risks associated with drilling operations may include well kick or blow out, crane failure, fire Hazards and radiation hazard from well logging tool handling and storage.

Mitigation Measures  Blowout preventers to be provided;  All personnel engaged in working at more than 2m height, to be protected at all times by guardrail systems;  Flare pit to be placed at a safe distance from the well head and fuel storage areas;  Fire-fighting measures to be provided.

4.11 Operation of Camp sites – Impact

Each camp site would require would require 20-30 m3/day water for domestic consumption and will generate 25 kg/day (250g per person per day) of solid waste. Inadequate disposal and handling of waste will pollute the surroundings.

Mitigation Measures  Safe drinking water to be provided at camp site for consumption.  Segregation of waste at the source of generation to be put in practice.  The sewage from each porta-cabin to be connected to a modular STP.

4.12 Impact on Biological Environment

There is no demarcated and sensitive wildlife habitat within the Block or its adjacent area. The area is free from any migratory route or corridors (daily and seasonal movement) for animals. However, noise generated from drilling activities, lighting at well site, traffic movement will cause of disturbance to local fauna.

Mitigation Measures  The working area will always be kept minimum.  For felling of trees prior approval from State Forest Department shall be obtained;  Plantation of Local tree plantation should be undertaken;  Fencing would be done on the camp site to avoid any unfortunate encounter with faunal species. 4.13 Demobilsation and Abandonment Impact

If hydrocarbons are not found, a full abandonment plan will be implemented. The impacts from decommissioning of drill sites may include noise generation and soil contamination due to demolition of cutting pits and chemical storage areas.

Mitigation Measures  All the wastes to be completely collected from the site and sent to designated authorized disposal facilities prior to commencement of demolition work.  Prior to commencement of any demolition, a planned programme of site clearance will be formulated. All pits, cellars and holes will be removed, and filled to ground level, any oil or otherwise contaminated soil will be removed and disposed to properly.  Roads and other paving will be removed to sufficient depth to allow soil replacement and revegetation.  Top soil will be preserved properly.

5.0 Environment Management and Monitoring Plan

An Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan detailing mechanism for implementation of mitigation measures and monitoring of implementation has been formulated. The Management Plan comprises of separate plan for labour management, traffic management and Oil spill management.

5.1 HSE Organization Structure

Vedanta Limited (Divison Cairn Oil & Gas) has formulated a Health, Safety and Environment (HSE) Policy for its operations. The HSE structure comprises of a corporate HSE team based in Gurgaon office and an on-site team to be stationed at site. The HSEQ department of is headed by Director-HSEQ.

5.2 Environmental Monitoring Plan

A comprehensive environmental monitoring plan has been developed for the project. Monitoring of ambient air quality, noise levels, soil and groundwater quality to be carried out by MoEF&CC/NABL/HPPCB recognized laboratories for pre and post drilling operations to assess the effectiveness of the environment management plan.

5.3 Proposed CER

As per MoEF&CC office memorandum number F.No 22-65/2017-IA-III dated 1st May, 2018, Corporate Environmental Responsibility (CER) requirement will be fulfilled as per the prescribed rate.

6.0 Consequence Analysis

The consequence of igniting a hydrocarbon release during blowout depends on the type of material released, the mass release rate, the timing of the ignition, and the environment into which the hydrocarbon is released. Briefly, typical outcomes are:

 Jet fires: produced by an ignited jet of gas or liquid spray released under pressure;

XII

 Pool fires: produced by ignition of a liquid release that accumulates on the surface and ignites;  Flash fires: produced by igniting a gas cloud so that a fire propagates through the gas cloud (without generating a significant overpressure);  Explosions: produced by igniting a gas cloud in conditions where the resultant accelerating flame front produces a significant overpressure.

6.1 Risk Mitigation to Control Hazards

 Blowout

A pit level indicator registering increase or reduction in the drilling mud volume and shall include a visual and audio –warning device near the driller stand.

 A device to accurately measure the volume of mud required to keep the well filled at the all times.  A gas detector or explosimeter at the primary shale shaker and connected to audible or visual alarm near the driller stand.  A device to ensure filling of well with mud when the string is being pulled out.  A control device near driller stand to close the mud pump when well kicks.  Blowout prevention drill shall be carried out once every week near the well during drilling.  Suitable control valves shall be kept available near the well which can be used in case of emergency to control the well.  When running in or pulling out tubing, gate valve and tubing hanger shall be pre- assembled and kept readily available at the well.

Control Measures for H2S during drillingH2S Detection System: H2S gas detection system should be provided.

XIII

TOR COMPLIANCE

ToR Letter No.:IA-J-11011/118/2019-IA-II (I) dated 28th April 2019 under Schedule 1 (b) Category–“A” as per EIA Notification 2006 and its Amendment thereof for Onshore Oil and Gas Exploration and Appraisal in Block HF-ONHP-2017/1 at Mandi and Bilaspur districts of the Himachal Pradesh. A Standard ToR Citation S.No. ToR Point Reply 1. Executive Summary Incorporated in EIA/EMP report. Page III to XIII 2. Project description, project Drilling of 7 nos. new wells, has been Section 2.1, objectives and project benefits briefed. Physical, Ecological and Social page 6 to 11, benefits has been detailed. Chapter 2. Chapter 8 Page 190 3. Cost of project and period of The cost of the project has been Section 2.6, completion estimated to be about INR 201.835 Page 27 , Crores. Work will start after getting Chapter 2. Environmental Clearance (EC) from MoEF&CC, New Delhi. 4. Site details within 1 km of the each The details of any habitation, any other Table 2.2, proposed well, any habitation, any installation/activity, flora and fauna, Page 8 , other installation/activity, flora and approachability to site, other activities Chapter 2 fauna, approachability to site, other including agriculture/land are Figure 3.1 activities including agriculture/land, incorporated. Chapter 3, satellite imagery for 10 km area. All Page, 28 the geological details shall be mentioned in the Toposheet of 1:40000 scale, superimposing the well locations and other structures of the projects. Topography of the project site. 5. Details of sensitive areas such as Details are Incorporated in the Report. Table 2.2, National Park, Wildlife sanctuary and Page 8 , any other eco-sensitive area Figure 2.3, Along with map indicating distance. Page 9 Chapter 2 6. Approval for the forest land from the Not Applicable - State/Central Govt. under Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980, if applicable. 7. Recommendation of SCZMA/CRZ Not Applicable - clearance as per CRZ Notification dated 6th January, 2011 (if applicable). 8. Distance from nearby Not Applicable - critically/severely polluted area as per Notification, if applicable. Status

XIV

of moratorium imposed on the area. 9. Does proposal involve rehabilitation Not Applicable - and resettlement? If yes, details thereof. 10. Environmental considerations in the Environmental considerations in the Chapter 5 selection of the drilling locations for selection of the drilling locations is been Page 143-145 which environmental clearance is detailed. being sought. Present any analysis suggested for minimizing the foot print giving details of drilling and development options considered. 11. Baseline data collection for air, water Baseline environmental study has been Chapter 3 and soil for one season leaving the conducted for the study region within Page 28 to monsoon season in an area of 10 km 10 km radius of the project site for the 108 radius with center of Oil Field as its period 15th March 2019 to 15th June center covering the area of all 2019. proposed drilling wells. 12. Climatology and Meteorology Climatology and Meteorology study has Section 3.3, including wind speed, wind direction, been conducted. Page 30 to 39, temperature rainfall relative Chapter 3. Humidity etc. 13. Details of Ambient Air Quality Details of ambient air Quality Table 3.6, monitoring at 8 locations for PM2.5, monitoring at various locations (10 Page 43 to 44,

PM10, SO2, NOx, CO, VOCs, Nos.) for PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx, CO, Chapter 3 Methane and non-methane HC. VOCs, Methane and non-methane HC has been done. Monitoring and analysis was also carried out for CO, Total VOC, Methane

HC and Non Methane HC. Result for the CO, Total VOC, Methane HC and Non Methane HC was found well within the norms. 14. Soil sample analysis (physical and Soil sample analysis has been Section 3.11, chemical properties) at the areas conducted for 8 locations. Page 65 to 71, located at 5 locations. Chapter 3 15. Ground and surface water quality in Ground water Quality: Based on Section 3.12, the vicinity of the proposed wells comparison study of test results with Page 71 to 84, site. drinking water norms, it is interpreted Chapter 3 that water qualities of studied locations meet with the standards. Surface water Quality: Based on test result data comparison study, it is interpreted that surface water quality does not meet with drinking water norms as per IS 10500:2012. 16. Measurement of Noise levels within Based on noise level data obtained Section 3.5, 1 km radius of the proposed wells. during the survey, it is interpreted that Page 45 to 48, noise levels are within the standard Chapter 3

norms prescribed by MoEF & CC and noise environment can be considered good. 17. Vegetation and land use; flora/fauna No any REET floral and faunal species Section 3.6, in the block area with details of found in the study area around the Page 48 to 51, endangered species, if any. wells during the survey. Chapter 3

Section 3.13, Page 84 to 100, Chapter 3

18. Incremental GLC as a result of DG set Details are Incorporated in the Report. Section 4.5.1, operation, flaring etc. Page 114 to 130 19. Potential environmental impact Description of the potential aspects and Chapter 4 envisaged during various stages of impacts during the various stages of Page 109 to142 project activities such as site project is been incorporated. activation, development, operation/ maintenance and decommissioning. 20. Actual source of water and Water requirement will be met at the Section 2.3.3, 'Permission' for the drawl of water drilling site through water supplied by Page 23 to from the Competent Authority. tankers from nearest source. 24, Detailed water balance, wastewater Detailed water balance for the same is Chapter 2 generation and discharge. been incorporated. 21. Noise abatement measures and Acoustic enclosures and other required Section 4.6, measures to minimize disturbance practices will be provided for noise Page 131 to due to light and visual intrusions. abatement measures. 134, Proposed appropriate shading of lights Chapter 4 to prevent scattering. Detail for the same is been incorporated. 22. Details on wastewater generation, Domestic waste water would be treated Section 2.4.2, treatment and utilization /discharge in septic tank and soak pits. Process Page 25-26, for produced water/ formation Waste water will be discharged in HDPE Chapter 2 water, cooling waters, other lined evaporation pit for disposal, size wastewaters, etc. during all project of the pit is generally 50 m x20 m x1.5 phases. m 23. Details on solid waste management Generation of drill cutting and drilling Section 2.5.3, for drill cuttings, drilling mud and oil mud which will be unusable will be Page 26, sludge, produced sand, radioactive disposed in 1 mm HDPE liner. Chapter 2 materials, other hazardous materials, Contaminated soil and drill cutting will etc. including its disposal options be disposed within the site through during all project phases. capping the waste pits by HDPE liner and soil cover. 24. Disposal of spent oil and lube. Used lube oil will be stored at dedicated Section 10.5, storage area Page 197,

XVI

Chapter 10.

25. Storage of chemicals and diesel at Diesel and other chemicals will be - site. Hazardous material usage, stored at dedicated area storage and accounting. 26. Commitment for the use of water Solid based mud and water based mud - based mud (WBM) only will be used for drilling. 27. Oil spill emergency plans for Oil spill emergency plans for recovery/ Section 10.5, recovery/ reclamation. reclamation is incorporated. Page 197, Chapter 10.

28. H2S emissions control. Details are Incorporated in the Report. Section 7.3.13 Page 184-185 29. Produced oil/gas handling, Spent & lube oils will be stored at - processing and dedicated area. storage/transportation. Proper manifest as per Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Trans boundary Movement) Rules, 2016 and amended thereof will be maintained during storage, transportation and disposal of hazardous waste; etc. 30. Details of control of air, water and Details of control of air, water and noise Section 2.4, noise pollution during production pollution during production phase is Page 25, phase. been detailed in report. Chapter 2 31. Measures to protect ground water Measures to protect ground water and Section 4.9, and shallow aquifers from shallow aquifers from contamination is Page 136-137, contamination. been incorporated Chapter 4. 32. Whether any burn pits being utilized No any use of burn pits for well test - for well test operations. operations. 33. Risk assessment and disaster Detailed discussion on blowout has chapter 7 management plan for independent been addressed in chapter 7. Page 148 to reviews of well-designed 189 construction etc. for prevention of blow out. Blowout preventer installation. 34. Environmental management plan. Environment management plan for air, Chapter 10 water, noise, solid/ hazardous waste Page 192 to including OHS, CER and Plantation has 208 been introduced in the report. 35. Total capital and recurring cost for Total capital and recurring cost for Section 10.4 environmental control measures. environmental control measures is Page 208 incorporated. Chapter 10 36. Emergency preparedness plan. Emergency preparedness plan is been Section 7.3, incorporated Page 174 to 189 Chapter 7 XVII

37. Decommissioning and restoration Decommissioning and restoration plan Section 10.13, plans. is detailed in the report. Page 202-203 Chapter 2 38. Documentary proof of membership No any common disposal facility at - of common disposal facilities, if any. Tripura. 39. Details of environmental and safety Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & - related documentation within the Gas) maintains all the required relevant company including documentation documents and same will be continued. and proposed occupational health and safety Surveillance Safety Programme for all personnel at site This shall also include monitoring programme for the environmental. 40. A copy of Corporate Environment A copy of Corporate Environment Policy Figure 10.2 Policy of the company as per the of the company is incorporated in Page 193 Ministry's O.M. No. J-11013/ EIA/EMP report. Chapter 10 41/2006-IA.II(I) dated 26thApril, 2011 available on the Ministry's website. 41. Any litigation pending against the No any Litigation pending against the - project and or any direction/order project. passed by any court of law against the project. If so details thereof.

XVIII

CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 ...... 1 INTRODUCTION ...... 1 1.0 PRELUDE ...... 1 1.1 PURPOSE OF THE REPORT ...... 1 1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT AND PROJECT PROPONENT ...... 1 1.2.1 Identification of the project ...... 1 1.2.2 Details of the Proponent ...... 1 1.3 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT ...... 1 1.3.1 Nature of the project ...... 1 1.3.2 Size of the Project ...... 1 1.3.3 Location of the Project ...... 1 1.4 REGULATORY FRAMEWORK AND NEED OF EIA STUDY ...... 2 1.5 SCOPE OF THE EIA STUDY ...... 3 1.6 STRUCTURE OF EIA REPORT ...... 3 1.7 LIMITATIONS ...... 5 CHAPTER 2 ...... 6 PROJECT DESCRIPTION ...... 6 2.0 GENERAL ...... 6 2.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION...... 6 2.1.1 Location, Type and Size of Project ...... 6 2.1.2 Accessibility to the Block ...... 8 2.1.3 Salient Features ...... 8 2.1.4 Typical Well Site Details ...... 10 2.1.3 Need of the Project ...... 10 2.4 TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESS DESCRIPTION ...... 11 2.4.2 Exploratory & Appraisal well Drilling Process ...... 12 2.3 UTILITIES & RESOURCE REQUIREMENT, ASSOCIATED FACILITIES ...... 20 2.3.1 Accommodation & Camp Site ...... 20 2.3.2 Raw Material Requirement ...... 22 2.3.3 Water ...... 23 2.3.4 Power Requirement ...... 24 2.3.5 Fuel Requirement ...... 25 2.3.6 Manpower ...... 25 2.4 POLLUTION POTENTIAL AND ITS CONTROL MEASURES ...... 25 2.4.1 Air Environment ...... 25 2.4.2 Water Environment ...... 25 2.5.3 Solid/Hazardous Waste ...... 26 2.4.3 Noise Environment ...... 26 XIX

2.5 DRILLING HAZARDS ...... 27 2.6 PROJECT COST ...... 27 CHAPTER 3 ...... 28 DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT ...... 28 3.0 Introduction ...... 28 3.1 Baseline Study Area and Period ...... 28 3.2 METHODOLOGY ...... 29 3.2.1 Frequency of Sampling ...... 29 3.2.2 Method of Environmental Sampling and Analysis ...... 30 3.3 MICROMETEOROLOGY ...... 30 3.3.1 Temperature ...... 32 3.3.2 Humidity ...... 32 3.3.3 Cloud cover ...... 33 3.3.4 Rain fall ...... 33 3.3.5 Solar Radiation ...... 34 3.3.6 Wind Speed and Wind Direction ...... 34 3.3.7 Wind Rose ...... 34 3.3.5 Interpretation of Micrometeorological Data ...... 39 3.4 AIR ENVIRONMENT ...... 39 3.4.1 Selection of Sampling Locations ...... 39 3.4.2 Frequency and Parameters for Sampling ...... 41 3.4.3 Methodology for Sampling and Analysis ...... 42 3.4.4 Quality of Ambient Air ...... 42 3.4.5 Summary of Ambient Air Quality ...... 45 3.4.6 Interpretation of Ambient Air Quality Data ...... 45 3.5 NOISE ENVIRONMENT ...... 45 3.5.1 Sources of Noise Pollution ...... 45 3.5.2 Noise Level in the Study Area ...... 45 3.5.3 Summary of Noise Data ...... 48 3.5.4 Interpretation of Noise Data ...... 48 3.6 LAND ENVIRONMENT ...... 48 3.6.1 Land Use Pattern of the Study area ...... 48 3.6.2 Summary and Interpretation of Land Use Map ...... 51 3.7 GEOLOGY ...... 52 3.8 HYDROGEOLOGY ...... 52 3.9 Vulnerablity of the study ...... 60 3.9.1 Seismicity ...... 60 3.9.2 Flood History in Himachal Pradesh ...... 61 3.9.3 Drought in Himachal Pradesh ...... 62 XX

3.9.4 Multi Hazard Zones in Himachal Pradesh ...... 62 3.10 Traffic Study ...... 62 3.10.1 Interpretation of Traffic Study ...... 65 3.11 SOIL QUALITY ...... 65 3.11.1 Summary of Soil Data ...... 71 3.11.2 Interpretation of Soil Data ...... 71 3.12 WATER ENVIRONMENT ...... 71 3.12.1 Reconnaissance ...... 71 3.12.2 Water Quality ...... 72 3.12.3 Sampling and Analysis ...... 72 3.12.4 Ground Water ...... 72 3.12.5 Summary of Ground Water Result ...... 78 3.12.6 Interpretation of Ground Water Quality Data ...... 78 3.12.7 Surface Water ...... 78 3.12.8 Summary of Surface Water Quality ...... 84 3.12.9 Interpretation of Surface Water Quality Data ...... 84 3.13 ECOLOGY AND BIODIVERSITY ...... 84 3.13.1 Methodology of Ecology and Biodiversity ...... 85 3.13.2 Floral Diversity of the Study Area ...... 86 3.13.3 Fauna Diversity of the Study Area ...... 89 3.13.5 Interpretation on Ecology and Biodiversity ...... 98 3.14 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT ...... 99 3.14.1 Socio-Economic Survey Methodology ...... 99 3.14.2 Demography ...... 100 3.14.3 Population Density ...... 100 3.14.4 Sex Ratio ...... 101 3.14.5 Literacy Rate ...... 101 3.14.6 Economic Aspects ...... 104 3.14.7 Infrastructures Resource base ...... 105 3.14.8 Tourism, Heritage and Cultural Resources...... 107 3.14.9 Stakeholder Consultation ...... 108 3.14.10 Interpretation of Socio Economic Data ...... 108 CHAPTER 4 ...... 109 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ...... 109 4.1 IMPACT ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY ...... 109 4.2 IMPACT CRITERIA AND RANKING ...... 109 4.3 Impact Significance ...... 109 4.4 Impact Assessment ...... 111 4.5 Potential Impact and Mitigation Measures on Air Quality ...... 112 XXI

4.5.1 Air Quality Modelling ...... 114 4.6 Potential Impact and Mitigation Measures on Noise Quality ...... 129 4.7 Potential Impact and Mitigation Measures on Land Use ...... 132 4.8 Potential Impact and Mitigation Measures on Soil Quality ...... 133 4.9 Potential Impact and Mitigation Measures on Water Quality ...... 134 4.10 Potential Impact and Mitigation Measures on HYDROGEOLOGY ...... 135 4.11 Potential Impact and mitigation Measures on Ecology and biodiversity ...... 135 4.12 Potential Impact and Mitigation Measures on Socioeconomic Environment ...... 136 4.13 Potential Impact and Mitigation Measures on Occupational Health and Safety ...... 137 4.14 Potential Impact and mitigation Measures on Community Health & Safety ...... 139 CHAPTER 5 ...... 141 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES ...... 141 5.1 No Project Scenario ...... 141 5.2 Alternatives for Project Site ...... 141 5.3 Alternatives for Well Location ...... 141 5.4 Alternative of Technology ...... 142 5.4.1 Use of Water Based Mud and Synthetic Based Mud ...... 142 5.5 SUMMARY ...... 143 CHAPTER 6 ...... 144 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM ...... 144 6.0 GENERAL ...... 144 6.1 POST PROJECT ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM ...... 144 CHAPTER 7 ...... 146 ADDITIONAL STUDIES ...... 146 7.0 GENERAL ...... 146 7.1 PUBLIC CONSULTATION ...... 146 7.2 QUANTITATIVE RISK ASSESSMENT...... 146 7.2.1 Hazard Identification ...... 147 7.2.2 Hydrocarbon Release ...... 148 7.2.3 Release of the other flammable material ...... 149 7.2.4 Consequence Analysis/Calculations...... 150 7.2.5 Scenarios Identified For Consequence Analysis for HSD ...... 152 7.2.6 Software Used ...... 153 7.2.7 Consequence Analysis Results ...... 153 7.2.8 Calculation of Individual & Societal Risk ...... 163 7.2.9 Comparison to Risk Acceptance Criteria ...... 163 7.2.10 ALARP Demonstration ...... 165 7.2.11 Hazard Identification (HAZID), Consequence Analysis and Risk Results for the Project ...... 165 7.2.12 Shortlisting of Release Scenarios ...... 165

XXII

7.2.13 Risk Calculation ...... 166 7.2.14 Population ...... 166 7.2.15 FN Curve ...... 166 7.2.16 Location Specific Individual Risk (LSIR) ...... 167 7.2.17 Individual Specific Individual Risk (ISIR) ...... 168 7.2.18 Risk Reduction Measures ...... 169 7.3 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN ...... 172 7.3.1 Objective of DMP ...... 172 7.3.2 Emergency Identified ...... 172 7.3.3 Emergency Classification - Tiers of Emergency Response ...... 172 7.3.4 On-site Emergency Response Plan ...... 174 7.3.5 Responsibilities of the Individual Response Organizations ...... 174 7.3.6 Emergency Response Strategies / Evacuation Plan ...... 176 7.3.7 Training and Emergency Response Drills / Mock...... 180 7.3.8 Performance Measures ...... 181 7.3.9 Monitoring, Evaluation and Review ...... 181 7.3.10 Preventive and Mitigation Measures for Well Blow out ...... 182 7.3.11 Instrumentation in Mud System ...... 182 7.3.12 Preventive Measures for Handling Natural Gas ...... 182

7.3.13 Leakage of H2S Gas ...... 182 7.3.14 Preventing Fire and Explosion Hazards ...... 183 7.3.15 Off-site Emergency Plan...... 184 7.3.16 General Health and Safety ...... 185 7.3.17 Personal Protective Equipment ...... 186 7.3.18 First Aid ...... 186 7.3.19 Disaster Management Plan for Natural Hazard ...... 186 CHAPTER 8 ...... 188 PROJECT BENEFITS ...... 188 8.1 EMPLOYMENT POTENTIAL ...... 188 8.2 CORPORATE ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSIBILITY (CER) ...... 188 CHAPTER 9 ...... 189 ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS ...... 189 9.0 GENERAL ...... 189 9.1 APPLICABILITY OF CBA AND SUMMARY ...... 189 CHAPTER 10 ...... 190 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN ...... 190 10.0 GENERAL ...... 190 10.1 ORGANIZATION STRUCTURE FOR HSE MANAGEMENT ...... 190 10.2 AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN...... 192

XXIII

10.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN ...... 193 10.4 SOIL QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN ...... 194 10.5 SPILL / RELEASE MANAGEMENT PLAN ...... 195 10.6 NOISE QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN ...... 197 10.7 SURFACE WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT ...... 198 10.8 GROUND WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN ...... 199 10.9 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PLAN ...... 199 10.10 ROAD SAFETY & TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT PLAN ...... 199 10.11 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH & SAFETY MANAGEMENT PLAN ...... 200 10.12 FLARE & ILLUMINATION MANAGEMENT PLAN ...... 200 10.13 SITE CLOSURE PLAN ...... 200 10.14 EMP BUDGET ...... 206 CHAPTER 11 ...... 207 CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATION ...... 207 CHAPTER 12 ...... 208 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANT ENGAGED ...... 208 12.1 BRIEF RESUME AND NATURE OF CONSULTANCY ...... 208 12.2 EIA TEAM MEMBER ...... 208 12.3 LABORATORY INVOLVED FOR BASELINE MONITORING AND OTHER ANALYSIS ...... 209

XXIV

LIST OF TABLES Table 1.1: Structure of EIA report ...... 3 Table 2.1: Proposed well co-ordinates to be drilled in block HF-ONHP-2017/1 ...... 6 Table 2.2 Environmental Setting of Blocks Within the Study Area 10 Km Radius ...... 8 Table 2.3: Specification of the Drilling Rig ...... 14 Table 2.4: Typical Water requirement per well ...... 23 Table 2.5: Details of DG sets of Onshore Drilling Activity ...... 24 Table 2.6: Quantity of generated waste from drilling ...... 26 Table 3.1 Frequency of Environmental Survey ...... 29 Table 3.2 Method of Environmental Survey ...... 30 Table 3.3 Meteorological Condition of Study Area ...... 31 Table 3.4 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations in the Study Region ...... 41 Table 3.5 Details of Analysis Method ...... 42 Table 3.6 Ambient air quality monitoring results ...... 43 Table 3.7 Noise Monitoring Locations in the Study Region ...... 46 Table 3.8 Noise Monitoring report during day time ...... 47 Table 3.9 Noise Monitoring report during night time ...... 47 Table 3.10 Land use Statistics (10 km) ...... 51 Table 3.11 Ground water Resources ...... 53 Table 3.12 Traffic Study Report ...... 64 Table 3.13 Existing Traffic Scenario with respect to LOS ...... 65 Table 3.14 Details of Soil sampling location ...... 66 Table 3.15 Soil Sample Analysis Result ...... 68 Table 3.16 Soil remediation intervention value as per Dutch standards ...... 70 Table 3.17 Standard soil classification ...... 70 Table 3.18 Details of Ground Water sampling locations ...... 74 Table 3.19 Ground water Analysis Results ...... 75 Table 3.20 Details of Surface Water Sampling Locations ...... 80 Table 3.21 Surface water Analysis Results ...... 81 Table 3.22 Microbiological Analysis of surface Water ...... 83 Table 3.23 Inland Surface Water Classification (CPCB Standards) ...... 83 Table 3.24 List of Trees in the Study Area ...... 86 Table 3.25 List of Shrubs in the Study Area ...... 87 Table 3.26 List of Herbs in the Study Area ...... 88 Table 3.27 List of Mammals in the Study Area ...... 89 Table 3.28 List of Domestic Animal in the Study Area ...... 89 Table 3.29 List of Birds in the Study Area ...... 89 Table 3.30 List of Reptile and Amphibian in the Study Area ...... 91 Table 3.31 Details of Fishes ...... 92 Table 3.32 Details of Phytoplankton Sampling Locations ...... 93 Table 3.33 Phytoplankton Analysis ...... 94 Table 3.34 Phytoplankton species and Group ...... 94 Table 3.35 Details of Zooplankton Sampling Locations ...... 96 Table 3.36 Zooplankton Analysis ...... 96 Table 3.37 Details of Benthos Sampling Locations ...... 98 Table 3.38 Qualitative analysis of Benthos ...... 98 Table 3.39 Details of Population in Study Area ...... 100 Table 3.40 Details of Sex Ratio in Study Area ...... 101 Table 3.41 Details of Literacy Rate in Study Area ...... 102 Table 3.42 Details of Occupational Structure ...... 104 XXV

Table 4.1 Impact Prediction Criteria ...... 109 Table 4.2 Impact Identification Matrix ...... 111 Table 4.3: Environmental Impact Assessment Matrix without Mitigation Measures ...... 112 Table 4.4: Summary of Point Source Modeling ...... 117 Table 4.5: 24 hourly maximum incremental increase in GLC ...... 125 Table 4.6 Input Data for Noise Modelling ...... 130 Table 4.7 Predicted Noise Levels ...... 131 Table 4.8 Attenuated Noise Level ...... 131 Table 4.9 Impact Significance Matrix (with mitigation) ...... 139 Table 5.1 Ranks/Comparison of Different Types of Mud ...... 142 Table 6.1: Environmental Monitoring Parameters and Frequency ...... 144 Table 7.1 Identification of the Accident Event in Oil Well Drilling Activity ...... 148 Table 7.2 Pasquill Stability Class ...... 151 Table 7.3: Weather data used for the study ...... 152 Table 7.4: Overpressure Criteria ...... 152 Table 7.5: Population ...... 166 Table 7.6 Total ISIR Operations/Maintenance Staff ...... 168 Table 7.7 Total ISIR Non-Operation/ Maintenance Staff ...... 169 Table 7.8: Emergency Classification & Response Team...... 173 Table 10.1 Environmental Management Plan ...... 202 Table 12.1: EIA Team Member ...... 208

XXVI

LIST OF FIGURES Figure 1.1 Location map of the HF-ONHP-2017/1 block ...... 2 Figure 2.1 Google Earth Short view of Project Site ...... 7 Figure 2.2: Proposed well Locations in Block HF-ONHP-2017/1 on Toposheet ...... 7 Figure 2.3: Distance between block and ESZ ...... 9 Figure 2.4 Typical layout of drilling pad with QPU ...... 12 Figure 2.5 Typical layout of the well pad/drill site ...... 12 Figure 2.6: A typical model onshore drilling process ...... 13 Figure 2.7: Typical configuration of a Drilling Rig ...... 14 Figure 2.8: Flow chart for drilling mud & solid discharge ...... 15 Figure 2.9: A typical view of drill cutting separation & treatment System ...... 16 Figure 2.10: A typical process flow of QPU/EPU ...... 18 Figure 2.11: Water Balance for drilling of exploratory & Appraisal wells ...... 24 Figure 3.1 Study Area Map ...... 28 Figure 3.2 Graphical Presentation for the month wise Temperature Variation ...... 32 Figure 3.3 Graphical Presentation for the month wise Humidity Variation ...... 33 Figure 3.4 Wind Rose Diagram (15st March 2019 to 31st March 2019) ...... 34 Figure 3.5 Wind Rose Diagram (1st April 2019 to 30th April 2019) ...... 35 Figure 3.6 Wind Rose Diagram (1st May 2019 to 31th May 2019) ...... 36 Figure 3.7 Wind Rose Diagram (1st June 2019 to 15th June 2019) ...... 37 Figure 3.8 Wind Rose Diagram (15th March 2019 to 15th June 2019) ...... 38 Figure 3.9 Map showing the Study Region location of Ambient Air ...... 40 Figure 3.10 Photographs showing the ambient air monitoring activity ...... 41 Figure 3.11 Map showing the study region location of Noise ...... 46 Figure 3.12 Photograph showing the Noise Monitoring ...... 47 Figure 3.13 Methodology Used for Land use Classification...... 49 Figure 3.14 Land Use Map ...... 50 Figure 3.15 Land use Statistics (10 Km) ...... 51 Figure 3.16 Hydrological Map in Mandi District ...... 54 Figure 3.17 Hydrological Map in Bilaspur District ...... 57 Figure 3.18 Phisiography Map of Mandi District ...... 58 Figure 3.19 Phisiography Map of Bilaspur District...... 59 Figure 3.20 Seismicity Map of India ...... 61 Figure 3.21 Map showing the study region location of Soil ...... 66 Figure 3.22 Photographs of Soil sampling ...... 67 Figure 3.23 Map showing the study region with locations for Ground Water ...... 73 Figure 3.24 Photographs of Ground water sampling ...... 74 Figure 3.25 Map showing the locations for Surface water ...... 79 Figure 3.27 Map showing the study region location of Phytoplankton sampling ...... 93 Figure 3.28 Map showing the study region location of Zooplankton sampling ...... 95 Figure 3.29 Map showing the study region location of Benthos sampling ...... 97 Figure 3.30 Graph of Literacy Rate ...... 103 Figure 3.31 Occupational Structure of Study Area ...... 105 Figure 4.1: Impact Quantification Chart ...... 110 Figure 4.2: Methodology for AQM...... 114 Figure 7.1: Risk Assessment ...... 147 Figure 7.2: UK HSE-Individual Risk Criteria ...... 164 Figure 7.3: UK HSE-Offsite Group Risk Criteria ...... 165 Figure 7.4: FN Curve ...... 167

XXVII

Figure 10.1 Vendanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil and Gas) HSE organizational structure for implementation of EMP ...... 190 Figure 10.2 HSE Policy of Vendanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil and Gas) ...... 191

XXVIII

LIST OF ANNEXURES Annexure I TOR Letter ...... 210 Annexure II RoU ...... 211

XXIX

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1.0 PRELUDE Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) proposes to carryout exploratory including appraisal well drilling, and setting up of Early Production Units (EPUs)/ Quick Production Units (QPUs) and early production in the HF- ONHP-2017/1 block at Mandi and Bilaspur districts of Himachal Pradesh

This chapter describes the purpose of the report, identification of the proposed project and project proponent, justification of project, brief description, nature, size and location of the project, importance to the country and region, scope of the study and methodology of the study. The chapter also describes the scope of the study, details of regulatory scoping carried out as per Terms of Reference (TOR) issued by Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEF&CC), New Delhi. 1.1 PURPOSE OF THE REPORT As per Environmental Impact Assessment EIA Notification dated 14th September, 2006, the project falls under category ‘A’ of activity 1(b) - Offshore and onshore oil and gas exploration, development & production requires prior Environmental Clearance (EC) to be obtained from MoEF&CC before the commencement of project activity.

Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) had submitted Form-1 of the EIA Notification, along with a proposed Terms of Reference (ToR) for scoping to MoEF&CC. MoEF&CC issued an approved ToR vide No. IA-J- 11011/118/2019-IA-II (I) dated 28th April 2019. The copy of approved ToR is attached as Annexure-I. The baseline monitoring and all primary data collection was conducted for the summer season (March to May) of 2019, as per the requirements of the ToR. Draft EIA report has been prepared for public hearing.

1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT AND PROJECT PROPONENT 1.2.1 Identification of the project

Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) has been awarded the HF-ONHP-2017/1 hydrocarbon block under the OALP (Open Acreage Licensing Policy) by MoP&NG, Govt. of India. RSC (Revenue Sharing Contract) has been signed between Vedanta Ltd and MoP&NG on 1st October, 2018 for the exploration and exploitation of hydrocarbons. Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) proposes to carry out exploratory and appraisal well drilling and early production of oil and gas in the block. In case of a discovery (ies), the exploratory and appraisal well(s) will be tested for extended duration by flowing hydrocarbons to ascertain the reservoir parameters and assess the quality and commercial viability. Moreover, in case of commercially viable discovery (s) of hydrocarbons in the block and having established the size of the hydrocarbon field (s), field will be immediately brought into early production of crude oil and associated gas using some of the successful exploratory/ appraisal wells by setting up of Early Production Units (EPUs)/ QPUs (Quick Production Units) for the processing of produced well fluids.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 1 1.2.2 Details of the Proponent

Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) is one of the largest oil and gas exploration and production companies in India. Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) contributed ~25% to India's domestic crude oil production in financial year 2017-18 and has a vision to produce 50% of India’s oil and gas. 1.3 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT 1.3.1 Nature of the project The proposed project is green field in nature. The project is an oil and gas exploration and early production project.

The proposed project is to carryout exploration including appraisal, well drilling and setting up of Early Production Units (EPUs)/ Quick Production Units (QPUs) and early production in the block HF-ONHP-2017/1 at Mandi and Bilaspur districts of Himachal Pradesh.

1.3.2 Size of the Project The proposed onshore oil and gas exploration, appraisal, and early production is expected to carry out 1. Drilling of 7 exploratory (including appraisal) wells 2. Setting up of Early Production Units (EsPUs)/ Quick Production Units (QPUs) for produced well fluid processing and early production of up to 4000 BOPD of crude oil and 0.6 mmscfd of associated natural gas. 1.3.3 Location of the Project The block HF-ONHP-2017/1 is located in Mandi and Bilaspur district of Himachal Pradesh. It encloses an area of 666 Sq. Km. and is bounded by the points having following coordinates Table-1. Index Map of the block is shown in Figure 1.1 below.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 1

Figure 1.1 Location map of the HF-ONHP-2017/1 block 1.4 REGULATORY FRAMEWORK AND NEED OF EIA STUDY

S. Activity Aspect Legal Regulation No. Dust Emission  The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 and Site Noise & vibration Rules, 1982, as amended to date. 1. Preparation Solid waste  Chemical accidents (Emergency Planning, preparedness and Waste water response) Rules, 1996 Gaseous Emission  The Motor Vehicles Act, 1988 and The Central Motor Vehicle Drilling 2. Noise rules, 1989 Operation Solid & Hazardous  The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 and Rules, 1986, as

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 2 waste amended to date Waste water  The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000 as amended to date  The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 and Rules, 1975, as amended to date.  Environmental Impact Assessment Notification, 2006 as amended to date Early  Consent to Establish and Operate 3. Waste water Production  The Explosives Acts, 1984 with Rules, 1983  The Petroleum & Natural Gas Rules, 1959  Oilfields (Regulation and Development) Act, 1948  Hazardous Waste (Management, Handling & Trans boundary Movement) Rules, 2008 (as amended)  Petroleum Act and Rules, 2000  Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 and Rules, 1991 as amended 4. Recruitment Social to date

1.5 SCOPE OF THE EIA STUDY Draft EIA/EMP report has been prepared in line with approved ToR issued by EAC, New Delhi and as per generic structure as per the guideline provided by EAC. The EIA/EMP report includes collection of baseline data with respect to major environmental components, viz. Air, Noise, Water, Land, Biological and Socio- economic components for one season (summer). The study area map covering 10 km radius of project site is given in chapter – 3 of EIA report.

1.6 STRUCTURE OF EIA REPORT The generic structure of the EIA report as per the guideline provided by MoEF&CC is illustrated in the following tabulated format. Table 1.1: Structure of EIA report

S. EIA Structure Contents No. 1. Introduction . Purpose of the Report . Identification of project and project proponent . Brief description of nature, size, location of the project and its importance to the country, region. . Scope of the study – details of regulatory scoping carried out (As per terms of reference). . Site Selection Criteria 2. Project Description . Type of project . Need of the project . Location details showing general location, specific location, project boundary and project site layout. . Size or magnitude of operation

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 3 S. EIA Structure Contents No. . Project description including drawings showing project layout, components of project etc. . Proposed schedule for implementation, . Technology and process description, . Schematic representations of the feasibility drawings which give information important for EIA purpose. . Description of mitigation measures incorporated into the project to meet environmental standards, environmental operating conditions, or other EIA requirements 3. Description of the . Study area, period, components and methodology. Environment . Establishment of baseline for valued environmental components, as identified in the scope. . Study Period: 15th March 2019 to 15th June 2019 . Base maps of all environmental components. 4. Anticipated . Details of Investigated Environmental impacts due to project location, Environmental possible accidents, project design, project construction, regular operations. Impacts and . Measures for minimizing and / or offsetting adverse impacts identified. Mitigation Measures . Assessment of significance of impacts (Criteria for determining significance, Assigning significance), . Impact scores and Mitigation measures . Air quality modelling . Air Quality Index 5. Analysis of In case, the scoping exercise results in need for alternatives: Alternatives . Analysis of Alternatives and Other Technology (Technology and Site) . Selection of alternative 6. Environmental . Technical aspects of environmental monitoring for the effectiveness of Monitoring Program mitigation measures (including measurement methodologies, frequency, location, data analysis, reporting schedules, emergency procedures, detailed budget and procurement schedules) 7. Additional Studies . Risk Assessment . Disaster management Plan 8. Project Benefits . Physical Benefits . Ecological Benefits . Social Benefits . Other tangible Benefits 9. Environmental Cost . Not applicable as it is not recommended on scoping stage Benefit Analysis 10. Environment . Description of the administrative aspects of ensuring that mitigation Management Plan measures are implemented and their effectiveness monitored, after approval of the Clearance. The Chapter consists of: - Mitigation Measures for Impacts - Pollution Prevention Plan - Greenbelt Development Plan

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 4 S. EIA Structure Contents No. - Waste Management Plan - Environment Management Cell - Budgetary Provisions for EMS 11. Conclusion . Overall justification for implementation of the project, 12. Disclosure of . The names of the Consultants engaged with their brief resume and nature of Consultant Engaged consultancy rendered. Source: EIA Notification 2006

1.7 LIMITATIONS This EIA study is based on certain scientific principles and professional judgment to certain facts with resultant subjective interpretation. Professional judgment expressed herein is based on the available data and information. This report has been developed based on the project related information provided by Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) with the assumption that the information gathered is representative for the proposed drilling of 7 onshore exploratory and appraisal wells in Mandi and Bilaspur districts of Himachal Pradesh. If information to the contrary is discovered, the findings in this EIA may need to be modified accordingly. The impact assessment for the Project is based on the project configuration as described in Section 2 on Project Description.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 5 CHAPTER 2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 2.0 GENERAL This chapter described type, need, location, size or magnitude of project, operational activities, technology to be used and other related activities. It also provides a condensed description of the aspects which are likely to cause environmental effects to the surrounding environment and mitigation measures provided to meet environmental standards.

2.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION Vedanta Ltd. (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) has been awarded the HF-ONHP-2017/1 hydrocarbon block under the OALP (Open Acreage Licensing Policy) by MoP&NG, Govt. of India. RSC (Revenue Sharing Contract) has been signed between Vedanta Ltd and MoP&NG on 1st October, 2018 for the exploration and exploitation of hydrocarbons. A copy of RSC is attached as Annexure II. Vedanta Ltd. (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) proposes to carry out exploratory and appraisal well drilling and early production in the block. In case of a discovery (ies), the exploratory and appraisal well(s) will be tested for extended duration by flowing hydrocarbons to ascertain the reservoir parameters and assess the quality and commercial viability. Moreover, in case of commercially viable discovery (s) of hydrocarbons in the block and having established the size of the hydrocarbon field (s), field will be immediately brought into early production of crude oil and associated gas using some of the successful exploratory/ appraisal wells by setting up of temporary and mobile Early Production Units (EPUs)/ QPUs (Quick Production Units) for the processing of produced well fluids.

The proposed project is green field in nature. There is no interlinked and inter-dependent project.

2.1.1 Location, Type and Size of Project

The block HF-ONHP-2017/1 is located in Mandi and Bilaspur districts of Himachal Pradesh covering an area of 666 Sq. Km. The estimated cost of the proposed project is approximately Rs. 201.835 Crores. The tentative drilling locations are presented in satellite image which are shown in Figure 2.1 and 2.2 below. The proposed co-ordinates of the exploratory and appraisal wells are given in the Table 2.1 below. Table 2.1: Proposed well co-ordinates to be drilled in block HF-ONHP-2017/1

Well Id Longitude Latitude Village Tehsil District Land use 1 760 53’ 56.944’ E 31° 34’ 44.988” N Radu Mandi Mandi Agriculture 2 76° 57’ 13.683” E 31° 38’ 51. 708” N Bhadyal Balh Mandi Agriculture Nonagricultural 3 76° 56’ 23.667’ E 31° 31’ 45.481” N Jaroli Mandi Mandi Nonagricultural 4 76° 53’ 53.604’ E 31° 42’ 33.512” N Baloh Mandi Mandi 5 76° 53’ 25.543” E 31° 37’ 31. 106” N Taroh Balh Mandi Nonagricultural 6 76° 57’ 2.209” E 31° 35’ 7.882” N Darbathu Mandi Mandi Agriculture 7 76°52'47.03"E 31°32' 9.16"N Sunder Nagar Sunder Nagar Mandi Nonagricultural

Note: Actual geographical surface coordinates of exploratory and appraisal well locations will be within 2000 m radius of the proposed coordinates

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 6

Figure 2.1 Google Earth Short view of Project Site

Figure 2.2: Proposed well Locations in Block HF-ONHP-2017/1 on Toposheet

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 7 2.1.2 Accessibility to the Block The block is easily accessible through the rail and road network.

Roads: The proposed block HF-ONHP-2017/1 is located in Mandi and Bilaspur districts of Himachal Pradesh. Nearest town is Mandi which is located within the block. The block is connected with major National Highways. The two important National Highways NH 154 and NH 20 pass within the block.

Railways: The nearest railway station currently is the Jogindernagar Railway Station approx 34 km in NW direction from the block; this is the current terminus of the Kangra Valley Railway.

2.1.3 Salient Features

Physical environment setting in the vicinity of the block HF-ONHP-2017/1 have been given below at Table 2.2. Table 2.2 Environmental Setting of Blocks Within the Study Area 10 Km Radius

S. No. Particulars Description Name of Block HF-ONHP-2017/1 1. District Mandi & Bilaspur State Himachal Pradesh 2. Well site Elevation 761 m to 1200 m above MSL  Climate: Subtropical highland climate  Maximum temperature: 350C 3. Site specific  Minimum temperature: 30C  Max Rain Period: July to September 4. Geographical location in toposheet H43E13, H43E14, H43E15 5. Nearest town/city/district Mandi-within the block 6. Nearest Highways NH-154, NH-20, SH-13, SH-32 7. Nearest Railway station Jogindernagar ~34 km in NW Kullu Airport at Bhuntar, ~ 31 km from the block 8. Nearest Airport boundary in NE direction 9. State, National boundaries - Suketi Khad River 10. Neareby River Beas River Uhl River 11. Archaeological site None 12. Seismicity V - Very High Damage Risk Zone ESZ around Nargu wildlife sanctuary - 3.6 km NE Eco-sensitive Zone/ National park/ Wildlife ESZ around Bandli wildlife sanctuary – 2.7 km S 13. sanctuary ESZ around Shikari devi wildlife sanctuary - 8.9 km E Note: All distances mentioned above are aerial distances Source: Topo sheets, Google image and field visits

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 8

Figure 2.3: Distance between block and ESZ

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 9 2.1.4 Typical Well Site Details The site will be sized to contain all equipment and, storage, etc. using distances between various rig components in line with existing rules and regulations for the area of operation and the approved standard operating procedures. Within the above constraints, the site shall be sized to minimize environmental impact. The approximate area of each well site is dependent on the type of drilling equipment deployed which in turn is dictated by the planned depth of drilling. Minimum land required at each well site during drilling will be 300 m x 300 m, i.e., 9.0 ha. On an average, the land requirement at each well site, including site facilities and camp site is considered as 9.0 ha. The typical layout of the well site with ancillary structures is provided in Figure- 2.1. Each well site will require the following facilities:  Diesal Storage Tank & Pump  Diesal Generator  Flare KO drums & pumps  Elevated flare/Flare Pit  Fresh Water Pit  Storm Water Pit  Mud Pit  WBM Waste Pit  SBM Waste Pit  Hydrocarbon oily Waste Pit  STP/Septic tank & Soak Pit  Operator Room  Guard Room  Sub-Station  Control Room  Well Test Separator  Chemical Storage Area  Toilet Block 2.1.3 Need of the Project

The demand for petroleum has recorded a considerable increase over the last few years. There is a considerable increase in consumption of petroleum products due to the development activities in the country in the last few years. During the year 2016-17, the consumption of petroleum products in India was 194.60 MMT with a growth of 5.37% as compared to consumption of 184.67 MMT during 2015-16. The consumption of petroleum products during April-November, 2017 was at 134.60 MMT i.e. an increase of 3.40% over 130.17 MMT in April-November, 2016. The crude oil production for the year 2016-17 is at 36.01 Million Metric Tonnes (MMT) as against production of 36.94 MMT in 2015-16, showing a decrease of about 2.53%. Whereas Natural Gas production during the year 2016-17 is at 31.90 Billion Cubic Meters (BCM) which is 1.09% lower than production of 32.25 BCM in 2015-16. Import of crude oil during 2016-17 was 213.93 MMT valued at 470159 crore as against import of 202.85 MMT valued at 416579 crore in 2015-16 which marked an increase of 5.46% in quantity terms and 12.86% in value terms as compared to the import of crude oil during 2015-16.

Import of Crude Oil during April-November, 2017 was 144.72 MMT valued at 3,42,673 crore which marked an increase of 9.31% in quantity terms and 15.32% in value terms as against the imports of 143.81 MMT valued at 2,97,161 crore for the same period of last year. Therefore, India is largely dependent on import of petroleum goods to meet its requirements. Facing an environment of increasing consumption, static reserves, Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 10 increasing imports and increasing costs of crude as well as decreasing value of the Indian Rupee vis-à-vis the US Dollar, it follows that any accretion of hydrocarbon reserves in the country, is welcome. Vedanta’s proposed exploratory and appraisal drilling could possibly result in the discovery of hydrocarbon and in that case, will help in reducing India’s dependence on imports.

2.4 TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESS DESCRIPTION Land Procurement An area of approximately 300m X 300m would be taken on temporary short-term lease basis for the construction of well pad (drill site) for exploratory and appraisal wells. For the preparation of suitable access roads connecting to well pads, accommodating OHL and other utilities in future, a width of 30m (approx.) RoU would be required. Site Preparation Site preparation will involve all activities required to facilitate the operation of the drilling rig site preparation would be involve all activities required to facilitate the operation of the drilling rig and associated equipment and machineries. At the initial stage, the drilling site will be elevated to about 2.0 m from the existing ground level with minimal clearance of existing ground vegetation. The existing trees would be retained to the extent possible. All efforts would be made during the design of the drill pad to prevent felling of any mature trees. The loose top soil will be removed by using mechanical means like bulldozer and saved at a nearby place (away from the water channels) for later use during site restoration. Levelling and compaction will be done with the help of graders and mechanical rollers. The land filling materials and rubbles will be required for the purpose for site preparation in sufficient amount. Platforms for drill pad and all other heavy equipment systems or machinery, cast in-situ Reinforced Cement Concrete (RCC) would be used for the construction of foundation system. The rig foundation will be of 20m X 20m in size and will have an elevation of 0.6 m. For making the foundations of main rig structure, cast in-situ bored under- reamed piles of specified lengths will also be used. The elevated structures will have proper garland drains for storm water with sufficient gradient, made of brick masonry, to take care of surface runoff water. Specially designed pit of an impervious HDPE liner will be provided as part of the site development for disposal of drilling waste in the form of spent drilling mud and cuttings. A Campsite, elevated to the height as that of the drilling site (approx.2.0 m), will be set up adjoining the well site. Local earth and rubble will be used as the fill material. Proper surface gradients and brick masonry drains will take care of the run-off water, where as separate septic tanks and soak pits will be provided along with the labour camp for disposal of domestic waste water. Though the rig and related equipment’s will be directly brought to site, spares, mud preparing chemicals and other materials will be stored at a warehouse near to the site and will be received to the site from that intermediate storage area. The rig equipment will however be transported directly to the drilling site during mobilization and will be de-mobilized directly from the site. The materials will be intermittently supplied from warehouse to the drilling site, during the operations - with some stock at the drilling site itself. Though the rig and related equipment would be directly brought to site, spares, mud preparing chemicals and other materials will be stored at a warehouse near to the site and will be received to the site from that intermediate storage area. The rig equipment will however be transported directly to the drilling site during mobilization and will be de-mobilized directly from the site. The materials will be intermittently supplied from warehouse to the drilling site, during the operations - with some stock at the drilling site itself. A typical layout of drill site is given in figure 2.4 and 2.5.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 11

Figure 2.4 Typical layout of drilling pad with QPU

Figure 2.5 Typical layout of the well pad/drill site 2.4.2 Exploratory & Appraisal well Drilling Process All the 7 exploration & appraisal wells within the block will be drilled using an Electric Land Rig of around 1200-1500 HP capacity, equipped with a Rotary/Top Drive System. Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 12 To support drilling operation, the following systems and services will be included at the rig:  Portable Living Quarters – to house essential personnel on site on a 24 hr basis. These units are provided with Bath/Washroom.  Crane-age - cranes for loading/offloading equipment and supplies.  Emergency Systems - it includes fire detection and protection equipment.  Environmental Protection – Blow out Prevention (BOP) system, wastewater treatment unit, cuttings handling equipment.

Additionally, there will be other ancillary facilities like Drilling mud system, mobile ETP, Cuttings disposal, Drill Cementing equipment etc. and utilities to supply Power (D.G.sets), water, fuel (HSD) to the drilling process and will be set up as a part of the project.

The model drilling process is followed in forthcoming sections and a represented in Figure 2.7 below:

Figure 2.6: A typical model onshore drilling process

1. Drilling Activities Drilling Rig Type The proposed drilling shall be carried out by using a standard land rig or a “Mobile Land Rig” with standard water based drilling fluid treatment system. This rig will be suitable for deep drilling up to the desired depth of 5000 meters (TVDSS) as planned for the project. The typical configuration of a Drilling Rig is shown in the Figure 2.8. Additionally, there will be other ancillary facilities like Drilling mud system,mobile ETP, Cuttings disposal, Drill Cementing equipment etc. and utilities to supply power (DG sets), water, fuel (HSD) to the drilling process and will be set up as a part of the Project. The details of the drilling rig are as follows:

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 13 Table 2.3: Specification of the Drilling Rig Type of Rig Electrical Rig Power generator type & nos. AC – SCR Type. Details of solids handling Shale Shakers - 1200 GPM Capacity Desander – 1200 GPM Capacity systems on rig Desilter – 1200 GPM Capacity

Figure 2.7: Typical configuration of a Drilling Rig

Drilling Operation Wells will be drilled in sections, with the diameter of each section decreasing with increasing depth. Before commencing the actual drilling, large diameter pipe (Conductor) will be lowered into a hole and cemented/grouted. Conductor pipes provide a conduit for the return fluid during drilling next section and also prevent unconsolidated material falling into hole and potential washout problems. The lengths and diameters of each section of the well will be determined prior to the starting of the drilling activities and are dependent on the geological conditions through which the well is to be drilled. Once each section of the well is completed, the drill string is lifted and protective steel pipe or casing lowered into the well and cemented into place. “Casing” provides support to hole wall and secures hole section. Other than that, it isolates problematic hole sections such as loss zones, shale sections, over pressurized formations etc. After running casing, space between hole wall and “Casing” (annulus) will be cemented. This process of drilling and casing the hole section continues until the final well depth (target) is achieved.

Mud System and Cuttings During drilling operations, the drilling fluid (or mud) is pumped through the drill string down to the drilling bit and returns at the drill pipe–casing annulus up to surface back into the circulation system after separation of drill cuttings /solids through solids control equipment. The primary function of drilling fluid is to ensure that the rock cuttings generated by the drill bit are continuously removed from the wellbore. The mud must be designed such that it can carry the cuttings to surface while circulating, suspend the cuttings while not circulating and drop the cuttings out of suspension at the surface. The drilled solids are removed at the surface by mechanical devices such as shale shakers, de-sanders and de-silters. The hydrostatic pressure exerted by Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 14 the mud column prevents influx of formation fluids into the wellbore. The instability caused by the pressure differential between the borehole and the pore pressure can be overcome by increasing the mud weight. Hydration of the clays can be overcome by using non aqueous based muds, or partially addressed by treating the mud with chemicals which will reduce the ability of the water in the mud to hydrate the clays in the formation. Water based mud will be used for initial, shallower sections where massive shales are not encountered. The deeper and difficult to drill formations will be drilled using synthetic base mud (SBM). Synthetic base mud is biodegradable and can be re-used. At the end of drilling a well almost the entire amount of the SBM is collected for re-use in next drilling operation. SBM systems promote good hole cleaning and cuttings suspension properties. They also suppress gas hydrate formation and exhibit improved conditions for well bore stability compared to most WBM. WBM typically consists of water, bentonite, polymers and barite. Other chemical additives viz. glycols and salts may be used in conjunction to mitigate potential problems related to hydrate formation. The mud to be used will be continuously tested for its density, viscosity, yield point, water loss, pH value etc. The mud will be prepared onsite (drill location) using centrifugal pumps, hoppers and treatment tanks.

During drilling activity, cuttings will be generated due to crushing action of the drill bit. These cuttings will be removed by pumping drilling fluid into the well via triplex mud pumps. The mud used during such operation will flush out formation cuttings from the well hole. Cuttings will be then separated from drilling mud using solids-control equipment. This will comprise a stepped system of processes consisting of linear motion vibrating screens called shale shakers, hydro-cyclones (including de-sanders and de-silters), and centrifuges to mechanically separate cuttings from the mud.

Figure 2.8: Flow chart for drilling mud & solid discharge

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 15

Figure 2.9: A typical view of drill cutting separation & treatment System

Cementing Cementing is a necessary aspect of exploratory and appraisal drilling oil and gas wells. Cement is used to fulfill the following works:  Secure/support casing strings  Isolate zones for production purposes

Well Evaluation During the drilling operations for different zones, logging operations will be undertaken to get information on the potential type and quantities of hydrocarbons present in the target formations. Technicians employed by a specialist logging Service Company do well logging by different well logging techniques including electric, sonic and radioactive techniques. Logging instruments (sensors) are attached to the bottom of a wire line and lowered to the bottom of the well and they are then slowly brought back. The devices read different data as they pass each formation and record it on graphs, which will be interpreted by the geologist, geophysicist and drilling engineer. No emissions to the environment or any environmental harm is associated with wire line logging operations. The radioactive source required for well logging operations will be kept in specially designed container. In this drilling procedure, once the drilling is over, the well evaluation will be done by using electric wire line logs to assess the potential of the reservoir. This typically involves sampling the reservoir formation and pressure points during logging operations and reduces the requirement to flow hydrocarbons to the surface, significantly reducing the atmospheric emissions associated with the testing operation. Normally, in the event that hydrocarbons are encountered in sufficient quantities, as determined by electric wire line logs, a temporary drill stem test string may be run and the well fluids flowed to surface and processed using a surface well testing package, involving the oil being stored and trucked off the site and associated gas being flared to atmosphere.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 16 Hydraulic Fracturing – for Tight Rock Reservoirs of Hydrocarbons Hydraulic fracturing is used in tight rock reservoirs with low permeability, such as shale (i.e., the conductivity or ability of hydrocarbons to flow in the formation is low because of the small pore size in the rock). The goal of hydraulic fracturing in tight reservoir (shale) formations is to enable a well to produce the resource or to increase the rate at which a well is able to produce the resource. Hydraulic fracturing may be conducted in wells with low permeability formation and low pressure. Wells requiring hydraulic fracturing and numbers of stages of hydraulic fracturing per well will depend on seismic data acquired & interpreted and data acquired during the drilling phase of the project. Hydraulic fracturing is a common technique used to stimulate the production of oil and natural gas by creating fractures or cracks that extend from the well hole into the rock formations. This is accomplished by injecting fluid, which is usually a mixture of water and high viscosity fluid additives, under extremely high pressure. The pressure of the water will then exceed the strength of the rock, causing fractures to enlarge. After the fractures take place, a “propping agent” known as proppant (which is usually sand) is injected into the fractures to keep them from closing. This allows the hydrocarbon to move more efficiently from the rock to the well. A single well may require up to 15,000 m3 of water which may vary depending on the fracking requirements. For the hydraulic fracturing in a well, proppant mass of 150,000 – 200,000 lbs per stage and fluid volume of 2500 bbls – 4000 bbls per stage will be required. Fracturing effluent generated will be discharged in the HDPE lined pits at the drilling well sites. The effluent will be treated for disposal and reuse to the extent possible.

Well kick situation & Control measures While drilling, if the formation pressure exceeds the hydrostatic pressure exerted by the drilling fluid, formation fluids break out in to the well bore. This is called kick. Primary means of well control is to have sufficient over-balance over formation pressure. For some reason if an unexpected over-pressurized formation is encountered while drilling and if the well control situation arises, rig is equipped with equipment to control this situation. This set of equipment is called “Blowout Preventers (BOP)”. Blow Out Preventer consists of, “Annular Preventer”, which can generally close on any size or shape of tubular in the well bore and closes the annular space between drill string and casing. Another type of blowout preventer is a “Ram Preventer”. Ram preventers are of two types i.e., Pipe Rams and Shear Rams. Pipe rams also close the annulus between drill string and casing, but they have a fixed size. As such a specific pipe rams can be closed on a specific size of pipe. Shear rams are generally the last choice of preventer to be operated as they shear drill string and shut off the well bore. After determining the existing formation pressure and other geological complexities from the seismic data, appropriate BOP will be used as per standard oil field guideline for the same.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 17

Well Testing & Flaring During the exploration and appraisal drilling, where a hydrocarbon formation is found, initial well tests (generally about one month of duration) will be carried out to establish flow rates, formation pressure and other parameters. However, depending on the need, based on nature of the reservoirs, the exploratory and appraisal wells will be tested for longer/extended durations to ascertain the reservoir parameters. During the well testing, crude oil, natural gas and produced water could be generated and will be treated/disposed appropriately. Hydrocarbons will be flared. Efficient test flare burner will be used to minimize incomplete combustion. As an alternative option, if feasible, crude oil/slop oil will be transferred to nearby refinery (terminals/depots) for processing or will be sent to authorized recyclers.

Appraisal When, exploratory drilling is successful, more wells (termed as Appraisal wells) will be drilled to determine the size and the extent of the field. Wells drilled to quantify the hydrocarbon reserves found are called as ‘appraisal’ wells. The appraisal activity will be carried out with an aim to evaluate the size and nature of the reservoir, to determine the number of confirming or appraisal wells required, and whether any further seismic survey is necessary. The technical procedures and activities in appraisal drilling will be the same as those employed for exploration wells. A number of wells may be drilled from a single well pad/ drill site. Deviated or directional drilling at an angle from a site adjacent to the original discovery well may be used to appraise other parts of the reservoir, in order to reduce the land requirement.

Early Production Units (EPUs)/ Quick Production Units (QPUs) and Early Production

Early Production Units (EPUs) or Quick Production Units (QPUs) will be installed for the processing of produced well fluid. A EPU/ QPU will be a packaged/ modular mobile unit and will mainly consists of a heater-treater separator or a production heater followed with a three phase separator, electrostatic coalescer, oil storage tanks, oil tanker loading system, produced water separation and disposal system, power generation (GEG or DG), test separator skid, utility systems such as fuel gas, flare, Inst. Air package, diesel storage, firefighting equipment, etc. A QPF will be designed for a capacity of 2,000 BLPD (Barrels of liquid per Day) with water cut variation from 0 – 50 vol%. Typical process flow of QPU/EPU is presented in Figure 2.10 below:

Figure 2.10: A typical process flow of QPU/EPU

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 18

Produced well fluid from one or more successful exploratory/ appraisal wells will be gathered & sent to heater-treater separator skid for primary separation & heating purpose. Gathered produced fluid will be heated & degassed in heater-treater separator skid operating at ~2.5 – 3 Barg and ~70 – 80 0C and separated in to gas, oil and water streams. The separated produced (associated) gas will be either routed to fuel gas system or to flare depending on the quantity of produced (associated) gas. In case of sufficient quantity of produced gas, a part of the produced gas will be used for power generation (using GEG), for firing in heater- treater separator skid and for blanketing & purging purpose. The surplus gas post internal consumption (if any) will be routed to flare for safe disposal purpose. Separated oil from heater-treater separator skid will be sent to electrostatic coalescer separator (if needed, based on oil properties) to separate the residual water and achieve BS&W specifications. The treated crude oil from electrostatic coalescer separator will be sent to oil storage tanks. From oil storage tanks, oil will be pumped & loaded in to road tanker using the tanker loading facility for evacuation of crude oil to the nearby available facilities like terminals/ depots of consumers. Separated produced water (PW) from heater-treater separator skid will be sent to degasser vessel operating at low pressure. The evolved HC gases from degasser vessel will be routed to flare for safe disposal and the degassed water sent to PW treatment package. The PW treatment package will consists of a compact flotation unit or other equivalent gas floatation based de-oiling (oil removal) system and a filtration system. The treated water from PW treated skid will be stored in PW storage tanks. The produced water will be treated to achieve MoEF&CC/ CPCB/ SPCB specifications (discharge standards) and will be disposed off. The treated effluent (i.e. produced water) will be disposed-off using either a nearby down hole disposal well (by reinjection in abandoned well) or other available and suitable onshore disposal medium or solar/ mechanical evaporators depending on the quantity and feasibility. The power requirement will be met through either state electricity grid and/ or installation of Diesel/ Gas Engine Generator(s) using produced gas. If produced gas is sufficient quantity then power generation using produced gas will be preferred. Along with above processing facility, a well test separator skid will be installed at pad. It will be used for well testing purpose. Well under testing will be routed to test separator skid. The separated gas, oil & water will be sent back to inlet of heater-treater separator skid for further processing. Quick production set-up will have following utility systems & infrastructure for supporting the operations.  Wells with selected artificial lift and flow lines  Fuel gas system consisting of filters & a super-heater  Instrument Air package or Instrument as system  Chemical dosing packages i.e. corrosion inhibitor, de-mulsifier & scale inhibitor etc.  Elevated flare system or enclosed ground flare or ground flare  Closed drain system, storm water drain system  Fresh water storage  Diesel storage  Power generation (GEG and / or DG)  Firefighting equipment  Domestic sewage treatment facility (mobile STP or septic tank & soak pit system); Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 19

2. Completion of Drilling On completion of activities, the well will be either plugged and suspended (if the well evaluations indicate commercial quantities of hydrocarbons) or will be killed and permanently abandoned. In the event of a decision to suspend the well, it will be filled with a brine solution containing very small quantities of inhibitors to protect the well. The well will be sealed with cement plugs and some of the wellhead equipment (Blind Flange) will be left on the surface (Cellar). If the well is abandoned it will be sealed with a series of cement plugs, all the wellhead equipment will be removed, by leaving the surface clear of any debris and the site will be restored.

3. Decommissioning & closure of wells After the completion of the drilling activity, partial de-mobilization of the drilling rig and associated infrastructure will be initiated. As discussed earlier, well testing may be carried out immediately after the drilling is completed. The complete de-mobilization of the facilities at site will happen once well-testing completed successfully. This will involve the dismantling of the rig, all associated equipment and the residential camp, and transporting it out of the project area. It is expected that demobilization will take approximately 20-25 days and will involve the trucking away of materials, equipment and other materials from the site to bring it back to its original condition. It is estimated that about 50 truckloads will be transported out of site during this period. If no indication of any commercially viable amount of oil or gas is encountered either before or after testing, the well will be declared dry and accordingly will be plugged of and abandoned, and the site will be restored in line with regulations and good industry practice. 2.3 UTILITIES & RESOURCE REQUIREMENT, ASSOCIATED FACILITIES 2.3.1 LIQUID MUD PLANT The Liquid Mud Plant (LMP) shall be located at various locations of the fields to prepare synthetic based mud for the drilling operations. It is estimated around 3 – 5 LMP’s will be set-up at any a given point of time for the proposed drilling operations. All the tanks, equipment’s, civil works, pumps, mud laboratory with testing equipment along with the mud waste disposal pits will be constructed within a single location. The entire LMP area shall be provided with containment area and with facilities for fork lift movement and transportation of solid waste skips. The area shall be designed to facilitate tanks for SBM mixing/ storage, tanks of base oil storage and another tanks for brine mixing/storage. These tanks are interconnected with piping and manifold with mixing hoppers, pumps connections, centrifuges connection with complete mud conditioning set-up, loading-unloading piping/hoses connections. The Mud Plant area will be surrounded with a containment boundary wall. All the liquid transferred from the LMP to the drilling site will be through road tankers. For power supply requirement DG sets shall be required with one operational and one standby. The LMP shall have water storage tanks, bunk houses for operating office and site laboratory, dry chemical storage area in paved surface, truck loading and unloading area with parking facility, cranes & forklifts maintenance and parking facility, septic tank with soak pits, DG area, diesel storage area and power distribution panel & facility. 2.3.1 Accommodation & Camp Site Drilling camp sites will be set-up within the drilling sites to allow for easy movement of the crew between the camp and the drilling sites. The camp site would generally comprise of transportable container cabins (portable cabin) of 20 feet and 40 feet size to provide accommodation to operational crew and the contractor personnel. Each cabin will house 2 to 4 persons. Toilet facilities will be built as part of the accommodation unit. The sewage lines from the units shall be connected through a pipeline system to a septic tank and soak

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 20 pit system. Additionally, there will be dedicated cabins to serve as kitchen, cold storage, dining area, recreation area, laundry etc.

Approach and Internal Roads The approach road to drill sites will be constructed and/or existing roads will be strengthened for movement of construction machinery, drilling rig, material supply vehicles, passenger vehicles etc. depending on the location of drill site. In general, it is intended to make the maximum use of the existing road infrastructure. Water Storage Pit The water storage pit contains the water used for preparing drilling fluid and domestic purpose. Provision for additional water storage will be kept in case multi-stage fracturing is planned. Chemical Storage Area The chemicals to be used in preparing mud will be stored on a paved platform with kerb walls and protected against weather by an impervious covering. All the storage areas will be identified with labelling and sign boards. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) shall be maintained for all chemicals that are stored and handled at the drill site. The storage area will be provided with adequate number of fire extinguishers. Spent Drilling Fluid Disposal Pits All wastewater from the drilling operations will be collected in the drilling fluid storage pit. The wastewater in this storage pits will be recycled and reused during drilling phase. The residual wastewater will be sent to solar evaporation pit for natural solar drying. The pits will be lined with HDPE sheet (1500-micron thickness) and the overlaps welded together with the edges bought over the rim and tucked into the cement mortar / bund soil. Drill Cutting Disposal (impervious lined) Pit While recycling the mud, the drill cutting will be separated through shale shaker, which will be disposed off to cutting disposal pit. This pit will be similar in construction to the solar pit. It will be lined to avoid contamination of land and groundwater. The pit will be soil bunded and HDPE lined to prevent any overflow to the surroundings. Flare Pit (well testing) To conduct ground flaring, all the sites will have a flaring pit with adequate burner. The flare pit will be made up of RCC / brick lining and are located preferably 90 degrees to the predominant wind direction. The location of the pit also depends on the entry to the site from the adjacent road side, processing units or tanks. Flare Stack A flare system consists of the flare stack or boom and pipes which collect the gases to be flared. The flare tip at the end of the stack or boom is designed to assist entrainment of air into the flare to improve burn efficiency. Seals installed in the stack prevent flashback of the flame, and a vessel at the base of the stack removes and conserves any liquids from the gas passing to the flare. For effective flaring CPCB’s document “Oil & Gas drilling and extraction industry” June 2006 will be followed as follows:

 Standard flare design - An efficient test flare burner head equipped with a combustion enhancement system will be selected to minimize incomplete combustion, black smoke, and hydrocarbon fallout. Volumes of hydrocarbons flared will be recorded.

 Location and height of the flare stack based on maximum ground level concentration criteria & maximum radiation intensity exposure criteria

 Flare stack- Minimum physical height of stack should be 30 m from ground level. Only in those situations and or locations where elevated flares are not technical feasible, then ground flaring/enclosed ground flaring may be resorted to, such as when there is a crop cultivation /

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 21 vegetation in the vicinity of the well pad or / and where flared gas volume is <0.5 MMSCFD (due to this low volume, sometimes elevated flare gets extinguished in presence of wind)

Diesel Storage Tank The fuel (diesel) will be received in bulk quantity through tankers and shall be stored in above ground steel diesel tanks (approximately 60 KL capacity). The tank area is is provided with secondary containment of adequate capacity to control any accidental leaks. Waste Storage Hazardous wastes generated from drilling activities such as used oil from pumps and machinery, empty chemical and fuel barrels, contaminated oil rags and soil etc will be collected and stored in a designated storage area. The storage area will have paved flooring, containment bund and roof. Waste oil from pumps and machinery will be collected and stored in used oil barrels and shall be kept in a designated storage area. The oily waste pit will be 18 m x16.5m in dimension. The contaminated soil and cotton rags will be disposed of at approved secured Land fill as per the legal provision. Used oil will be disposed off through recyclers/ re- processors registered with the Central Pollution Control Board and authorized by State Pollution Control Board. Storm Water Drainage System A garland drain will be provided all around the drilling site to prevent runoff of any oil containing waste water into the nearby natural drainage area. The storm water drain shall be provided and the collected water shall be sent to storm water pit Spill Containment System Containment systems and oil traps will be provided to trap any spillage of oil at the drilling site. All potential sources of spillage will be equipped with drip pans in order to contain spills. Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) Modular STP or septic and soak pit of capacity 30 m3/day for treatment of sewage and sullage Water generated within the well pad limits. Each well site and camp site will have toilets which will be provided with septic tanks and soak pit arrangement. To cater to about people that will stay in the camps site, adequately sized septic tanks and soak pits will be provided. 2.3.2 Raw Material Requirement Drilling During drilling activities, materials like HSD, Steel (in the form of casings & tubulars) and chemicals like barite, oil well cement and bentonite will be required. Other production equipments like tubular (Casing and tubings), wellhead assembly, packer etc, and chemicals for mud and cementing required for the drilling operations and shall be procured by the company from within the country and from abroad before the commencement of operations. Water based mud will be used for initial, shallower sections where massive shales are not encountered. The deeper and difficult to drill formations will be drilled using synthetic base mud (SBM). Synthetic based mud can be re-used. WBM typically consists of water, bentonite, polymers and barite. Other chemical additives viz. glycols and salts may be used in conjunction to mitigate potential problems related to hydrate formation.  Requirement WBM (approx.) 800-1000 m3/well

 Requirement SBM (approx.) 600-800 m3/well

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 22 The role of the mud in pressure control is especially important. If the drill bit penetrates a formation containing oil, gas or water under pressure these fluids are prevented from flowing into the borehole by ensuring that the drilling mud is of sufficient density to the natural formation pressures. The density of the mud can be increased by the addition of barite weighting material. Bentonite is employed to improve the theological properties and enable the drill cuttings to be transported from the hole while drilling and also be suspended in the fluid while the drill bit is being changed. The barite used in the drilling mud would be as per American Petroleum Institute (API) standard specifications. 2.3.3 Water

2.3.3.1 Water Requirement during Drilling Operations The water requirement in drilling rig is mainly meant for preparation of drilling mud apart from washings and domestic use. While former constitutes majority of water requirement, latter or the water requirement for domestic and wash use is minor. The water requirement per well is shown in Table 2.4.

Table 2.4: Typical Water requirement per well Description Quantity (m3/d) Water for Water based mud 600-1000 (m3/day/well) Water for synthetic based mud 150-300 (m3/day/well) Water for domestic use 20-30 (m3/day/well) Water for Early Production 15-18 (m3/day/well)

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 23

Figure 2.11: Water Balance for drilling of exploratory & Appraisal wells

2.3.4 Power Requirement

2.3.4.1 Power Requirement during Drilling Operations The power requirement in the drilling site and the campsites will be provided through diesel generator (DG) sets. The rated capacity of the DG sets required for onshore drilling site is provided in following Table 2.5. Table 2.5: Details of DG sets of Onshore Drilling Activity Location DG Capacity Camp site 2 X 350 kVA (one working and one standby) Drilling site 3 x 1000 kVA (two working and one standby) or 2 x 1850 (1 working + 1 standby)* Radio Room 2 x 100 kVA (one working and one standby) * Depending on the rig capacity & rig availability during E&A drilling phase. Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 24 2.3.4.2 Power Requirement during early Production Operations For the Early Production, power requirement will be met through state electricity grid / or installation of Diesel / Gas Engine Generator (GEG) (1 MW output) and DG set (500 KVA).

2.3.5 Fuel Requirement Fuel consumed during the drilling phase will mainly be diesel (HSD) used for various equipment and vehicles operating to transport goods and supplies to site. It is estimated that about 60 KL diesel will be required to power the off-road construction equipment and vehicles during site preparation phase. During the drilling phase, consumption about 3.5 KLD of High-Speed Diesel will be required. Fuel will be supplied onsite by local supplier through mobile tankers. Out of this, a major part approximately 85% will be consumed by the rig (also include the DG sets) and about 15% will be required for the campsite. 2.3.6 Manpower Most of the workforce will be from local area. During the site preparation for drilling, approximately 30-35 workmen will be employed per drill site. During the drilling phase, about 50 workmen per shift will be working on site. This will include technical experts, who will be responsible for various drilling related activities and some technical manpower It is anticipated that, at any given time, there will be 80-100 (approx.) personnel working on site including technical staff, drilling crew, security staff etc.

Drilling Mud Water based mud will be used for initial, shallower sections where massive shales are not encountered. The deeper and difficult to drill formations will be drilled using synthetic base mud (SBM). Synthetic base mud can be re-used. WBM typically consists of water, bentonite, polymers and barite. Other chemical additives viz. glycols and salts may be used in conjunction to mitigate potential problems related to hydrate formation.  Requirement WBM (approx.) 800-1000 m3/well  Requirement SBM (approx.) 600-800 m3/well 2.4 POLLUTION POTENTIAL AND ITS CONTROL MEASURES The various types of pollution from the proposed project operations are:  Liquid Waste;  Air Emission;  Solid Waste Generation & disposal ; and  Noise Generation. Exhaust gases from DG sets, wastewater, drilling wastes and noise from the drilling operations are the major sources of the pollutants generated during the proposed drilling operations which is temporary activity lasting for maximum of 45-60 days at each of the well locations. 2.4.1 Air Emissions Drilling Operations The emissions to the atmosphere from the drilling operations shall be from the diesel engines, and power generator and temporary from flaring activity (during testing). Appropriate air emission control measures will be taken. 2.4.2 Liquid Waste Drilling Operations The drilling operation will generate wastewater in the form of wash water due to washing of equipment, string and cuttings etc. The only other source of wastewater generated from drilling operation is sewage from sanitation facilities, around 15-25 m3/day, which shall be disposed through septic tanks/soak pits. It is expected that wastewater in the form of Drill cutting washing + Rig washing+ cooling etc shall be generated at

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 25 an average rate of around 30-40 m3/day during the drilling operations from a single well. Waste water will be discharged in HDPE lined evaporation pit for disposal, size of the pit is generally 50 m x20 m x1.5 m.

During early Production The produced water will be treated to achieve MoEF&CC\/ CPCB/ SPCB specification (discharge standards) and will be disposed off. The treated effluent (produced water) will be disposed off using either a nearby down hole disposal well (by reinjection in abandoned well) or other available & suitable onshore disposal medium or solar/ mechanical evaporators depending on feasibility.

2.5.3 Solid/Hazardous Waste Drilling Operations The drill cuttings and spent drilling mud will be generated at site per well during drilling operations. This will be stored in well-designed HDPE line pit. It will be handed over to authorized TSDF. Used /waste Oil generated will be sent to authorized recyclers. Domestic waste of 25-30 kg/day per well will be generated at site, which will be segregated at source (Organic / Inorganic) and disposed accordingly. The expected waste generation from well drilling will be as per Table 2.6. Table 2.6: Quantity of generated waste from drilling

S.N Nature of waste Quantity A Hazardous Waste 1 Drill cuttings associated with SBM 250-750 tons/well 2 Drill cuttings associated with WBM 500-1500 tons/well 2 Residual drilling mud, sludge and other drilling waste 250-500 tons/well 3 Used Lubricating oil 1-2 tons/well B Non Hazardous Waste 4 Food waste 25-30 kg per/day 5 Non-combustible waste containing metallic residues 1000-1200 kg per well 6 Packaging wastes including drums, wooden pallets, plastic 1000-1200 kg per well 7 Left over chemicals and materials, scrap metal 250-300 kg per well 8 Cement, grit, blasting and painting wastes. 500-600 kg per well

2.4.3 Noise Environment

Drilling Operations The source of noise generation during this phase of operations will be the operation of rig and diesel generator sets. The expected noise generation at source is due to operation of rig. Besides, certain pumps are expected to be in operation during this phase, for mud circulation. The noise generation work however is transient and limited to the drilling period only. Appropriate control measures will be taken to minimize exposure of noise to drill personnel.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 26

2.5 DRILLING HAZARDS Loss of well control / blow-out, fire, explosion and oil spills are the major potential hazards associated with drilling for oil and gas. Effective response plans to foreseeable emergencies will be developed by Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) and communicated to project teams. A risk assessment will be carried out as part of this draft EIA will also contribute towards identification of hazards, risks and formulation of management plans for emergency response, blowout, oil spills etc. 2.6 PROJECT COST Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil and Gas) has planned to carry out the proposed project activities in the HF-ONHP-2017/1 Block over a period of 10-12 years. The cost of the project has been estimated to be about INR 201.835 Crores.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 27 CHAPTER 3 DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT 3.0 INTRODUCTION The baseline environmental quality is assessed through field studies within the probable impact zone for various components of the environment viz. Air, Water, Soil, Noise, Ecology & Bio diversity, Traffic, and Socio- economic. The baseline monitoring has been conducted in Mandi and Bilaspur district. An exhaustive attempt has been made in the current chapter to disclose all possible baseline status of environmental quality in the study area, which further serves as the basis for identification, prediction and evaluation of impacts.

3.1 BASELINE STUDY AREA AND PERIOD The baseline environmental study has been conducted for the period Mar to June 2019 for 13 weeks. Villages covered within study region are shown in the Figure 3.1.

Figure 3.1 Study Area Map

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 28 3.2 METHODOLOGY A desktop discussion conducted and it was decided that monitoring shall be carried out. Various publications by the government of India and literature available on internet were used as secondary data for physical, biological and socio-economic parameters. 3.2.1 Frequency of Sampling

Details of frequency of environmental sampling considered for the study are illustrated in Table 3.1. Table 3.1 Frequency of Environmental Survey Sampling Attributes Locations Parameters Frequency A. Air Environment Micro-meteorological Mandi district Temperature, Relative Hourly data for the period Data Humidity, Wind direction, 15th March 2019 to 15th Wind Speed, Rainfall, Solar June 2019. radiation and Cloud cover

Ambient Air Quality 8 PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx, CO, 24 hour basis, twice a

O3, Benzene, BaP, Pb, As, week during study period

Ni, NH3, Methane and Non- methane HC, Total VOC B. Noise 8 Lmin, Lmax, Ld, Ln, Leq Once in Study Period. C. Water Ground Water 8 Physical, Chemical, Once in Study Period. Microbiological and Heavy Metal. Surface Water 8 Physical, Chemical, Heavy Once in Study Period. Metal, Microbiological, Biological D. Soil Quality 8 Physical, Chemical Once in Study Period. Characteristics, Soil Texture. E.Traffic Study 4 Traffic density of various Once in Study Period. types of vehicle to calculate LOS. F. Land Use - 10 km. radius from the Once in Study Period. project site. G. Ecology and - 10 km. radius from the Once in Study Period. Biodiversity project site. H. Socio Economic - 10 km. radius from the Once in Study Period. project site. I. Geology - Mandi and Bilaspur District, Once in Study Period. Hiamchal pradesh J.Hydrogeology - Mandi and Bilaspur District, Once in Study Period. Hiamchal pradesh

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 29 3.2.2 Method of Environmental Sampling and Analysis The methods adopted for environmental sampling and analysis are illustrated in following Table 3.2

Table 3.2 Method of Environmental Survey Methods Attributes Sampling/Preservation Analysis/data analysis A. Air Environment Micro-meteorological Data collected on hourly basis using wind IS 8829 Data monitor as per CPCB Guidelineand IS 8829 Ambient air quality As per IS: 5182, CPCB & AWMA. IS:5182,CPCB & AWMA B. Noise Instrument : Sound level meter Survey carried out as per CPCB guideline. C. Water Standard Methods for Examination of IS 3025 & Standard Methods for Ground Water and Water and Wastewater, 23rd edition, APHA Examination of Water and Wastewater, Surface Water 2017. 23rd edition, APHA 2017. IS 2720, Soil Testing in India (Department IS 2720, Laboratory developed Method as of Agriculture & Cooperation). per NABL requirement and Book - Soil D. Soil Quality Testing in India (Department of Agriculture & Cooperation). E.Traffic Study Manual count for different types of Statical calculation for LOS vehicles F. Land Use Using United States Geological Survey - (USGS) Satellite Data: Land sat 8 cloud free data for Land use /Land cover analysis, Satellite Sensor–OLITIRS multi-spectral digital data. G. Ecology and Faunal survey- opportunistic observation/ Group wise species classification as per Biodiversity species list method/direct sighting the requirement. /intensive search/ bird calls/nests, burrows, dropping or scats and conformation with local public. Floral survey – visual observation and public consultation Aquatic survey – APHA 23rd Edition, 2017 H. Socio Economic Primary survey and census 2011 Data analysis as per the requirement I. Geology Secondary data as per CGWB - J. Hydrology Secondary data as per CGWB -

3.3 CLIMATE & METEOROLOGY The study of micro meteorological data helps to understand the variations in the ambient air quality status in that region. The prevailing micrometeorological condition at project site plays a crucial role in transport and dispersion of air pollutants. The persistence of the predominant wind direction and wind speed at the project site decide the direction and extent of the air pollution impact zone. The principal variables which affect the micrometeorology are horizontal transport and dispersion, convective transport and vertical mixing and Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 30 topography of the area towards local influences. Micrometeorological data were collected by using the wind monitor as per CPCB guideline which was installed near project site. All the micrometeorological data were collected on hourly basis. Meteorological conditions for temperature, humidity and wind speed of the study area are presented in Table 3.3.

Table 3.3 Meteorological Condition of Study Area Dry Bulb Wet Bulb Dominant Relative Wind Speed Temperature Temperature Rain fall wind Month Humidity (%) (km/hr) (oC) (oC) (mm) direction Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. 15th Mar’19 10.1 33.2 25 94 0.1 8.0 12.0 to 31st 8.0 29.0 NW-SE Mar’19 1st

Apr’19 16.2 40.4 14.0 10 98 0.1 11.0 41.8 NW-SE to 30th 35.0

Apr’19 1st

May’19 21.2 44.6 20.0 11 95 0.1 18.0 21.9 NW-SE to 31st 40.5

May’19 1st June 19 to 25.2 44.3 24.0 39.8 10 66 0.1 13.0 14.5 ESE-WNW 15th June 19

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 31 3.3.1 Temperature The climate of the district is sub-tropical in the valleys and tends to be temperate near the hilltops. In the higher region, the climate remains cold throughout the year. The winter starts from the middle of November and continues till the middle of March. Thereafter, the mercury continues to rise till the onset of the monsoon, which starts from the last week of June or early July and continues till the middle of September. During October and November, the nights are pleasant, whereas the days are a little bit hot.

As per the Climatological Normals (1981-2010), long term trend analysis average minimum and maximum temperature in the district Mandi varies from 3° C to 35° C. The average temperature during the summer is between 18.9 °C and 39.6 °C and varies between 6.7 °C and 26.2 °C in the winter. In Bilaspur district, it is between 19.2°C to 38.5°C during summer season and average temperature for winter season it is 7.3 °C to 26.0 °C.

During the study period minimum dry bulb temperature was recorded 10.1oC on 15th Mar 2019 and maximum dry bulb temperature was recorded as 44.6oC on 31st May 2019. There was a regression of 1 oC to 4 oC was observed in wet bulb temperature. Temperature data were collected on hourly basis during the study period. Variation of temperature is graphically presented in Figure 3.2.

50.0

45.0

40.0

35.0 C) o 30.0

25.0

20.0

Temperature ( Temperature 15.0

10.0

5.0

0.0 15161718192021222324252627282930311 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91011121314151617181920212223242526272829301 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101112131415161718192021222324252627282930311 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101112131415 Max. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 3 4 4 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Min. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Figure 3.2 Graphical Presentation for the month wise Temperature Variation 3.3.2 Humidity As per long term trend analysis, Annual average humidity in Mandi district is 56% & in bilaspur district, it is around 60%. In monsoon season, average humidity in mandi district is 83% and in bilaspur around 85%.

Humidity affects the nature and characteristics of pollutants in the atmosphere as it is the measure of amount of moisture in the atmosphere. Humidity helps suspended particulate matter to coalesce and grow in size to settle under the gaseous pollutants by providing them aqueous medium. During the study period

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 32 minimum Humidity was recorded 10% in the month of April 2019 & June 2019 and maximum Humidity was recorded as 98% in the month of April 2019. The variation in humidity is represented graphically in Figure 3.3.

120

100

60 Humidity (%) Humidity

0 1516171819202122232425262728293031 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718192021222324252627282930 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415 Max. 948588877988808287909289848090857887827284888677838482768284809891969281757768706878705849505054625852635854504471656593878381807563565454729568605253655958655958666261575650504560554548 Min. 505440524240464236546846384144422530293236423644383630283534333138474030262728263030191010101411301421262126121222302630525634523222181816263828221216303611262836311831221514141730261014

Figure 3.3 Graphical Presentation for the month wise Humidity Variation

3.3.3 Cloud cover Cloud cover refers to the fraction of the sky obscured by clouds when observed from a particular location. Okta is the usual unit of measurement of the cloud cover. The cloud cover is correlated to the sunshine duration as the least cloudy locales are the sunniest ones while the cloudiest areas are the least sunny places. Clouds cover data collected by dividing the visible area of sky in 8 parts by the surveyor. During the study period cloud cover was observed in the range 0 to 8 okta. Average cloud cover in the month of March 19 was 5 okta and maximum 8 okta cloud cover was observed on 28/03/2019. 0 to 7 okta cloud cover was observed in the month of April and it was 0 to 8 okta in the month of May and June 19. 3.3.4 Rain fall The monsoon period in Mandi district starts from July and it end in September. The maximum rainfall occurs from July to September. As per the long term trend analysis, the average annual rainfall in the Mandi station is about 832 mm. In the non-monsoon season, precipitation in the form of snowfall also occurs in the higher reaches above elevations of 2400 to 4800 m. The average annual rainfall in the Mandi district is about 1106.28 mm. Annual average rainfall from place to place in the district is highly variable and ranges from 700 to more than 2000 mm at Jogindernagar. In Bilaspur district, Annual average rainfall is around 1310.2 mm.

Rainfall data has been collected using the weather station. Total rain fall during the study period was 90.2 mm and maximum rain fall was 41.8 mm in the month of April 2019. Month wise rainfall data are presented in Table 3.3.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 33

3.3.5 Solar Radiation Solar radiation is radiant energy emitted by the sun from a nuclear fusion reaction that creates electromagnetic energy. Solar radiation was monitored with the help of weather station and it was ranging 78 to 350 during 7 am. to 9 am and it was 450 to 750 W/m2 between 11 a.m. to 2 p.m. During the night hours and during rain fall it was 0. 3.3.6 Wind Speed and Wind Direction Hourly wind speed data were collected for the period 15th March 2019 to 15th June 2019 with the help of wind monitor. The rate of dispersion, diffusion and transportation of pollutants in the atmosphere mainly depend on wind speed and its direction. Wind direction and velocity data have been collected during the study period. Dominant wind direction in the study period was from NW –SE during the study period. Wind speed was observed from 0.1 to 8.0 km/hr in the month of March 2019, from 0.1 to 11.0 km/hr in the month of April 2019, from 0.1 to 18.0 km/hr in the Month of May 2019 from 0.1 to 13.0 in the month of June 2019. Month-wise maximum and minimum wind speed data are tabulated in Table 3.3. 3.3.7 Wind Rose Wind rose diagram is a graphical representation of the magnitude and direction of wind speed considering all the directions. From the knowledge of wind rose one can easily predict the direction and extent of spreading of the gaseous and particulate matter from the source. Month wise and seasonal wind rose diagram is presented in Figure 3.4 to 3.8.

Figure 3.4 Wind Rose Diagram (15st March 2019 to 31st March 2019)

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 34

Figure 3.5 Wind Rose Diagram (1st April 2019 to 30th April 2019)

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 35

Figure 3.6 Wind Rose Diagram (1st May 2019 to 31th May 2019)

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 36

Figure 3.7 Wind Rose Diagram (1st June 2019 to 15th June 2019)

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 37

Figure 3.8 Wind Rose Diagram (15th March 2019 to 15th June 2019)

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 38 3.3.5 Interpretation of Micrometeorological Data Maximum wind blow was in the direction of NW-SE and wind speed range 0.1 to 18.0 km/hr during the study period. Based on the wind direction and wind speed it is interpreted that maximum dispersion of air pollutant will be in SE direction during the period of March 19 to June 19. Temperature and Humidity was recorded in the range 10.1ᵒC to 44.6ᵒC and 10% to 98% respectively. 3.4 AMBIENT AIR ENVIRONMENT Air is the Earth’s atmosphere having the gases in which living organisms live and breathe but air is being deteriorated day by day due to the anthropogenic and natural sources. In present scenario Industrialization, Energy production and the burning of fossil fuels has polluted the air environment. Ambient air quality monitoring was carried out for the assessment of the existing status of background air quality in the study area. This will be useful for assessing the conformity of the ambient air quality to the standards even after commencement of the proposed project. 3.4.1 Selection of Sampling Locations Following points are considered during the selection of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring locations.  Topography/terrain of the study area,  Regional synoptic scale climatologically norm’s,  Densely populated areas within the region,  Location of surrounding Industries,  Representation of regional background,  Facility for Ambient Air Monitoring,  Representation of valid cross – sectional distribution in downwind direction,  Avoidance of proximity of roads, construction activity or any other perturbing activity which may be temporary in nature, which may lead to some erroneous conclusions.  Availability of manpower, electricity, approach, sturdy structure and protection of samplers.  Dominant Wind Direction. To establish the baseline status of the study region, monitoring was conducted at 7 numbers of villages and 1 no. of location in Mandi city. Ambient air quality monitoring has been carried out for total 8 locations during 15th March 2019 to 15th June 2019. Ambient Air Quality monitoring locations are presented in Figure 3.9 and Table 3.4. Photographs showing the sampling activities at different locations are presented in Figure 3.10.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 39

Figure 3.9 Map showing the Study Region location of Ambient Air

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 40 Table 3.4 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations in the Study Region

Code Location Latitude and Longitude 31°34’50.06”N A1 Radu village 76°54’08.00”E 31°38’51.82”N A2 Bhadyal village 76°57’13.70”E 31°31’41.48”N A3 Jaroli village 76°56’41.72”E 31°42’22.37”N A4 Baloh village 76°53’41.32”E 31°37’09.80”N A5 Taroh village 76°53’24.30”E 31°35’07.71”N A6 Darbathu village 76°57’01.65”E 31°32’11.92”N A7 Sunder Nagar 76°52’58.84”E 31°42’05.02”N A8 Mandi (Kartarpur area) 76°57’04.63”E

Ambient air – (Radu Village) Ambient air - (Sunderna Nagar)

Figure 3.10 Photographs showing the ambient air monitoring activity 3.4.2 Frequency and Parameters for Sampling Sampling and analysis was carried out as per CPCB, IS 5182 & EPA and instrument operation manual for the parameters PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx, CO, O3, Benzene, BaP, Pb, As, Ni, NH3, Methane and Non-methane HC, VOC. After the completion of sampling, samples were brought to the laboratory in Ice box and filter box for analysis. Frequency of sampling was twice a week during study period.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 41 3.4.3 Methodology for Sampling and Analysis

Samples were collected by using the PM10 and PM2.5 micron dust samplers at suitable height from obstruction free area as per the availability of the facility. Sampling and Analysis was carried out as per CPCB Guideline, instrument operational manual and National Environmental Engineering Research Institute. Detail of reference method is presented in Table 3.5. Table 3.5 Details of Analysis Method

Sr. No. Parameters Test Method SOP No. WI/5.4/02-B/03,Issue No.1 1. Particular matter (PM ) 2.5 Date:01/01/2010, CPCB Guideline

2. Particulate Matter (PM10) IS 5182 (Part 13):2006/Reaffirmed 2012

3. Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) IS 5182 (Part 2):2001/Reaffirmed 2012

4. Oxide of Nitrogen (NOx) IS 5182 (Part 6):2006 Methods of Air Sampling & Analysis AWMA, 5. Carbon monoxide(CO) APHA (CO Analyser)

6. Ozone (O3) IS 5182 (Part 9):1974 SOP No. WI/5.4/02-B/06,Issue No.1 7 Ammonia (NH ) 3 Date:01/01/2010 8. Benzene IS 5182 (Part 11):2006 (GC) 9. Particulate Benzo Pyrine (BaP) CPCB Guideline, Volume –I (GC) 10. Lead (Pb) IS 5182 (Part 22):2004 (AAS) 11. Arsenic(As) CPCB Guideline, Volume –I(AAS) 12. Nickel(Ni) CPCB Guideline, Volume –I (AAS) Methods of Air Sampling & Analysis AWMA, APHA 13. Methane and Non-methane HC (Multi Gas Analyser) Methods of Air Sampling & Analysis AWMA, 14. Total VOC APHA (VOC Analyser)

3.4.4 Quality of Ambient Air th Minimum, maximum, average and 98 percentile values for the parameters PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx, CO, O3,

NH3, Benzene, BaP, Pb, As, Ni, Methane and Non-methane HC and VOC are tabulated in Table 3.6 to describe the quality of Ambient Air.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 42 Table 3.6 Ambient air quality monitoring results A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 Parameter Result Bhadyal Jaroli Baloh Taroh Darbathu Sunder Mandi NAAQS Radu village village village village village village Nagar City Min 27.9 44.5 30.1 34.7 33.7 32.5 29.7 43.3 98th Percentile 55.6 74.4 60.3 64.1 62.1 63.2 55.1 73.4 PM10 (µg/m3) 100 Max 56.3 75.2 60.4 64.7 63.3 64.3 55.8 77.1 Avg 39.8 58.5 46.6 49 46.1 48.3 42.7 58.5 Min 12 17.2 12.7 15 14.3 13.4 16.7 21.1 98th Percentile 27 29.6 27.3 28.6 33.5 28.6 31.5 38 PM2.5(µg/m3) 60 Max 28.4 29.8 27.7 28.8 36.6 28.6 31.5 39.7 Avg 18.5 22.4 20 22.1 21.8 20.3 23.5 28.6 Min 7.5 9.5 11.5 6.6 7.8 7 8.1 10.1 98th Percentile 12.1 14.2 16.2 13.6 13.8 10.4 13.2 14.7 SO2 (µg/m3) 80 Max 12.4 14.3 16.7 14 14.2 10.6 13.3 14.8 Avg 9.3 11.5 14.6 9.7 10.4 8.8 10.8 12.5 Min 10.7 14.2 16.6 9.8 11.3 11.3 10.2 14.8 98th Percentile 14.6 18.8 22.8 16.5 18.3 17.7 15.3 22.4 Nox (µg/m3) 80 Max 14.9 18.9 22.8 16.6 18.7 17.7 15.5 23 Avg 12.3 16.7 20.5 12.7 14.9 14.7 13.2 18.4 Min BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 98th Percentile ------O3 (µg/m3) 180 Max BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Avg ------Min BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 98th Percentile ------NH3 (µg/m3) 400 Max BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Avg ------Min BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 98th Percentile ------Benzene (µg/m3) 5 Max BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Avg ------BaP (µg/m3) Min BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 1

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 43 98th Percentile ------Max BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Avg ------Min BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 98th Percentile ------Arsenic (µg/m3) 6 Max BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Avg ------Min BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 98th Percentile ------Lead (µg/m3) 1 Max BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Avg ------Min BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 98th Percentile ------Nickel (µg/m3) 20 Max BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Avg ------Min BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 98th Percentile ------CO (µg/m3) 2000 Max BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Avg ------Min BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 98th Percentile ------Methane HC (µg/m3) NA Max BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Avg ------Min BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 98th Percentile ------Non Methane HC (µg/m3) NA Max BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Avg ------Min BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 98th Percentile ------Total VOC (µg/m3) NA Max BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Avg ------

Note: NAAQS = National Ambient Air Quality Standards; BDL = Below Detection Limit; NA = Not Available DL = Detection Limit; DL for of O3 – 20 µg/m3, DL of NH3 – 1 µg/m3, DL of Benzene – 2 µg/m3 , DL of BaP – 0.5 ng/m3 , DL of Arsenic – 2 ng/m3 , DL of Lead – 0.01 µg/m3 , DL of Nickel – 10 ng/m3, DL of CO – 114 µg/m3, DL of Methane HC – 0.1 ppm, DL of Non-methane HC – 0.1 ppm, DL of VOC – 1.0 ppm

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 44 3.4.5 Summary of Ambient Air Quality

 Results were compared with the standard for ambient air quality monitoring as per the CPCB 3  During the study PM2.5 was observed in the range of 12.0 – 39.7 µg/m . Maximum concentration of

PM2.5 was found at Mandi and minimum concentration at (Radu village). 3.  PM10 was observed in the range of 27.9 – 77.1 µg/m Maximum concentration of PM10 was found at Mandi and minimum concentration at (Radu village). 3  SO2 concentration was observed in the range of 6.6 – 16.7 µg/m , which is well within the standard limit. 3  NOx concentration in was observed in the range of 9.8- 23.0 µg/m , which is well within the standard limit. 3.4.6 Interpretation of Ambient Air Quality Data All the results of ambient air quality parameters have been found within the limit as per NAAQS. Based on comparison study of results for tested parameters with NAAQS, it is interpreted that ambient air quality of studied locations is good. This interpretation relate to the results found for particular locations and study period.

3.5 AMBIENT NOISE ENVIRONMENT The objective of the baseline noise survey was to identify existing noise sources and to measure background noise levels at the sensitive receptors within the study area. Peoples’ perception of noise varies depending on number of factors including their natural sensitivity and hearing ability, past experience of sound, cultural factors and the time of day at which sound is experienced. Continuous sound is perceived quite differently from intermittent sound at the same level. High or continuous noise levels may cause permanent loss of hearing ranging from reduced perception at certain frequencies to total deafness. At comparatively lower levels noise may have psychological effects including disturbance of sleep, annoyance and irritation. 3.5.1 Sources of Noise Pollution The sources of noise pollution in the study area are industrial noise, noise due to commercial activities, noise generated by Community, Vehicular traffic etc. 3.5.2 Noise Level in the Study Area Continuous Noise level monitoring was carried out with the help of sound level meter at 8 different locations. Study area does not fall under industrial area therefore all the noise sampling locations are considered under Silence and Residential area. Noise sampling locations are presented in Figure 3.11 and Table 3.7. Analysis results are presented in Table 3.8 and Table 3.9. Photographs of the sampling activities are presented in Figure 3.12.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 45

Figure 3.11 Map showing the study region location of Noise Table 3.7 Noise Monitoring Locations in the Study Region

Code Location Latitude and Longitude Selection Criteria 31° 34’44.91”N Residential area N1 Radu village 76° 53’56.82”E 31° 38’59.24”N Commercial area N2 Bhadyal village 76° 57’37.20”E 31° 31’45.50”N Silence zone N3 Jaroli village 76° 56’23.66”E 31° 42’22.74”N Silence zone N4 Baloh village 76° 53’41.82”E 31° 37’06.71”N Silence zone N5 Taroh village 76° 53’24.22”E 31° 35’07.70”N Residential area N6 Darbathu village 76° 57’01.81”E 31°32’28.64”N Commercial area N7 Sunder Nagar 76° 53’33.13”E Mandi (Kartarpur 31° 42’09.10”N Commercial area N8 area) 76° 57’17.22”E

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 46

Noise – (Radu village) Noise – (Bhadyal Village) Figure 3.12 Photograph showing the Noise Monitoring Table 3.8 Noise Monitoring report during day time

Limit dB(A) as per L L L Leq Noise Pollution Code min d max dB dB dB dB(A) (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000

N1 38.4 41.1 43.8 41.8 55

N2 40.2 43.6 46.3 44.0 65 38.8 N3 36.1 38.2 40.6 50 N4 36.4 38.5 40.8 39.3 50 38.6 N5 36.0 37.8 39.5 50 N6 39.1 42.3 45.1 42.8 55 N7 37.6 40.2 42.8 40.6 65 N8 41.2 44.8 48.1 45.5 65

Table 3.9 Noise Monitoring report during night time

Limit dB(A) as per L L L Leq Noise Pollution Code min n max dB dB(A) dB dB(A) (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000 N1 33.6 35.6 37.3 36.0 45

N2 34.3 37.1 39.4 37.7 55

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 47 N3 35.3 40 32.1 34.8 37.2 N4 32.8 35.3 37.7 35.8 40

N5 35.4 40 32.3 35.0 37.4 N6 34.4 37.2 40.1 37.9 45

N7 33.5 36.3 38.8 36.8 55

N8 37.7 40.3 43.6 40.8 55

Note: Day time –6.00 AM to 10.00 PM, Night time – 10.00 PM to 6.00 AM

Noise standards have been designated for different types of land use i.e. residential, commercial, industrial areas and silence zones, as per ‘The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000, Notified by Ministry of Environment and Forests, New Delhi, February 14, 2000. Different standards have been stipulated for day (6 AM to 10 PM) and night (10 PM to 6 AM). The noise level study shows that the noise levels are meeting the acceptable norms. 3.5.3 Summary of Noise Data  Equivalent noise level was recorded in the range of 38.6 to 45.5 dB (A) in residential area during day time.  Equivalent noise level was recorded 35.3 to 40.8 dB (A) in residential area during night time.

3.5.4 Interpretation of Noise Data Based on noise level data obtained during the survey for residential area and silence zone, it is interpreted that noise levels of the studied locations are within the standard norms prescribed by MoEF&CC. 3.6 LAND ENVIRONMENT 3.6.1 Land Use Pattern of the Study area Studies on land use aspects of eco system play an important role to identify sensitive issues and to take appropriate action for maintaining ecological homeostasis in the region. The main objective of this section is to provide a existing land use pattern of the area, so that temporal changes due to the proposed project on the surroundings can be assessed in future. Data Used: United States Geological Survey (USGS) Satellite Data: Land sat 8 cloud free data has been used for Land use /Land cover analysis, Satellite Sensor–OLITIRS multi-spectral digital data has been used for the preparation of land use/ land cover map of present study. Survey of India reference map on 1:50,000 scales have been used for the preparation of base map and geometric correction of satellite data. Ground trothing has been carried out to validate the interpretation accuracy and reliability of remotely sensed data, by enabling verification of the interpreted details and by supplementing with the information, which cannot be obtained directly on satellite imagery. Methodology: The methodology used for the study consists of following components. Methodology Adopted for Thematic Data Extraction from the Satellite Imageries ERDAS image processing 10.0 software and ARC/GIS 10.0 software were used for the project. ERDAS 10.0 image processing software was used for digital processing of the spatial data. Digital image processing techniques were applied for the mapping of the land use land cover classes of the provided area from the satellite data. Methodology used for land use classification and mapping is presented in figure 3.13. Land use map is presented in figure 3.14. Land Use Statistic (10 km) is presented in figure 3.15 and Table 3.10.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 48

Figure 3.13 Methodology Used for Land use Classification

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 49

Figure 3.14 Land Use Map

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 50 Table 3.10 Land use Statistics (10 km) (Source: Land use mapping and primary survey of the area) % (Percentage) Area Land Use Land Cover Area % (Percentage) (Sq.km) (Sq.km) Scrub Land 488.27 21.27 Open Land 256.37 11.17 1275.38 Range Land 55.55 Wood Land 447.56 19.50 Grass Land 83.17 3.62 Crop Land 373.09 16.25 25.27 580.22 Agriculture Land Fallow Land 207.13 9.02

17.09 392.35 Forest Forest 392.35 17.09

0.75 17.26 Settlement Settlement 17.26 0.75 1.33 30.56 Water body Water body 30.56 1.33 100 2295.77 Total 2295.77 100

Land Use Statistic (10 km)

1.33% 0.75% Range Land 17.09%

Agriculture Land

55.55% 25.27% Forest

Settlement

Water body

Figure 3.15 Land use Statistics (10 Km) 3.6.2 Summary and Interpretation of Land Use Map The area surrounding the project site is largely a Range land like Scrub land, Open land, Wood land and Grass land are covering around 21.27%, 11.17%, 19.50% and 3.62% respectively of the total study area. Agriculture land like Crop land and Fallow land are covering around 16.25% and 9.02% respectively of the

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 51 total study area. Forest land is covering around 17.09% of the total study area. Settlement is covering around 0.75% of the total study area. Water body is covering around 1.33% of the total study area. 3.7 GEOLOGY  Mandi District Two types of soils are mainly observed in the district viz. Sub-Mountainous Soil occurring in Seraj and Karsog blocks and Mountainous Soil occurring in remaining eight blocks of the district. The sub-mountainous soil is high in organic carbon, low in available phosphorous and medium in potash, whereas the mountainous soil is brown in colour, medium in available nitrogen & potash and deficient in available phosphorous. The soil reaction is slightly acidic to neutral and texture in general varies from loam to sandy loam, except in low valley areas being heavy textured. Source: CGWB, Mandi District  Bilaspur District The ultisol types of soil are found in east and northern parts of the district and are red to yellow in colour. This colour is attained mainly due to accumulation of iron oxide, which is highly insoluble in water. Inceptisol soils occupy mostly hill slopes and are found along the western boundary of the district. Alfisol soils are fertile leached soils found in humid areas where annually dropping leaves form a thick humus layer. These soils cover maximum area in the northern and central parts of the district. In general it can be said that the district is covered by red gravely soils, red sandy soils, lateritic soils, red and yellow soils and black soils. Source: CGWB, Bilaspur District 3.8 HYDROGEOLOGY  Mandi District

Hydrogeologically, the district is divided into two distinct and well defined units viz. porous formations constituted by unconsolidated sediments and the fissured formations or hard rock formation constituted mainly by semi-consolidated to consolidated rocks. The unconsolidated sediments comprising fluvial, channel deposits, valley fills and terrace deposits and alluvial fan constitute the porous aquifers in the district. Dug wells form major source of water for domestic and irrigation water supply. The depth of the wells ranges from 8 m to 26 m bgl, where depth to water level ranges from near surface 0.86m bgl to 9.92m bgl. In low plains, water levels are shallow and less than 5m and become deeper in terraces and fringe areas. Large number of tube wells, ranging in depth from 38.25 m to 140.98m have been drilled/constructed by tapping granular horizons, where water level ranges from artesian/free flow to about 19.35m bgl. The yield of the wells ranges from 15 to 999.24 lpm for economic drawdown. Free flowing conditions are observed in low-lying areas of Suketi khad in southwestern part of Balh valley. In Balh valley, CGWB monitors 9 hydrograph stations for groundwater regime monitoring under its National Network. The water levels are monitored four times and ground water quality once during pre- monsoon period every year. During the pre-monsoon (May 2012), depth to water level ranged between 0.86 to 9.92 mbgl. Similarly, during the post-monsoon (November 2012), depth to water level ranged between 0.37 to 5.83m bgl.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 52  Ground water resources Rainfall is the major source of groundwater recharge, apart from the influent seepage from the rivers, irrigated fields and inflow from upland areas, whereas discharge from ground water mainly takes place through wells and tube wells; effluent seepages of ground water in the form of springs and base flow in streams etc.

Ground water resources and irrigation potential for Balh valley in Mandi district have been computed as per the GEC-97 methodology. The resources for the year 2011, are as follows.

Table 3.11 Ground water Resources 1. Area (Balh valley) considered for GW Assessment 9500 ha Net Ground Water Available 5942.33 ham 2. 3. Annual Ground Water Draft 912.77 ham 4. Stage of Ground Water Development 15.36%

The stage of ground water development in Balh valley in Mandi district is 15.36% and falls under “Safe” category. There is thus, a scope for further ground water development. Source : CGWB, Mandi District

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 53

Figure 3.16 Hydrological Map in Mandi District

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 54

 Bilaspur District Hydrogeologically the district can be categorised into three groups. i) The Archaean rocks consisting of granites, gneisses, schists, phyllites and quartzites. ii) Proterozoic sediments belonging to Chhattisgarh Supergroup mainly consisting of limestone, shales and dolomites and iii) a) Semiconsolidated sediments belonging to Gondwana Supergroup consisting of Barakars sandstones and Talchir shales. b) The unconsolidated alluvium along the major river courses of Arpa, Maniari, Khurung, Lilagar and Agar.  Water Level Scenario As a part of National Hydrograph Network Observation Stations (NHS), 43 no of dug wells and 17 no of piezometers are established to monitor water levels four times in a year i.e. in January, May (Pre- monsoon), August and in November (post-monsoon). The dug well depths are varying form 3.76 to 19.82 mbgl. These monitoring wells are distributed throughout the district covering all the lithological formations.  Depth to Water Level- Pre-monsoon (May 2012) The depth to water (DTW) level observed during pre-monsoon period in the month of May 2007 is presented in Plate- 2. The average depth to water level in the district during pre-monsoon period is 8.30 m bgl. The water level varies between 5 to 16.5 m in the area. The shallow water levels are observed in the central parts of Takhatpur block and also in Setganga area. The water levels in the range of 10 to 20 m is observed in 28.9 % of cases and covers mostly in the parts of Patharia and Mungeli blocks which are mostly underlain by formations of the Chhattisgarh Supergroup. In Murwahi block the water levels are more than 15 m in a a small part in the district.  Depth to Water Level- Post-monsoon (November 2012). The depth to water level measured during the post-monsoon period in the month of November 2011 is presented in Plate- 3 The average depth to water level in the district during post-monsoon period is 4.34m bgl. From the figure it is clear that the water levels during the post-monsoon period are mostly varying from 0 to 5 m. The water levels in the range of 5 to 10 m are observed in Belha, Patharia, Mungeli and Gaurela blocks. The deepest water level is observed at Dhanikundi and is in Barakar sandstone. it is interoperated that nearly in 64% of the cases the water levels are below 5 m.  Water Level Fluctuation (May-Nov. 2012) In the entire district the water levels in the month of November have shown a rise when compared with that of in the month of May. Most of the wells have a rise in water level in the range of more than 4 m and are in Masturi, Bilha, Pathriya, takhatpur, Lormi and Kota blocks. In Mungeli block the fluctuation is in the range of 0 to 4 m. The Marwahi, Pendra and Gaurela blocks have a fluctuation of 2 to 4 m.  Water Level Trend (2002 to 2012) The long term water level trend analysis shows that during the pre-monsoon period around 29% of the wells have a rising trend of water levels and the rest 71% have a falling trend. Around 62% of the wells show either rise or fall in the range of 0 to 0.2 m/yr, which is practically insignificant. Most of the falling trends (49%) are in the range of 0 to 0.2 m/yr. The maximum falling trend is observed in the monitoring well at Bilaspur followed by Pathriya and Sipat. The rising trend has been observed in Lormi, Kota, Saragaon and Belgahana wells. The rising trend is observed in the canal command area and the hilly tracts and the falling trend is more significant in the Chhattisgarh plain area in the southern half of the district. The pre-monsoon long-term water level fall suggests an increase in ground water abstraction over the years.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 55 Similarly during the post-monsoon period around 33% of the wells show a rising trend and 67% show falling trend of water level. Around 69% of the wells show either a rise or fall of water level trend in the range of 0 to 0.2 m/yr. Most of the falling trends (42%) are observed in the range of 0 to 0.2 m/yr. The maximum falling trend in water level is observed in Chaparawa observation well and is followed by Dhanpur and Dhanikundi observation wells. The maximum rising trend is observed in the Kota and followed by Sipat observation wells during this period.The falling trend of water level is observed in Marwahi, Lormi, Takhatpur and Patharia blocks. The falling trend during post-monsoon period may be due to inadequate recharge because of declining rainfall over the years.  Ground Water Flow The northern part of the district is covered by hill ranges with steep slopes where as the southern part is a plain land. The regional ground water flow is in the direction of southeast. In the north central part of the district the contours are closer indicating steepness of the terrain thereby the gradient of ground water flow is high in comparison to the southern part of the district. In southern part, the contours are widely separated indicating flatness of the terrain where the gradient of ground water flow is less. It may also be seen that the flow of ground water is mostly towards the major drainage suggesting that the base flow is towards the drainage system, which finally joins Seonath River.  Ground water Resources The total ground water recharge from all the sources is 52353.99 ham. The net available resources after the natural discharge of 2617.17 ham is 49736.28 ham. Existing gross ground water draft for all purposes is 23229.37ham out of which 18419.52ham is for irrigation and 6392.43ham is for domestic and industrial water supply. The stage of the ground water development in the district is 46.71 %. The Belha block (89.19 %) has the highest stage of ground water development followed by the Takhatpur (64.18 %) and the Pendra Road (51.66 %) blocks. Belha has been categorised as semicritical and all other blocks are safe for future groundwater development. Source: CGWB, Bilaspur district

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 56

Figure 3.17 Hydrological Map in Bilaspur District

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 57 3.9 Physiography  Mandi district Mandi district presents an intricate mosaic of mountain ranges, hills and valleys. It is primarily a hilly district with altitudes ranging from 550 m near Sandhol where the Beas river leaves the district, to about 3960 m amsl near Kullu border. There is a general increase in elevation from west to east and from south to north. Master slope is southwesterly. The south western part consists of Siwalik ranges having scarped slopes. There are few small intermontane valleys; prominent among them is the Balh valley, located in the lesser Himalayan ranges, having an average altitude of about 790 m amsl and have a general slope towards NNE. The valley floor is undulating and is marked by low hillocks and terraces fringing the hills and intervening low alluvial plain.

Figure 3.18 Phisiography Map of Mandi District

Bilaspur district Physiographically the Bilaspur district can be divided into two parts. The first part consists high plateau area covering north and central part of the district (covering Lormi, Kota, Gaurela, Pendra and Marwahi blocks) separated by the intermittent narrow valleys and steeply slopping plains. The second part is the gently slopping plain land covering southern parts of the district (Takhatpur, Mungeli, Pathariya, Belha and

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 58 Masturi blocks). The high topographic area on the northern part of the district forms water divide between the rivers Ganges and Mahanadi. The hill ranges on the northwestern part is the water divide between Mahanadi and Narmada Rivers. Major part of the Chhattisgarh basin is drained by Mahanadi River. The topography varies between 250 m amsl in the southern plains and 1120 m amsl in the northern hills. The hill ranges on the northwestern boundary of the district forms part of the Amarkantak ranges. The Deccan traps along the western boundary forms high peaks. Basically the hill ranges on northern part are due to structural activities and the area on southern part (Chhattisgarh plain) can be categorised as pediplain. The vertisol are mostly found in south and southeastern parts of the district. They range from grey/red to deep black colour and are almost impermeable when saturated. They are sticky in wet season and are very hard in dry season.

Figure 3.19 Phisiography Map of Bilaspur District

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 59

3.10 Topography  Mandi district Mandi district (earlier known as Mandavya Nagar) is one of the central districts of Himachal Pradesh state in northern India. Mandi town is the headquarters of Mandi district. The town has mythological and historical significance and boasts of a unique temple architecture. It is referred to as Chhota Kashi as there are many ancient temples in the city and on the banks of river Beas. The Beas flows through the town and hills, which makes this town more scenic. It has a serene ambiance though the modern development has made its inroads here in infrastructural developments. It is Located at Latitude-31.7, Longitude-76.9. Mandi District is sharing border with Bilaspur District District to the South , Hamirpur District to the west , Kangra District to the west , Kullu District to the North . Mandi District occupies an area of approximately 3951 square kilometres. . Its in the 2065 meters to 1081 meters elevation range.This District belongs to Hindi Belt India .  Bilaspur District Bilaspur is a district of Himachal Pradesh state, India. It contains the manmade Govind Sagar Lake on the Sutlej River which acts as the reservoir for the Bhakra and Nangal Dam project. The road bridge on this lake at Kandraur is highest of its kind in Asia(second highest bridge). Its headquarters are in the town of Bilaspur. The district has an area of 1,167 km2 . Bilaspur has a hilly terrain.Whole district is situated in shivalik range of lower himalayas. It is surrounded by hills on all sides.In south and west,it is bordered by Punjab.Summers are hot and winters are cold, with fog along banks of river satluj. Rainy season lasts from early July to mid September. Summer are hottest in month of May and June.Bilaspur is located at 31.33°N 76.75°E, with an average elevation of 673 m (2,208 ft). It lies at the foot of the Bandla Hills, near the reservoir of Govind Sagar on the Sutlej River. It is the first major town after entering Himachal Pradesh on the way to Manali.

3.11 Drainage pattern  Mandi District In the Basin, there are broad U-shaped valleys, in which some of the landforms like co leasing piedmont forms, fan cut terraces and sand bars have been clearly observed. The tributaries (mostly seasonal) on either sides of the Suketi River are responsible for the evelopment of fans at the point of their confluence. These later landforms are the outcome of the fluvial processes. The most of the tributaries of the Suketi Valley rises from the permanent glacier melt water and Perennial Spring of the Valley receives considerable amount of water throughout the year.  Bilaspur district The southern, western and northern sides of the Sanctuary form part of the catchments of the Satluj River while the eastern side drains into the Beas River through Bhadrolu Nala. The southern side is bound by Seri Khad. Numerous nalas dissect the terrain of the sanctuary.

3.9 VULNERABLITY OF THE STUDY 3.9.1 Seismicity The Geological Survey of India (G. S. I.) first published the seismic zoning map of the country in the year 1935. With numerous modifications made afterwards, this map was initially based on the amount of damage suffered by the different regions of India because of earthquakes. Color coded in different shades

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 60 of the color red, this map shows the four distinct seismic zones of India. Following are the varied seismic zones of the nation, which are prominently shown in the map:

 Zone - II: This is said to be the least active seismic zone.  Zone - III: It is included in the moderate seismic zone.  Zone - IV: This is considered to be the high seismic zone.  Zone - V: It is the highest seismic zone.

Figure 3.20 Seismicity Map of India As per Seismicity map of India, Himachal Pradesh comes under the Seismicity Zone IV which indicates towards the moderate risk with the point of Seismicity.

3.9.2 Flood History in Himachal Pradesh

Prominent Flash Floods History of Damage Occurred

Extensive damage as a result of risen water level of Satluj river due to Flash flood in Satluj river breach in Parachoo lake formed in Tibet catchments. Washed away the due to breach in the NH-22 at a number of places, 10 bridges, 11 ropeways washed away, 15 Parachoo lake in Tibetan motor able bridges and 8 jeep able and footbridges damaged/affected, catchment on 26th June 10 Km stretch of NH-22 between Wangtoo and Samdo was washed 2005 away, and various link roads were damaged. Total loss estimated to the government as well as public property was some Rs. 610 crore.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 61 Flash floods in Pabbar river in Rohru Sub Division resulted in heavy losses to roads, bridges, public buildings, residential houses, cowsheds, Flash floods during July private land. Dhirgaon block was totally cut off. On July 7th, 2005, flash 2005. flood in Baspa river took place causing the loss of 6 bridges and 600 mt link road to Sangla. More than 3000 cattle perished in different parts of the state leading a total loss of some of Rs. 55980.76 lacs.

15th August 2007, Bhavi 58 persons died; All roads leading to village cut off Village, Ghanvi, Shimla

7th August 2009, 2 persons died Dharampur, Mandi

12th September 2010, Washed away several roads and bridges Kharahal Valley

Source: Himachal Pradesh State Disaster Management Authority

3.9.3 Drought in Himachal Pradesh Himachal Pradesh is enlisted under the frequent drought (10-20% probability) prone areas as per Indian Meteorological Department’s (IMD) classification of drought incidences from 1875-2004 period. A total of 23 droughts2 have occurred in the state of which 20 were moderate and 3 have been severe over the 1879- 2009 time period with the drought probability of 17 % and with four instances of consecutive droughts over two years (Shewale and Kumar; 2005, Attri and Tyagi; 2010, IMD met monograph 21/2005 and 01/2010).

Source: Climate Modelling for Himachal Pradesh 3.9.4 Multi Hazard Zones in Himachal Pradesh

As per the BIS seismic zonation map, Himachal Pradesh falls in Zone IV and V. And five districts, namely Chamba (53.2%) Hamirpur (90.9%), Kangra (98.6%), Kullu (53.1%), Mandi (97.4%) have 53 to 98.6 percent of their area liable to the severest design intensity of MSK IX or more, the remaining area of these districts being liable to the next severe intensity VIII. Two districts, Bilaspur (25.3%) and Una (37.0%) also have substantial area in MSK IX and rest in MSK VIII. The remaining districts also are liable to intensity VIII.Besides, the earthquake, the people of HP are also affected by landslides, avalanches, flash floods, floods, fires – domestic and wild, and droughts. Monsoon season brings all the hazards associated with it such as cloud burst, flash floods, landslides etc. There is huge loss of life and property every year.

Source: Himachal Pradesh State Disaster Management Authority

3.10 TRAFFIC STUDY Traffic surveys aim to capture data that accurately reflects the real traffic situation in the area. It may be counting the number of vehicles using a road or collecting journey time information. Any development of project, directly or indirectly affect the traffic.. To assess the traffic load, 4 no. of surveyors were appointed to survey for NH-154, SH-13 and NH-21. Traffic data collected continuously for 24 hours by visual observation and counting of vehicles under three categories, viz., heavy motor vehicles, light motor vehicles and two/three wheelers. As traffic densities on

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 62 the roads are high, two persons were deployed simultaneously at each station during each shift- one person on each of the two directions for counting the traffic. At the end of each hour, fresh counting and recording was undertaken. Total numbers of vehicles per hour under the three categories were determined. Traffic study is conducted on 2 locations at NH-154, SH-13 and NH-21 from 18th to19th April 2019.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 63 Table 3.12 Traffic Study Report

No. of Vehicles/Day Passenger Total No. of Vehicle in PCU Total No. of Vehicle (PCU)/Hour Car Unit NH- NH-154 (PCU) NH-154 S. Vehicles 154 Nr. NH- NH-154 SH-13 NH-154 SH-13 SH-13 Nr. Well No. Distribution (Well NH-21 Well NH-21 154 NH-21 no.5 & no.5 & no.5 & 6 6 ) 6 1. Cars 14100 8092 15122 12166 1.0 14100 8092 15122 12166 588 337 630 507 2. Buses 864 651 822 566 3.0 2592 1953 2466 1698 108 81 103 71 3. Trucks 768 552 734 542 3.0 2304 1656 2202 1626 96 69 92 68 Two 8120 4464 3760 4060 186 157 169 4. 7200 8928 7520 0.5 3600 150 wheelers Three 2684 216 2888 2013 9 120 84 5. 3630 288 3850 0.75 2773 116 wheelers Total 26562 18511 28048 24078 25369 16381 28171 21563 1058 682 1102 899

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 64 Table 3.13 Existing Traffic Scenario with respect to LOS

V (Volume in C (Capacity in Road Existing V/C Ratio LOS PCU/hr) PCU/hr) NH-154 1058 3000 0.35 B

SH-13 682 1250 0.54 C

NH-154 1102 3000 0.37 B Well no.5 & 6 NH-21 899 3000 0.30 B

V/C LOS Performance 0.0-0.2 A Excellent 0.2-0.4 B Very Good 0.4-0.6 C Good/Average/Fair 0.6-0.8 D Poor 0.8-1.0 E Very Poor Reference: Indian Road Congress (IRC) 3.10.1 Interpretation of Traffic Study LOS values have been calculated based on traffic data on NH-154, SH-13, NH-154 Nr. Well no.5&6, and NH- 21 and it have been found 0.35, 0.54, 0.37 and 0.30 respectively. LOS value indicates that the performance of NH-154, NH-154 Nr. Well no.5&6, and NH-21 are very good and SH-13 is good. 3.11 SOIL QUALITY 8 numbers of samples were collected from different locations within 10 km radius to assess the baseline status of soil. Analysis was also carried out for physico-chemical parameters as well as the parameters to define the texture class. Soil samples were collected by using Khurpi, Augar and Core cutter. Samples were brought to the laboratory in polythene bags. Standard procedures have been followed for soil sampling and analysis.. Soil sampling locations are presented in Figure 3.21 and tabulated in Table 3.14. Results are presented in Table 3.15. Photographs showing the sampling activities are presented in Figure 3. 22.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 65

Figure 3.21 Map showing the study region location of Soil Table 3.14 Details of Soil sampling location

Code Location Latitude and Longitude 31° 34’44.91”N S1 Radu village 76° 53’56.84”E 31° 38’50.64”N S2 Bhadyal village 76° 57’13.24”E 31° 31’45.50”N S3 Jaroli village 76° 56’23.66”E 31° 42’31.17”N S4 Baloh village 76° 54’02.62”E 31° 37’29.00”N S5 Taroh village 76° 53’28.94”E 31°35’07.71”N S6 Darbathu village 76° 57’01.84”E 31° 32’11.08”N S7 Sunder Nagar 76° 52’59.57”E Mandi (Kartarpur 31° 40’11.34”N S8 area) 76°56’43.04”E

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 66

Soil – (Bhadyal village) Soil – (Dabatthu village)

Figure 3.22 Photographs of Soil sampling

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 67 Table 3.15 Soil Sample Analysis Result

S. No Parameters Unit S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 1 Water Holding Capacity % 52.9 53.4 52.2 51.8 48.2 49.3 52.1 53.6 2 Porosity % 47.8 49.2 45.8 48.4 41.4 47.5 49.8 50.2 3 Bulk Density gm/cc 1.36 1.19 1.30 1.32 1.60 1.54 1.25 1.22 4 Moisture % 8.8 9.2 8.5 9.6 8.1 8.6 9.1 9.6 5 Specific Gravity - 1.37 1.20 1.32 1.32 1.61 1.55 1.27 1.23 6 Infiltration capacity mm/hr 7.1 6.9 8.2 7.6 22.2 21.6 3.5 4.1 7 Particle Size Distribution a. Sand % 42.6 40.2 41.4 41.9 80.5 72.4 20.4 18.5 b. Silt % 22.2 20.0 21.2 21.6 9.9 14.2 31.0 30.3 c. Clay % 35.2 39.8 37.4 36.5 9.6 13.4 48.6 51.2 Clay Clay Clay Loamy Sandy 8 Texture - Clay loam Clay Clay loam loam loam sand loam 9 pH - 7.04 6.92 5.14 7.36 6.38 6.54 7.85 7.02 10 Electrical Conductivity dS/m 0.54 0.56 0.35 0.36 0.22 0.35 0.50 0.75 11 Calcium meq/100g 25.0 12.2 12.6 25.1 6.3 12.9 25.6 26.0 12 Magnesium meq/100g 2.3 2.1 3.7 2.4 3.7 1.2 17.2 12.9 13 Sodium meq/100g 0.67 0.44 0.48 0.46 0.53 0.47 1.0 0.73 14 Potassium meq/100g 0.31 0.43 0.13 0.29 0.32 0.30 1.45 0.82 Cation Exchange Capacity 15 - 28.3 15.2 16.9 28.4 10.9 14.9 45.1 40.5 (CEC) 16 SAR - 0.32 0.26 0.30 0.22 0.36 0.30 0.35 0.28

17 Carbonate as CaCO3 mg/100g BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 18 Nitrogen % 0.093 0.098 0.086 0.091 0.063 0.079 0.103 0.100 19 Phosphorus as PO4-P Kg/ha 39.9 54.4 21.8 32.3 21.8 54.7 63.4 61.6 20 Chloride mg/100g 2.2 1.5 2.0 1.6 2.3 1.2 1.1 14.2

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 68 21 Sulphate mg/100g 68.7 50.4 60.2 43.5 52.1 61.6 42.4 52.4 22 Organic matter % 1.86 1.97 1.90 1.82 1.28 1.59 2.07 2.00 23 Organic carbon % 1.08 1.14 1.10 1.05 0.74 0.92 1.20 1.16 24 Boron mg/100g 2.8 2.3 2.5 2.1 2.6 2.9 3.1 2.2 25 Arsenic mg/100g BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 26 Cadmium mg/100g 0.4 0.6 0.8 0.5 0.7 0.6 0.8 0.5 27 Mercury mg/100g BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 28 Nickel mg/100g BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 29 Manganese mg/100g 4.6 4.1 3.8 4.2 4.5 2.9 3.6 3.1 30 Chromium as Cr+6 mg/100g 6.6 3.3 9.0 10.5 9.8 7.9 8.4 8.9 31 Lead mg/100g 1.8 1.2 1.3 0.9 1.5 1.6 1.2 0.8 32 Iron mg/100g 14.5 13.2 7.6 6.4 10.8 8.9 9.5 11.2 33 Copper mg/100g BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 34 Zinc mg/100g 3.5 3.9 3.1 4.2 4.8 4.0 3.8 4.3 35 Sb mg/100g BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 36 Br mg/100g BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 37 Co mg/100g BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 38 Mo mg/100g 0.58 0.52 0.66 0.72 0.61 0.56 0.70 0.62 39 Cyanide mg/100g BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 40 Thiocyanate mg/100g BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 41 Chromium as Cr+3 mg/100g 1.3 0.8 0.7 0.9 1.0 0.6 0.8 0.5 India has no standard with respect to concentration but Indian Council of Agricultural Research (ICAR) has set the standard for classification of soil.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 69 Dutch standard and Indian Council of Agricultural Research (ICAR) has set the standard for classifications of soil are summerized as Table 3.16 and 3.17.

Table 3.16 Soil remediation intervention value as per Dutch standards

S. No. Parameter Intervention Values (mg/kg dry matter) 1 Zinc 720 2 Arsenic 76 3 Lead 530 4 Cadmium 13 5 Copper 190 6 Mercury (inorganic) 36 7 Nickel 100 Source: Soil Remediation Circular 2009, Minister of Housing, Spatial Planning and Environment, Netherlands. Note: Concentrations are shown for standard soil (10% organic matter and 25% clay)

Table 3.17 Standard soil classification

Sl. Soil Test Classification No. 1. pH <4.5 Extremely acidic 4.51- 5.50 Very strongly acidic 5.51-6.0 moderately acidic 6.01-6.50 slightly acidic 6.51-7.30 Neutral 7.31-7.80 slightly alkaline 7.81-8.50 moderately alkaline 8.51-9.0 strongly alkaline 9.01 very strongly alkaline 2 Salinity Electrical Upto 1.00 Average Conductivity 1.01-2.00 harmful to germination (mmhos/cm) 2.01-3.00 harmful to crops (sensitive to salts) (1 ppm = 640 mmho/cm) 3 Organic Carbon Upto 0.2: very less 0.21-0.4: less 0.41-0.5 medium, 0.51-0.8: on an average sufficient 0.81-1.00: sufficient >1.0 more than sufficient 4 Nitrogen (kg/ha) Upto 50 very less 51-100 less 101-150 good 151-300 Better

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 70 3.11.1 Summary of Soil Data  The soils are categorized as loamy sand to clay based on different soil separates (sand, silt and clay). They have moderate water holding capacity (48.2 to 53.6 %) and porosity varied from 41.4 – 50.2 %, but high to moderate drainage capacity as texture is loamy sand % sand >80 % to clay > 70 % is clay+ silt. The soil is categorized as shallow black having < 1m depth.  The CEC (10.9 to 40.5 meq/100 g) of soil indicated that soils are having low to moderate (21 to 50 meq/100 g) productivity potential. The pH ranged from 5.14 to 7.85 during the study period.  The soil EC varied from 0.22 to 0.75 dS/m and ESP ranged from 2.18 to 2.32. These parameters indicate that soils are acidic (pH, <6.5) to normal (pH 6.5 to 7.85), non-saline (EC < 0.8 dS/m) and non-sodic, as ESP is < 15.  Among exchangeable basic cations, predominance of calcium (6.3 to 26.0 meq/100 gm) was seen followed by magnesium (1.2 to 17.4 meq/100 g), potassium (0.13 to1.45 meq/100gm) and sodium (0.44 to 3.1 meq/100 gm).  The loss on ignition (0.74 to 1.20 % OC) indicate that soils are high (>0.75 % OC) in organic carbon status. This shows that soils are high in nitrogen status.  Considering only 2% available phosphorus based on total P, soils are classified as poor (>28 kg

P2O5/ha) in available P. On the basis of exchangeable potassium values soils are categorized as low

(<140 kg K2O/ha) to high (>280 kg K2O/ha) in potassium status. The levels of sulphur are very high, hence soils are acidic, which could be managed by liming the soils or by using dolomite (calcium- magnesium carbonate).The results relating to sulphur and total micronutrients (Fe, Cu, Cr, B, Mo, Zn, Cl) do not show alarming concentrations in different soil samples, except copper, which was deficient in the area. The heavy metal as well as toxic substances levels were also normal.

3.11.2 Interpretation of Soil Data Based on soil analysis data it is concluded that soil at the project site is non-saline (EC<0.8 dS/m). The soils are high in nitrogen, low in phosphorus and low to high in available potassium. The levels of total Fe, Cu, Cr, B and Zn are within the limits; however, copper is deficient, which needs supplementation. However, for successful greenbelt development liberal quantity of organic manure (50 tons/ha) and double the quantity of recommended doses of P fertilizer should be applied. The nitrogen and potassium are adequate; hence 20 % less than the recommended dose for green belt should be applied. As sulphur status is high, apply dolomite to bring down the soil pH to near neutral. The soil at the project site should be periodically monitored for EC, pH and ESP as well as OC (organic carbon), available P and K status. 3.12 WATER ENVIRONMENT Physical, Chemical and Microbiological factors influencing water quality are so interrelated that a change in any water quality parameter may trigger other changes in a complete network of interrelated variables. Selected water quality parameters for surface and ground water resources along with biological indicators within study region have been used for water environment and assessing the impact on it by proposed project. A study on water environment aspects of ecosystem plays an important role in environmental assessment to identify water related sensitive issues. 3.12.1 Reconnaissance As a significant part of predefined framework of the present study water samples were collected from selected locations. The Reconnaissance survey was undertaken and monitoring locations were finalized based on:  Presence, Location and uses of major water bodies in the region,

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 71  Type and Location of Industrial/residential areas, their intake and effluent disposal locations,  Likely areas that can represent baseline conditions.

3.12.2 Water Quality With the start of water quality study, the water resources in the study area were divided into two categories for getting ideal upshot of baseline status of water quality of the region. These two categories as determined are:  Ground water resources (tube well, open well, springs etc.)  Surface water resources - River, lake, pond

3.12.3 Sampling and Analysis All the water samples were collected and analyzed as per “Standard Methods for Examination of Water & Wastewater”, APHA 23rd edition, 2017. Water Samples for the analysis of physico-chemical parameters were collected in plastic carboy and parameter wise preserved onsite as per the technique defined in the book of APHA, 23rd edition, 2017. Temperature, pH and DO were analyzed onsite and samples were brought to the laboratory for the analysis of remaining parameters. 3.12.4 Ground Water To assess the quality of ground water, samples were collected from 8 numbers of locations for the analysis of physico-chemical and microbiological parameters. Ground water sampling locations are presented in Table 3.18 and Figure 3.23. Analysis results are presented in Table 3.19. Photographs showing the sampling activities are presented in Figure 3.24.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 72

Figure 3.23 Map showing the study region with locations for Ground Water

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 73 Table 3.18 Details of Ground Water sampling locations

Code Location Latitude and Longitude Source

GW1 Radu village 31° 32’36.01”N Hand Pump 76° 53’22.04”E GW2 Bhadyal village 31° 38’59.31”N Hand Pump 76° 57’37.24”E GW3 Jaroli village 31°31’41.42”N Hand Pump 76° 56’43.13”E GW4 Baloh village 31° 42’18.90”N Hand Pump 76° 53’41.14”E GW5 Taroh village 31° 37’12.40”N Well 76° 53’24.48”E GW6 Darbathu village 31° 35’06.14”N Hand Pump 76° 57’02.52”E GW7 Sunder Nagar 31°32’04.67”N Hand Pump 76° 52’58.13”E GW8 Mandi (Kartarpur area) 31° 42’03.40”N Bore well 76° 56’56.42”E

Ground water – (Jaroli village) Ground water – (Sundernagar)

Figure 3.24 Photographs of Ground water sampling

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 74 Table 3.19 Ground water Analysis Results

Drinking Water Specification IS 10500: S. Parameters Unit GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4 GW5 GW6 GW7 1992 (Reaffirmed 2012) No. GW8 Desirable Permissible Limit Limit 1. Temperature 0C 19.0 18.0 18.0 18.0 19.0 17.0 19.0 18.0 -- -- 6.68 No 2. pH @ 250C pH Unit 6.5 – 8.5 6.80 7.25 6.98 7.01 7.06 7.16 7.79 Relaxation 3. Colour Hazen Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil 5 15 4. Odour -- Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable 5. Taste -- Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable 6. TDS @ 1800C mg/L 276 202 238 406 204 262 389 282 500 2000 7. Conductivity µmho/cm 422 328 372 632 322 410 598 438 -- -- 8. Salinity 90 81 63 189 75 88 176 167 9. Turbidity NTU 1.1 0.8 0.9 1.1 1.0 0.8 0.9 1.1 1 5 10. TSS mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL -- -- Total Hardness 167 11. mg/L 200 600 as CaCO3 192 92 148 228 135 167 198 12. Calcium mg/L 53 28 40 38 43 43 46 35 75 200 Total Alkalinity 144 13. mg/L 200 600 as CaCO3 182 128 168 204 96 156 208 14. Chloride mg/L 58 38 36 122 52 56 98 56 250 1000 15. Magnesium mg/L 14 5.3 12 32 6 14 20 19 30 100 16. Sulphate mg/L 2.8 1.1 4.3 1.9 14 3 3.9 33 200 400 Total 0.1 17. Phosphorus mg/L -- --

(PO4-P) 0.1 0.08 0.09 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.09 18. Sodium mg/L 32 44 27 66 24 33 82 33 -- -- 19. Potassium mg/L 2 1 9 8 1 5 1 8 -- -- 20. Chloramine mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 4.0 No Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 75 Relaxation 21. Fluoride mg/L 0.3 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 1.0 1.5 Phenolic 22. mg/L 0.001 0.002 Compound Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil No 23. Mineral oil mg/L 0.5 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Relaxation Dissolved 5.6 24. mg/L -- -- Oxygen 5.3 5.4 5.2 5.5 5.3 5.4 5.5 25. COD mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL -- -- BOD (3 days @ 26. mg/L -- -- 270C) BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL No 27. Nitrate mg/L 45 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Relaxation 28. Total Nitrogen mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL -- -- No 29. Free Ammonia mg/L 0.5 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Relaxation Residual 30. mg/L -- -- Chlorine Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Anionic 31. mg/L 0.2 1.0 detergent BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL No 32. Barium mg/L 0.7 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Relaxation No 33. Selenium mg/L 0.01 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Relaxation Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil No 34. Cyanide mg/L 0.05 Nil Relaxation No 35. Molybdenum mg/L 0.07 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Relaxation No 36. PAH mg/L 0.0001 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Relaxation Polychlorinated 37. mg/L -- -- biphenyls BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 38. SAR -- 1.01 2.01 0.97 1.91 0.91 1.12 5.10 1.12 -- --

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 76 0.08 No 39. Iron mg/L 0.3 0.08 0.12 0.18 0.26 0.05 0.14 0.06 Relaxation 40. Copper mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.05 1.5 Hexavalent No 41. mg/L 0.05 Chromium BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Relaxation 42. Zinc mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 5 15 43. Arsenic mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.01 0.05 No 44. Cadmium mg/L 0.003 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Relaxation No 45. Mercury mg/L 0.001 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Relaxation No 46. Nickel mg/L 0.02 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Relaxation 47. Manganese mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.1 0.3 No 48. Lead mg/L 0.01 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Relaxation 49. Aluminum mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.03 0.2 Present/ Absent 50. Total Coliform Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Shall not be detected in Present/ Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent any 100 ml sample 51. Fecal Coliform Absent Note : 1) Qualitative analysis (spot test) has been carried out for color, cyanide, residual chlorine and phenolic compound.

2) BDL : Below detection limit , Detection range of laboratory is below the permissible limit for drinking water.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 77

3.12.5 Summary of Ground Water Result The test results were compared with the Drinking Water Specification: IS: 10500, 1992 (Reaffirmed 2012) and it is summarized as under.  pH was observed in the range of 6.68 – 7.79, which meets with drinking water desirable norms.  Turbidity was found in the range of 0.8 – 1.1 NTU.  Total Dissolved Solid (TDS) were recorded in the range of 202 - 406 mg/L with minimum at well no.2 and maximum at well no.4.  Conductivity varies from 322 to 632 µmho/cm. The ratio of TDS to conductivity was observed in the range of 0.6 to 0.65 which is within the desired range.  Total Hardness was in the range of 92 - 228 mg/L with minimum at well no.2 and maximum at well no.4.  Total Alkalinity was found in the range of 96 - 208 mg/L with minimum at well no.5 and maximum at well no.7.  Chloride was found in the range of 36 to 122 mg/L and Sulphate varies from 1.1 to 33 mg/L.  Iron was found in the range of 0.05-0.26 mg/L with minimum at well no.5 and maximum at well no.2.  As microbiological parameters, Total coliform and Fecal coliform was also carried out and it was found absent.

3.12.6 Interpretation of Ground Water Quality Data Based on comparison of test results with drinking water standard, it is interpreted that the water quality of ground water samples meet with the drinking water standard IS 10500: 2012. These water samples can be used in all domestic purposes as well as in drinking. This interpretation relate to the sample collected from particular location only. 3.12.7 Surface Water To assess the quality of Surface water, samples were collected from 8 numbers of locations for the analysis of physico-chemical, microbiological, Heavy metal and Biological parameters. Frequency of sampling was once during the study period. Sampling and analysis was carried out as per “Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater 23rd edition, 2017Surface water sampling locations are presented in the Table 3.20 and Figure 3.25. Analysis results are presented in Table 3.21 and 3.23. . Phographs showing the sampling activities are presented in Figure 3.26.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 78

Figure 3.25 Map showing the locations for Surface water

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 79 Table 3.20 Details of Surface Water Sampling Locations Code Location Latitude and Longitude Source 31° 35’39.02”N SW1 Suketu River River 76° 54’24.05”E 31° 38’46.14”N SW2 Suketi River River 76° 57’09.82”E 31° 31’45.63”N SW3 Kansa River River 76° 56’29.30”E 31° 42’32.21”N SW4 Jatla River River 76° 54’02.54”E 31° 36’07.03”N SW5 Ratli River River 76° 54’06.88”E 31° 35’35.61”N SW6 Lohari River River 76° 55’44.04”E 31° 32’05.53”N SW7 Sundernagar Lake Lake 76° 53’05.55”E 31° 32’31.12”N SW8 Beas River River 76° 54’01.16”E

Surface water - (Suketi River) Surface water – Jatla River

Figure 3.26 Photographs of Surface water sampling

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 80 Table 3.21 Surface water Analysis Results

S. Parameters Unit SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 No. SW7 SW8

1. Temperature 0C 20.0 19.0 20.0 19.0 20.0 18.0 20.0 19.0 2. pH @ 250C pH Unit 6.86 7.09 7.16 7.35 7.27 7.06 6.90 7.02 3. Colour Hazen 5 8 10 8 5 7 5 8 4. Odour - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable 5. Taste mg/L Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable 6. TDS @ 1800C µmho/cm 262 251 158 162 181 158 192 140 7. Conductivity mg/L 408 392 246 254 284 250 298 212 8. Salinity mg/L 72 58 61 32 27 37 74 29 9. Turbidity mg/L 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.4 1.2 1.0 1.2 1.4 10. TSS mg/L 4.0 2.0 2.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 Total Hardness as 11. mg/L 176 188 92 128 152 114 102 69 CaCO3 12. Calcium mg/L 52 48 28 42 48 32 12 19 Total Alkalinity as 13. mg/L 164 176 78 112 138 100 98 96 CaCO3 14. Chloride mg/L 46 36 37 20 18 25 47 20 15. Magnesium mg/L 11 16 5.3 5.6 8 8 17 5 16. Sulphate mg/L 12 10 10 7.1 8 8.4 16 11 Total Phosphorus 0.08 17. mg/L 0.06 0.07 0.06 0.08 0.06 0.07 0.08 (PO4-P) 18. Sodium mg/L 27 23 23 10 10 14 32 10 19. Potassium mg/L 3 3 1 1 1 2 4 2 20. Chloramines mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 21. Fluoride mg/L 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.3 22. Phenolic Compound mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 23. Mineral oil mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 24. Dissolved Oxygen mg/L 6.1 5.8 5.9 5.8 5.7 5.8 5.6 5.5 Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 81 25. COD mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 26. BOD (3 days @ 270C) mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 27. Nitrate mg/L 0.6 0.7 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.7 0.6 0.3 28. Total Nitrogen mg/L 0.8 0.9 0.7 0.8 0.7 0.9 0.8 0.7 29. Free Ammonia mg/L 0.002 0.004 0.004 0.007 0.005 0.004 0.003 0.003 30. Residual Chlorine mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 31. Anionic detergent mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 32. Barium mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 33. Selenium mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 34. Cyanide mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 35. Molybdenum mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 36. PAH mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Polychlorinated 37. mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL biphenyls 38. SAR - 0.89 0.73 1.05 0.39 0.36 0.57 1.38 0.53 39. Iron mg/L 0.18 0.07 0.12 0.09 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.02 40. Copper mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Hexavalent 41. mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Chromium 42. Zinc mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 43. Arsenic mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 44. Cadmium mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 45. Mercury mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 46. Nickel mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 47. Manganese mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 48. Lead mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 49. Aluminum mg/L BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL Note : 1) Qualitative analysis (spot test) has been carried out for color, cyanide, residual chlorine and phenolic compound. 2) BDL : Below detection limit , Detection range of laboratory is below the permissible limit for drinking water.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 82 Table 3.22 Microbiological Analysis of surface Water Fecal Total coliform Fecal coliform E-Coli Code Spectrococcai Most Probable No (MPN): No/100 ml SW1 14 10 <1.8 <1.8 SW2 10 8 <1.8 <1.8 SW3 12 8 <1.8 <1.8 SW4 12 8 <1.8 <1.8 SW5 10 8 <1.8 <1.8 SW6 12 8 <1.8 <1.8 SW7 12 10 <1.8 <1.8 SW8 14 10 <1.8 <1.8 Table 3.23 Inland Surface Water Classification (CPCB Standards)

Sr. Class Characteristics No. A B C D E 1. Dissolved Oxygen, mg/L, Min 6 5 4 4 - 2. Biochemical Oxygen Demand, mg/ L Max 2 3 3 - - Total Coliform Organisms* 3. 50 500 5000 - - MPN/100 ml, Max 4. Total Dissolved Solids mg/L Max 500 - 1500 - 2100

5. Chlorides (as CL), mg/L, Max 250 - 600 - 600

6. Colour, Hazen Units, Max 10 300 300 - -

7. Sodium Absorption Ratio, Max - - - - 26

8. Boron (as B) mg/L Max - - - - 2

9. Sulphates (as SO4), mg/L Max 400 - 400 - 1000

10. Nitrates (as NO3), mg/L Max 20 - 50 - -

11 Free Ammonia (as N), mg/L Max - - - 12 -

12. Conductivity at 250C, micromhos/cm, Max - - - 1000 2250

13. pH value 6.5-8.5 6.5- 6.5-8.5 6.5- 6.5- 8.5 8.5 8.5 14. Iron (as Fe), mg/l, Max 0.3 - 50 - -

15. Fluorides (as F), mg/L, Max 1.5 1.5 1.5 - -

16. Copper (as Cu), mg/L, Max 1.5 - 1.5 - - * If the Coliform is found to be more than the prescribed tolerance limits, the criteria for Coliform shall be satisfied if not more than 20 percent of samples show more than the tolerance limit specified, and not more than 5 percent of samples show values more than 4 times the tolerance limits. Further, the facal Coliform should not be more than 20 percent of the Coliform. Source: Indian Standard (IS: 2296 – 1982). Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 83

A’ Drinking water surface without conventional treatment but after disinfection B’ Outdoor bathing (organized) C’ Drinking water source with conventional treatment followed by disinfection D’ Propagation of wild life, fisheries E’ Irrigation, industrial, cooling, controlled waste disposal 3.12.8 Summary of Surface Water Quality The following description is based on the analysis of the samples:

 During the analysis pH of the samples was found in the range of 6.86 – 7.35.  TDS analysis was also carried out for surface water sample and it was found in the range of 140 - 262 mg/L.  TSS was found in the range of 2 – 4 mg/L.  Total Hardness ranges from 69 – 176 mg/L with maximum in the water sample of well no.5.  DO is one of the important parameter to indicate towards the contamination of organic matter. DO level decrease as soon as organic contamination increases. During analysis DO was found in the range of 5.5-6.1 mg/L.  COD and BOD analysis was also carried out during the study period and results were found more than the expected value for the Rivers. Various literatures show that BOD should be less than 4.0 mg/L for the better survival of aquatic life.  Total Nitrogen was found in the range of 0.7 – 0.9 mg/L.  Iron content was found in the range of 0.02- 0.18 mg/L and other heavy metals were found well within the limit.  MPN test was also carried out for the surface water sample and it was found positive. It indicates towards the faecal contamination in surface water body. 3.12.9 Interpretation of Surface Water Quality Data Test results found after testing were compared with Inland surface water classification (CPCB standard). Based on test result data and comparison study, it is interpreted that quality of River water meet with Class A (Drinking water surface without conventional treatment but after disinfection), Inland surface water CPCB standard. Quality of surface water (River & Lake) is quite good and this water can be used in drinking (after disinfection), bathing, irrigation and washing. Presence of Total coliform and Fecal coliform have been noted during the testing, it does not conform the actual source of fecal contamination because these organisms may reach in water body through soil contamination also. 3.13 ECOLOGY AND BIODIVERSITY Ecology is the scientific study of the relations that living organisms have with respect to each other and their natural environment. Producer, consumer and decomposer govern whole cycle of ecology. Plant and animal both are interdependent to each other. Producer is necessary for each consumer. Plant plays their role in ecology as producer. Plant, animals and microorganism together with the environment in which they live make an independent unit called the Ecosystem. The main objective of the ecological survey is aimed to find out baseline status of flora and fauna of the study region. An ecological survey of the study area was conducted particularly with reference to listing of species and assessment of the existing baseline ecological (terrestrial and marine ecosystem) conditions in the study area.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 84 3.13.1 Methodology of Ecology and Biodiversity Primary survey has been conducted up to 5 km surrounding thestudy area.. Before starting the survey, Toposheet of study area was taken from client to decide the survey area and sampling spot points. Secondary data information was also collected for desktop study purpose and preparing the list of probable flora and fauna. Secondary data was also collated from the authenticated sources in the public domain. Sources of secondary data mainly comprise standard field guides, published research papers or articles, governmental publications and websites of internationally recognized conservation organizations such as International Union for Conservation of Nature and Natural Resources (IUCN), Birdlife International, Conservation International, Wildlife Conservation Society (WCS) and World Wildlife Fund (WWF). Supplementary information was obtained through informal interactions with local communities.

Data Collection: Following steps were considered for the collection of secondary data and generation of primary data while carrying out ecological survey of the study area.

Step 1: Defining the study area The study area was larger than the development site as it included adjacent areas that might be directly or indirectly affected by the proposal.

Step 2: Stratifying the site When designing a field survey, the study area was stratified (i.e. divide the area into relatively homogenous units - often referred to as 'environmental sampling units' or 'stratification units'). Stratified sampling provides a logical, objective and efficient method of undertaking surveys and ensures that the full range of potential habitats and vegetation types will be systematically sampled.

Step 3: Visiting the site A preliminary site visit was conducted by our in-house field area experts to refine the initial stratification units, determine the vegetation types present at the site to assess the vegetation condition and conduct a habitat assessment.

Step 4: Survey Qualitative surveys of flora have been done by recording the plant species through visual observation only. Higher floristic species, namely angiosperms were covered. In case of faunal species, qualitative data was collected mainly at each sampling site. Any species recorded outside the sampling sites were ascribed to the nearest sampling site Vegetation measurement was done from points rather than in an area with boundaries for trees, shrubs and herbs.

Faunal survey was conducted by adopting the method opportunistic observation/ species list method/direct sighting /intensive search/ bird calls/nests, burrows, dropping or scats and conformation with local public. Species covered under the faunal survey are mammal, reptile & amphibian and birds. Primary data was collected through most of the diurnal period from early morning till late evening. Photograph of the sampling activities are presented in Figure 3.27.

Aquatic ecology and biodiversity data have been recorded for zooplankton, Phytoplankton and benthos. Random sampling has been conducted in the water body for the said parameters as per APHA 23rd Edition, 2017. Study area: 2295.77 Sq.km. Study period: 15th March 2019 to 15th June 2019 Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 85 List of villages: Radu village, Bhadyal village, Jaroli village, Baloh Village, Taroh village, Darbatthu village, Sundernagar, Mandi

Floral Survey Common Hoopoe bird cited during Survey

Figure 3.27 Photograph of Ecology & Biodiversity Survey

3.13.2 Floral Diversity of the Study Area Flora detail is presented in Table 3.24 to 3.26.

Trees: Approx. 29 species of trees belong to 15 families are enumerated from the study area. Table 3.24 List of Trees in the Study Area

S. No. Family and Scientific Name Local Name

1. Apocynaceae 1/1 Wrightia tomentosa Daira 2. Anacardiaceae 2/2 Mangifera indica Aam 3. Fabaceae 3/1 Albizia amara Krishna Siris 4/2 Albizia lebbeck Kala siris 5/3 Acacia catechu Kher 6/4 Bauhinia racemosa Astara 7/5 Acacia nilotica Babool 8/6 Acacia modesta Rattak 9/7 Bauhinia purpurea Jasud 10/8 Dalbergia sissoo Shisham tali 4. Rutaceae 11/1 Aegle marmelos Bel

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 86 5. Moraceae 12/1 Ficus religiosa Peepal 13/2 Ficus semicordata Karanda 14/3 Ficus hispida Rumbal 15/4 Ficus rumphii Palakh 6. Combretaceae 16/1 Terminalia arjuna Arjuna 17/2 Terminalia bellerica Bahera 18/3 Terminalia Chebula Harar 7. Myrtaceae 19/1 Syzygium cumini Jamun 8. Dipterocarpaceae 20/1 Shorea robusta Sal 9. Ebenaceae 21/1 Diospyros chloroxylon Kinnu 10. Phyllanthaceae 22/1 Phyllanthus emblica Amla 11. Malvaceae 23/1 Bombax ceiba Sawar 12. Meliaceae 24/1 Azadirachta indica Neem 13. Rhamnaceae 25/1 Ziziphus mauritiana Ber 14. Sapotaceae 26/1 Madhuca indica Mahwa 15. Lamiaceae 27/1 Gmelina arborea Ban 28/2 Tectona grandis Sagon 29/3 Vitex negundo Bana

Shrubs: 18 species of shrubs belong to 13 families are enumerated from the study area. Table 3.25 List of Shrubs in the Study Area S.No. Family & Scientific Name Local Name 1. Apocynaceae 1/1 Calotropis procera Aak 2/2 Carissa opaca Karora 2. Malvaceae 3/1 Urena lobata Unga 3. Convolvulaceae 4/1 Ipomea fistulosa Nasarmo 4. Musaceae 5/1 Musa Paradisiaca Kela 5. Fabaceae 6/1 Mimosa hamata Kai baval

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 87 S.No. Family & Scientific Name Local Name 1. Apocynaceae 7/2 Mimosa himalayana Dargarhi 8/3 Prosopis juliflora Gando baval 6. Nyctaginaceae 9/1 Bougainvillea spectabilis Bougainvel 7. Rutaceae 10/1 Murraya koenigii Kari patta 8. Rhamnaceae 11/1 Ziziphus xylopyrus Ghatabor 12/2 Ziziphus nummularia Jhadneri 9. Solanaceae 13/1 Datura metel Daturo 10. Acanthaceae 14/1 Adhatoda vasica Adusa 11. Euphorbiaceae 15/1 Ricinus Communis Errand 16/2 Jatropha curcas Ratanjot 12. Verbenaceae 17/1 Lantana camara Putush 13. Lythraceae 18/1 Woodfordia fruticosa Dhabai

Herbs: 16 species of herbs belong to 12 families are enumerated from the study area. Table 3.26 List of Herbs in the Study Area

S. No. Family and Scientific Name Local Name 1. Caesalpiniaceae 1/1 Cassia tora Chakauda 2. Euphorbiaceae 2/1 Euphorbia hirta Ghaopata 3. Asteraceae 3/1 Xanthium strumarium Gokhru 4. Poaceae 4/1 Cynodon dactylon Durba 5/2 Typha angustata Ramban 6/3 Saccharum spontaneum Kaans 5. Malvaceae 7/1 Sida cordifolia Bala 6. Asparagaceae 8/1 Urginea indica Jungli Dungli 7. Commelinaceae 9/1 Cyanotis sp. Gadahpurna 10/2 Commelina benghalensis Kanshira 8. Solanaceae

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 88 S. No. Family and Scientific Name Local Name 1. Caesalpiniaceae 11/1 Solanum nigrum Bhatkatiya 9. Asteraceae 12/1 Eclipta prostrata Bhringraaj 13/2 Tridax procumbens Ghamra 10. Labiatae 14/1 Ocimum sanctum Tulsi 11. Fabaceae 15/1 Mimosa pudica Lajwanti 12. Lamiaceae 16/1 Ocimum basilicum Van Tulsi Source: Primary data and Forest Department, Mandi District 3.13.3 Fauna Diversity of the Study Area There was no endangered species observed during faunal survey, list of fauna detail summarized in Table 3.27 to 3.31. Table 3.27 List of Mammals in the Study Area S.No. Scientific Name Common Name Schedule as per WPA 1972 1. Funambulus pennantii Five striped squirrel Schedule IV 2. Axis axis Chital Schedule III 3. Rattus rattus Common house Rat Schedule V 4. Mus booduga Indian Field Mouse Schedule IV 5. Presbytis entellus Common Langur Schedule II 6. Macaca mulatta Rhesus Macaque Schedule II 7. Felus chaus Jungle Cat Schedule II 8. Herpestes edwardsii Common Mongoose Schedule IV 9. Canis aureus Jackal Schedule II 10. Lepus nigricollis Indian Hare Schedule IV

Table 3.28 List of Domestic Animal in the Study Area

S.No. Scientific Name Common Name 1. Bubalus bubalis Buffalo 2. Bos taurus Cow 3. Capra aegagrushircus Goat 4. Canis lupus familiaris Dog

Table 3.29 List of Birds in the Study Area

Schedule as per WPA S. No. Scientific Name Common Name 1972 1. Anthus trivialis Tree pipit Schedule IV 2. Motacilla flava Yellow wagtall Schedule IV 3. Turdoides caudatus Common Babbler Schedule IV

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 89 Schedule as per WPA S. No. Scientific Name Common Name 1972 4. Corvus macrorhynchos Jungle Crow Schedule IV 5. Dicrurus macrocercus Black Drongo Schedule IV Eudynamys 6. Western Koel Schedule IV scolopaceus 7. Egretta garzetta Little Egret Schedule IV 8. Ardea alba Large egret Schedule IV 9. Mycteria Leucocephala Painted stork Schedule IV 10. Anas poecilorhyach Spotbill Schedule IV 11. Accipiter badius Shikra Schedule IV Prancolinus 12. Black partridge Schedule IV francolinus 13. Mesophoyx intermedia Intermediate Egret Schedule IV 14. Gallus qallus Red jungle fowl Schedule IV 15. Perdicula asiatica Jungle bush quall Schedule IV 16. Coturnix coturnix Grey quall Schedule IV 17. Milvus migrans Common Pariah Kite Schedule IV 18. Pavo cristatus Common Peafowl Schedule I 19. Fulica atra Common Coot Schedule IV 20. Copsychus saularis Magpie - Robin Schedule IV 21. Vanellus indicus Red-wattled Lapwing Schedule IV 22. Tringa hypoleucos Common sandpiper Schedule IV 23. Tringa ochropus Greenshank Schedule IV 24. Sterna aurantia Indian river tern Schedule IV 25. Streptopelia chinensis Spotted dove Schedule IV 26. Psittacula supatria Alakndrine parakeet Schedule IV 27. Anas crecca Common Teal Schedule IV 28. Psittacula krameri Rose ringed Parakeet Schedule IV 29. Cuclus micropterus Indian cuckoo Schedule IV 30. Athene brama Spotted Owlet Schedule IV 31. Apus affinis House swift Schedule IV 32. Collocalia brevirostris Himalayan swiftlet Schedule IV 33. Alcedo atthis Common kingfisher Schedule IV White breasted 34. Halcyon smyrnensis Schedule IV kingfisher 35. Merops orientalis Green bee eater Schedule IV 36. Coracias carrulus Indian rooller Schedule IV Himalayan scaly 37. Picus squamatus bellied Schedule IV green woodpecker 38. Pitta brachyuran Indian pitta Schedule IV 39. Galerida cristats Crested Lark Schedule IV 40. Alauda gulgule Skylark Schedule IV 41. Oriolus traillii Black headed oriole Schedule IV

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 90 Schedule as per WPA S. No. Scientific Name Common Name 1972 42. Acridotheres tristis Common Maina Schedule IV 43. Sturnus contra Pied myna Schedule IV Pericrocotus 44. Small minivet Schedule IV cinnamomeus Hypsipates 45. Black bulbul Schedule IV madacascariensis 46. Turdoides striatus Jungle Babbler Schedule IV 47. Turdoides caudatus Common babbler Schedule IV 48. Culicicapa cevlonensis Grey headed flycather Schedule IV 49. Lanius collurio Red-backed shrike Schedule IV 50. Orthotomus sutorius Common Tailorbird Schedule IV 51. Saxicoloides fulicata Indian Robin Schedule IV 52. Monitocola soclitarius Blue rock thrush Schedule IV 53. Certhis himelevana Himalayan tres creeper Schedule IV Francolinus 54. Gray partridge Schedule IV pondicerianus 55. Anthus similes Brown rock pipit Schedule IV 56. Columba livia Rock Pigeon Schedule IV 57. Podiceps euficollis Little grebe Schedule IV 58. Phalacrocorax niger Little cormorant Schedule IV 59. Ardea Cimerea Grey heron Schedule IV 60. Ardeola grayii Indian Pond-Heron Schedule IV 61. Upupa epops Common hoopoe Schedule II Table 3.30 List of Reptile and Amphibian in the Study Area

S.No. Scientific Name Common Name Schedule as per WPA 1972 1. Vipera russelli Russell’s viper Schedule II 2. Bungarus caerulens Common Krait Schedule II 3. Ptyas mucosa Yellow Rat Snake Schedule II 4. Calotes versicolor Common garden lizard Schedule IV 5. Varanus monitor Monitor lizard Schedule IV Hemidactylus 6. House lizard Schedule IV flaviviridis 7. Bufo melanostictus Common Indian Toad Schedule IV 8. Rana tigrina Indian bull frog Schedule IV Source: Primary data and Forest Department, Mandi District

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 91  Fish Survey Fish data have been collected by interviewing with local fisherman of the area.

Table 3.31 Details of Fishes S. Scientific Name Species No. 1. Labeo rohita Rohu 2. Labeo calbasu Karounch 3. Labeo bata Bata 4. Labeo gonius Khursa 5. Catla catla Bhakur 6. Crirrihina mirgala Naina 7. Mystus aor Tengra 8. Ophicephalus gachuwa Girai 9. Chela bacaila Chelwa 10. Barbus stigma Putia 11. Trigogaster Khasua 12. Hetereopneustes fossies Singhi 13. Notapeternus chitala Moi

3.16.4 Aquatic Biodiversity

Aquatic biodiversity has enormous economic and aesthetic value and is largely responsible for maintaining and supporting overall environmental health. Humans have long depended on aquatic resources for food, medicines, and materials as well as for recreational and commercial purposes such as fishing and tourism. Aquatic organisms also rely upon the great diversity of aquatic habitats and resources for food, materials, and breeding grounds. For the study of aquatic biodiversity, samples for phytoplankton, zooplankton and benthos were collected from 7 rivers and 1 lake water body, which flow within the study region.  Phytoplankton

Phytoplankton plays their role as producer in water ecosystem. They play an important role in maintaining the food cycle for aquatic environment. The phytoplankton occurs as unicellular, colonial or filamentous fonn. Phytoplankton has long been used as indicator of water quality. Some species flourishes in highly eutrophic waters while others are very sensitive to organic and/or chemical wastes.

Phytoplankton samples were collected from the depth of 0.5m of water body with the help of depth sampler. Lugol’s iodine was added @ 0.3ml/100 ml for the preservation of phytoplankton. To study the complete phytoplankton concentration, sample was concentrated by centrifuging it in the laboratory. Phytoplankton counting was done by using the Sedgwick-Rafter (S-R) Cell Method at magnification up to 200 x.

Frequency of the sampling and analysis was once during the study period. Sampling locations have been presented under the analysis of Phytoplankton in Table 3.32 and Figure 3.28 and Test results are presented in Table 3.33 and 3.34.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 92

Figure 3.27 Map showing the study region location of Phytoplankton sampling Table 3.32 Details of Phytoplankton Sampling Locations Code Location Latitude and Longitude Source 31° 35’39.02”N P1 Suketu River River 76° 54’24.05”E 31° 38’46.14”N P2 Suketi River River 76° 57’09.82”E 31° 31’45.63”N P3 Kansa River River 76° 56’29.30”E 31° 42’32.21”N P4 Jatla River River 76° 54’02.54”E 31° 36’07.03”N P5 Ratli River River 76° 54’06.88”E 31° 35’35.61”N P6 Lohari River River 76° 55’44.04”E 31° 32’05.53”N P7 Sundernagar Lake Lake 76° 53’05.55”E 31° 32’31.12”N P8 Beas River River 76° 54’01.16”E

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 93 Table 3.33 Phytoplankton Analysis

Total Group percentage Shanon Location Count/L Weiner Chlorophyceae Cyanophyceae Bacelleriophyceae Index P1 610 42 13 45 3.5 P2 580 36 16 48 3.6 P3 560 38 12 50 4.1 P4 625 40 12 48 3.8 P5 640 42 12 46 3.9 P6 590 40 8 52 3.1 P7 600 44 6 50 3.7 P8 610 40 12 48 3.3

Table 3.34 Phytoplankton species and Group

Group Dominant No. of species species SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 Chlorophyceae Chlorell sp., Spirogyra sp, Ulotrix sp., 12 10 9 14 15 11 9 10 Ankistrodesmus sp. Cyanophyceae Lyngbya sp. 8 10 6 6 8 10 10 5 Oscillotoria Anabaena Bacelleriophyceae Nitschia sp., 11 14 13 10 10 11 13 14 Navicula sp. Diatoma sp. ,

 Zooplankton The occurrence and abundance of zooplankton depends on its productivity, which in turn is influenced by abiotic factors and the level of nutrients in the water. Zooplankton forms the microscopic animals that play an important role in an aquatic food chain as they are largely consumed by fishes and other higher organisms in food chain.

Zooplankton samples were collected from the depth of 0.5m of water body with the help of depth sampler. Formalin solution was added @ 5ml/L for the preservation of zooplankton. To study the complete zooplankton concentration, sample was concentrated by centrifuging it in the laboratory. Zooplankton counting was done by using the Sedgwick-Rafter (S-R) Cell Method.

Frequency of the sampling and analysis was once during the study period. Sampling locations have been presented under the analysis of Zooplnkton in Table 3.32 and Figure 3.28 and Test results are presented in Table 3.36.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 94

Figure 3.28 Map showing the study region location of Zooplankton sampling

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 95 Table 3.35 Details of Zooplankton Sampling Locations Code Location Latitude and Longitude Source 31° 35’39.02”N Z1 Suketu River River 76° 54’24.05”E 31° 38’46.14”N Z2 Suketi River River 76° 57’09.82”E 31° 31’45.63”N Z3 Kansa River River 76° 56’29.30”E 31° 42’32.21”N Z4 Jatla River River 76° 54’02.54”E 31° 36’07.03”N Z5 Ratli River River 76° 54’06.88”E 31° 35’35.61”N Z6 Lohari River River 76° 55’44.04”E 31° 32’05.53”N Z7 Sundernagar Lake Lake 76° 53’05.55”E 31° 32’31.12”N Z8 Beas River River 76° 54’01.16”E Table 3.36 Zooplankton Analysis

Sampling Total Protozoa Rotifers Copepods Shanon Code Count/L in % in % % Weiner Index Z1 110 38 22 40 3.9 Z2 142 40 16 44 4.5 Z3 126 38 20 42 3.8 Z4 134 38 22 40 4.0 Z5 156 40 12 48 4.2 Z6 160 36 14 50 4.3 Z7 142 38 20 42 4.5 Z8 150 40 15 45 4.1

Total species distribution was 20 -25 and dominant species belongs to protozoa were Urocentrum, Vorticella and Sarcodina, species belongs to rotifer were Asplanchna, Brachionus durgae and species belong to copepod were Cyclops sternuus, C. viridis and Diaptomus edax.

 Benthos

Benthos is the biological species which are attached with the substratum of water body and they play major role in balancing the aquatic eco system. Diatom, algae and nano planktons are food for the benthos. Benthos is collected from the substratum of the water body with the help of benthic sampler. After the sampling they were transferred in polyethylene bag. Samples were preserved with 10% formalin solution. During the analysis sediment was passed through a series of sieves. Macro invertebrate were separate with the help of scrapper and spatula and slurry was brought under microscopic observation for micro fauna identification. Sampling locations have been presented under the analysis of Benthos in Table 3.33 and Figure 3.22. Qualitative data of Benthos are presented in Table 3.38. Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 96

Figure 3.29 Map showing the study region location of Benthos sampling

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 97 Table 3.37 Details of Benthos Sampling Locations

Code Location Latitude and Longitude Source 31° 35’39.02”N B1 Suketu River River 76° 54’24.05”E 31° 38’46.14”N 2 Suketi River River 76° 57’09.82”E 31° 31’45.63”N 3 Kansa River River 76° 56’29.30”E 31° 42’32.21”N 4 Jatla River River 76° 54’02.54”E 31° 36’07.03”N 5 Ratli River River 76° 54’06.88”E 31° 35’35.61”N -6 Lohari River River 76° 55’44.04”E 31° 32’05.53”N 7 Sundernagar Lake Lake 76° 53’05.55”E 31° 32’31.12”N 8 Beas River River 76° 54’01.16”E Table 3.38 Qualitative analysis of Benthos

Systematic B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 Group Polychaetes + + + + + + + + Mysids _ _ _ + _ _ _ _ Ostracods ______Isopodes _ _ _ + _ _ _ _ Amphipodes _ _ _ + _ _ _ _ Brachyurans _ _ + _ _ + _ _ Insects - - + - + + - - Gastropodes ------Pelecypodes ------Polychaetes + + + + + + + + Mysids _ _ _ + _ _ _ _ Ostracods ______Isopodes _ _ _ + _ _ _ _ 3.13.5 Interpretation on Ecology and Biodiversity Studied area is enriching with floral diversity because the soil of the studied locations are fertile and they support to the growth of flora. Dense flora supports to wild life. Total 18 species of shrubs belong to 13 families, total 29 species of trees belong to 15 families, total 16 species of herbs belong to 12 families have been identified during the survey. Dominant trees of the studied region are Krishna siris, Kala siris, Kher and Shisham. Among the enumerated flora in the study area, none of them were assigned any threat category by RED data book of Indian Plants. No faunal species was cited in the study region comes under the category of threatened. Shikari devi wild life sanctuary, Nargu and Bandli wild life sanctuary are within 10 km arial

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 98 distance from the well. Shannon index for aquatic biodiversity have been found more than 3 which indicate towards the clean water (uncontaminated in surface water bodies). 3.14 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT In order to assess and evaluate the likely impacts arising out of any new or existing projects in socio-economic environment, it is necessary to gauge the apprehension of the people in the surrounding areas. Socio- economic survey serves as an effective tool for fulfilling this requirement. The study of socio-economic component of environment incorporates various facets, viz. demographic structure, availability of basic amenities such as housing, education, health and medical services, occupation, water supply, sanitation, communication and power supply in the region as well as features such as places of tourist attraction and monuments of archaeological importance. The study of these parameters helps in identifying predicting and evaluating the likely impacts due to project activity in the surrounding region. The study area for the project has been considered peripheral from Mandi district of Himachal Pradesh state from the project boundary. Thirty villages and one town are falling from Mandi tehsil and district in study area. Total 30 villages and 01 town are falling from Mandi tehsil & district in the study area.

3.14.1 Socio-Economic Survey Methodology Socio-economic survey tools provide a means of improving understanding of local resource management systems, resource use and the relative importance of resources for households and villages. They can also be used to elicit insights on interaction with government decision-making systems, community perceptions of trends and priority issues, and community-based institutions and their role in the sustainable use and conservation of natural resources. Data Collection: Following steps were considered for the collection of primary data: 1. Identification of Study Area: The study area was identified before carrying out the survey. All the related information which could affect the prosperity, development & literacy were also collected. 2. Site Visit: Location wise survey plan & format for data collection were prepared for site visit. Data regarding Land Characteristics, Population, Literacy, Workers and Amenities were collected during the survey. 3. Analysis of Data: The data collected by primary survey were verified with secondary data collected from sources like Government Agencies, Census data for the year 2011, and statistical abstracts.

SE Survey – Radu village SE Survey –Darbatthu Village

Figure 3.28 Photograph of Socio Economic Survey

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 99 3.14.2 Demography Almost all villages in the study area are experiencing a rapid growth of population due to industrialization. The total population of study region is summarized in Table 3.39. 3.14.3 Population Density Population density in the study area varies from 4–2864 person/sq. km. Details of the same are tabulated in Table 3.39. Table 3.39 Details of Population in Study Area No. of Total Total No. Total No. Total area Population density Villages Household Population (ST) (SC) (Sq.km) (Person/sq.km) Tawan (231) 151 790 0 504 0.68 1162 Darbathu 0 790 205 961 0.90 (235) 1068 Baggi (281) 236 1109 13 549 0.90 1232 Anu (248) 125 608 0 256 1.21 502 Khiuri Dom 0 147 109 513 1.48 (285) 347 D.P.F. 0 0 Tarapur 2 11 2.93 (301) 4 Ratti (193) 303 1406 1 405 1.34 1049 Ner (222) 666 3053 1 978 1.84 1659 Bhangrotu 0 816 360 1690 0.59 (221) 2864 Majhethal 0 783 372 1599 1.26 (226) 1269 Kasarla (199) 192 917 0 487 1.32 695 Galma (189) 56 233 0 103 0.41 568 Balt (182) 165 793 1 265 0.81 979 Guttkar (208) 168 765 31 392 1.19 643 Dharwahan 0 39 73 316 1.03 (116) 307 Althu (112) 199 900 0 376 1.75 514 D.P.F. Baglu 0 0 5 13 2.26 (93) 6 Behna (210) 464 2156 98 1248 3.33 647 Dhar (428) 61 325 0 52 3.07 106 Dhamyana 1 1 57 251 1.01 (336) 249 Chhanwari 0 194 100 486 1.41 (347) 345 Chadyara 0 624 245 995 0.94 (246) 1059 Sarai (107) 50 227 0 10 1.12 203 Dusra Khabu 0 80 150 652 2.22 (97) 294 Ghoar (121) 84 422 0 0 1.39 304 Chauki 0 165 Chandrahan 176 852 2.27 (98) 375 Shila Kippar 0 83 100 461 0.96 (341) 480 Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 100 Tandoo (624) 100 412 0 219 1.14 361 Jajraut (183) 178 819 0 335 1.05 780 Khudi (156) 87 449 0 42 1.38 325 Mandi (M Cl) 6627 26422 127 5057 10.0 2642 Total 11,866 50,606 273 15,000 53.19 23,048 3.14.4 Sex Ratio The sex ratio i.e. the number of females per 1000 males is in range of 571 - 2250 with lowest in D.P.F. Tarapur and highest in D.P.F. Baglu. The Sex ratio i.e. the number of females per 1000 males indirectly reveals certain sociological aspect in relation to female births, infant mortality among female children. Details of the same are tabulated in Table 3.40. Table 3.40 Details of Sex Ratio in Study Area

Male Female Total Sex Ratio Zone of Study Population Population Population (Female to 1000 Male) Tawan (231) 417 373 790 894 Darbathu (235) 469 492 961 1049 Baggi (281) 572 537 1109 939 Anu (248) 318 290 608 912 Khiuri Dom (285) 260 253 513 973 D.P.F. Tarapur (301) 7 4 11 571 Ratti (193) 720 686 1406 953 Ner (222) 1655 1398 3053 845 Bhangrotu (221) 879 811 1690 923 Majhethal (226) 827 772 1599 933 Kasarla (199) 459 458 917 998 Galma (189) 119 114 233 958 Balt (182) 393 400 793 1018 Guttkar (208) 374 391 765 1045 Dharwahan (116) 163 153 316 939 Althu (112) 447 453 900 1013 D.P.F. Baglu (93) 4 9 13 2250 Behna (210) 1086 1070 2156 985 Dhar (428) 167 158 325 946 Dhamyana (336) 132 119 251 902 Chhanwari (347) 249 237 486 952 Chadyara (246) 519 476 995 917 Sarai (107) 111 116 227 1045 Dusra Khabu (97) 319 333 652 1044 Ghoar (121) 208 214 422 1029 Chauki Chandrahan (98) 420 432 852 1029 Shila Kippar (341) 223 238 461 1067 Tandoo (624) 213 199 412 934 Jajraut (183) 403 416 819 1032 Khudi (156) 220 229 449 1041 Mandi (M Cl) 13341 13081 26422 981 Total 25,694 24,912 50,606 - 3.14.5 Literacy Rate The literacy and Iliteracy level of the study area is summarized in Table 3.40 and Literacy rate graphically presented in figure 3.29.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 101

Table 3.41 Details of Literacy Rate in Study Area Literate Iliterate Literacy (%) Iliterate (%) Villages Male Female Total Male Female Total Male Female Total Male Female Total Tawan (231) 325 266 591 92 107 199 77.94 71.31 74.81 22.06 28.69 25.19 Darbathu (235) 375 319 694 94 173 267 79.96 64.84 72.22 20.04 35.16 27.78 Baggi (281) 471 404 875 101 133 234 82.34 75.23 78.90 17.66 24.77 21.10 Anu (248) 241 194 435 77 96 173 75.79 66.90 71.55 24.21 33.10 28.45 Khiuri Dom (285) 204 180 384 56 73 129 78.46 71.15 74.85 21.54 28.85 25.15 D.P.F. Tarapur (301) 7 3 10 0 1 1 100.00 75.00 90.91 0.00 25.00 9.09 Ratti (193) 582 516 1098 138 170 308 80.83 75.22 78.09 19.17 24.78 21.91 Ner (222) 1380 1105 2485 275 293 568 83.38 79.04 81.40 16.62 20.96 18.60 Bhangrotu (221) 736 610 1346 143 201 344 83.73 75.22 79.64 16.27 24.78 20.36 Majhethal (226) 686 565 1251 141 207 348 82.95 73.19 78.24 17.05 26.81 21.76 Kasarla (199) 377 323 700 82 135 217 82.14 70.52 76.34 17.86 29.48 23.66 Galma (189) 93 71 164 26 43 69 78.15 62.28 70.39 21.85 37.72 29.61 Balt (182) 308 267 575 85 133 218 78.37 66.75 72.51 21.63 33.25 27.49 Guttkar (208) 298 279 577 76 112 188 79.68 71.36 75.42 20.32 28.64 24.58 Dharwahan (116) 131 112 243 32 41 73 80.37 73.20 76.90 19.63 26.80 23.10 Althu (112) 347 317 664 100 136 236 77.63 69.98 73.78 22.37 30.02 26.22 D.P.F. Baglu (93) 2 4 6 2 5 7 50.00 44.44 46.15 50.00 55.56 53.85 Behna (210) 874 751 1625 212 319 531 80.48 70.19 75.37 19.52 29.81 24.63 Dhar (428) 108 85 193 59 73 132 64.67 53.80 59.38 35.33 46.20 40.62 Dhamyana (336) 102 89 191 30 30 60 77.27 74.79 76.10 22.73 25.21 23.90 Chhanwari (347) 206 174 380 43 63 106 82.73 73.42 78.19 17.27 26.58 21.81 Chadyara (246) 418 352 770 101 124 225 80.54 73.95 77.39 19.46 26.05 22.61 Sarai (107) 91 79 170 20 37 57 81.98 68.10 74.89 18.02 31.90 25.11 Dusra Khabu (97) 248 219 467 71 114 185 77.74 65.77 71.63 22.26 34.23 28.37 Ghoar (121) 166 134 300 42 80 122 79.81 62.62 71.09 20.19 37.38 28.91

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 102 Chauki Chandrahan (98) 351 297 648 69 135 204 83.57 68.75 76.06 16.43 31.25 23.94 Shila Kippar (341) 189 169 358 34 69 103 84.75 71.01 77.66 15.25 28.99 22.34 Tandoo (624) 170 113 283 43 86 129 79.81 56.78 68.69 20.19 43.22 31.31 Jajraut (183) 329 298 627 74 118 192 81.64 71.63 76.56 18.36 28.37 23.44 Khudi (156) 180 172 352 40 57 97 81.82 75.11 78.40 18.18 24.89 21.60 Mandi (M Cl) 11603 11068 22671 1738 2013 3751 86.97 84.61 85.80 13.03 15.39 14.20 Total 21,598 19,535 41,133 4096 5377 9473 ------

120 100 80 60

40 20 0 % Literacy %

Villages

Literacy (%) Male Literacy (%) Female Literacy (%) Total

Figure 3.30 Graph of Literacy Rate

Among all the villages of study area D.P.F. Tarapur is having high literacy rate i.e. 90.91 %. There is not much difference between female literacy rate and male literacy rate in the study region.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 103

3.14.6 Economic Aspects Economic aspects of the study area include the economic structure of the people of the surrounding area. It can be predicted that economic structure of the study area will be improved with time, because it consists large industrial estate and hence there are more employment opportunities. According to working status, whole population of the study area is divided into

 Marginal workers

 Non workers  Main workers Census department has defined 10 categories of workers in Main workers. It consists of cultivators, agricultural, labourer those engaged in livestock, forestry, fishing, mining and quarrying, manufacturing, processing and repairs in household industries and other services. Workers engaged in the work for a period less than 6 month during the reference year falls under marginal workers. Workers engaged in unpaid household duties e.g. students, retired person, dependents etc. falls under non-workers. Detail of occupational structure is shown in Table 3.42. Table 3.42 Details of Occupational Structure Total Workers Zone of Study Non-Workers (%) Main Workers (%) Marginal Workers (%) Tawan (231) 47.34 39.37 13.29 Darbathu (235) 41.73 57.23 1.04 Baggi (281) 64.65 26.33 9.02 Anu (248) 46.22 52.96 0.82 Khiuri Dom (285) 39.38 30.99 29.63 D.P.F. Tarapur (301) 54.55 27.27 18.18 Ratti (193) 40.47 37.34 22.19 Ner (222) 46.94 38.00 15.07 Bhangrotu (221) 38.46 39.47 22.07 Majhethal (226) 57.72 30.96 11.32 Kasarla (199) 42.75 17.12 40.13 Galma (189) 39.06 25.75 35.19 Balt (182) 9.58 0.25 90.16 Guttkar (208) 45.10 50.72 4.18 Dharwahan (116) 40.51 51.58 7.91 Althu (112) 40.89 5.22 53.89 D.P.F. Baglu (93) 69.23 7.69 23.08 Behna (210) 40.54 51.16 8.30 Dhar (428) 41.85 23.69 34.46 Dhamyana (336) 45.02 1.20 53.78 Chhanwari (347) 16.46 12.14 71.40 Chadyara (246) 52.56 22.91 24.52 Sarai (107) 22.47 16.74 60.79 Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 104

Dusra Khabu (97) 44.33 7.21 48.47 Ghoar (121) 64.69 25.36 9.95 Chauki Chandrahan (98) 69.48 18.54 11.97 Shila Kippar (341) 44.03 24.30 31.67 Tandoo (624) 36.41 21.60 41.99 Jajraut (183) 27.47 7.20 65.32 Khudi (156) 51.45 33.41 15.14 Mandi (M Cl) 63.60 35.19 1.20 Darbathu have significant employment i.e. 57.23% as main workers, while the lowest employment as main workers in Balt i.e. 0.25%. Almost all the villages have more than 50 % people as non-workers. Rapid industrialization in the last two decades has resulted in significant changes in the occupational profile of the local people. There is an overall trend among the youth to opt for employment in service sector and move away from traditional occupation.

100 90 80 70 60 50

40 30 20 10 0 % of Workers of%

Villages Non Workers (%) Total Workers Main Workers(%) Total Workers Marginal Workers (%)

Figure 3.31 Occupational Structure of Study Area 3.14.7 Infrastructures Resource base The infrastructure resources base of the eleven study areas with reference to education, medical facility, water supply, post and telegraph, transportation, communication facility, power supply and existence of nearest town etc. according to the Village Directory Census CD 2011 of HP State. The significant features of these important parameters for each study area are discussed as follows: Education As per 2011 village directory record, almost all villages having education facility in the form of primary schools, and middle school are as follows.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 105

Govt Private Privat Govt Private Govt Govt Private Pre - Pre - e Govt Private Primar Primar Middl Senior Senior Primar Primar Middl Secondar Secondar y y e Secondar Secondar y y e y School y School School School School y School y School School School School 5 7 27 4 14 8 7 5 4 4 Medical/Primary Health Care Medical facilities in terms of community health workers are available in some of the villages. Primary health center and primary health sub centers are available in few villages.

Primary Maternity And Community Health Primary Veterinary Health Sub Child Welfare Dispensary Centre Health Centre Hospital Centre Centre 1 1 4 2 7 3 Drinking Water The water supply in the region is through dug wells, hand pumps, taps and other allied sources

Tap Tap Water Covered Uncovered Hand Tube Spring River/C Tank/Pond/La Water- Untreated Well Well Pump Wells/Borehole anal ke Treated 30 3 7 8 16 4 0 3 2 Drainage and Sanitation Facilities Drainage and sanitation facilities were not adequate in the study area. Mostly Open drainage, and open kuccha drainage observed in the village. Closed Drainage Open Drainage No Drainage Open Kuccha Drainage 2 14 13 17 Communication Communication facility is fairly good in this region. Near about 50% villages having telephone connectivity and having post office.

Post Office Sub Post Office Post And Telegraph Telephone (landlines) Public Call Office Office /Mobile (PCO) 10 5 2 29 14 Transportation A well planned and efficient network of transport is an essential component for a developing country. In the absence of efficient network of transport, a State’s economy would suffer from major grid lock in terms of overall growth potential of that area. In village public bus facility was availed and other facilities were private bus. Public Bus Private Bus Auto/Modified Autos Taxi Vans Tractors Service Service 26 25 11 14 15 19

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 106

Road Approach Facilities Road condition facility was found in village from following.

Black Topped Gravel (kuchha) Water Bounded All Weather Road Footpath (pucca) Road Roads Macadam 19 25 17 21 30 Bank Facilities Banking and credit society facility was found in village. Self help group activities were performed by the women groups Agricultural Credit Self - Help ATM Commercial Bank Cooperative Bank Societies Group (SHG) 3 3 2 2 13 Power Supply Almost all villages are electrified in the region and electricity is available for both domestic and agriculture. Power Supply For Power Supply For Power Supply For Commercial Power Supply For Domestic Use Agriculture Use Use All Users 30 30 30 30 Source: DCHB 2011, HP State 3.14.8 Tourism, Heritage and Cultural Resources Mandi is situated on the banks of the river Beas. It has a rich culture and history represented by its temples, which are a major tourists draw. Mandi is an important trading centre situated on the Pathankot-Kullu road. The town is also the gateway to Himachal's most famous valleys - Kullu, Manali, Lahaul and Spiti. Mandi is also on the Kullu-Shimla road via Bilaspur. Mandi is known as Kashi of Himachal Pradesh because of its Shiva temples. There are about 81 old temples of Lord Shiva. Rewalsar is a sacred place of Hindus, Sikhs and Buddhists, Other places in this circuit are Jogindernagar, Parashar, Janjehli, Shikari Devi, Kamrunag, Barot, Sundernagar etc. Himachal Darshan Photo Gallery is situated at about 4 km from Mandi near Sauli Khad on the Chandigarh- Manali National highway. This art gallery contains a beautiful collection of photographs of exotic locations of the entire state and reflects the social & cultural heritage of the people of Himachal Pradesh. District Library is located in Emerson House(District Court .Mandi is also famous for the International Mandi Shivaratri Fair, a fair held for seven days in the month of March every year. The celebration of Shivratri of Mandi is said to have started in the year 1526 to commemorate the foundation of present-day Mandi. Before this, the capital of Mandi was on the right bank of the river Beas, which is now known as Old Mandi (Purani Mandi). Mandi hosts a half marathon every year. Once when the tenth guru of the Sikhs was on a visit to Mandi, the king of Mandi invited him to stay at the royal palace. The guru accepted the invitation to stay in Mandi but not with the king. He put up outside the town in a secluded place, which had once been the hermitage of a rishi (Indian sage). The guru was touched by the king’s devotion and prophesized that Mandi would ever remain safe and if any enemy tries to harm it, bolts from heaven would crush the invader. He considered Mandi the safest place on the planet. Tample in the Mandi district are Birsila Smarak, Trilokinath, Panchvaktra temple, Ardhnarishwar temple.

Source: Tourisam Resources of Himachal Pradesh

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 107

3.14.9 Stakeholder Consultation After the discussion with the objective of identifying key stakeholder groups; studying their profile, characteristics and the nature of their stakes; gauging their influence on the project; and understanding the specific issues, concerns as well as expectations of each group from the project. Folowing key issues were noted and they are described as under.

Key Issue

• Primary Health center is available in one village and sub primary health centre is 4 out of 30 villages its shows that there is need to open more health centre, According to local villagers presence of doctors are not available on a regular basis at the centre.

• Unemployment is an emerging reason among the youths of the villages, which has been discussed during a consultation with a group of young people.

• The facilities from governmental scheme are not thoroughly distributed, to all the villagers.

 In majority of cases the quality of land was found to be good, yet in the absence of large holding and proper water management system it did not yield the expected production and income to the farmers.

 Various production problems faced by the sample farmers/growers may arise from the supply side of inputs or the availability of resources, which affect the yield of the produce and ultimately income of the farmers.

3.14.10 Interpretation of Socio Economic Data During the primary survey it was observed that almost pakka road facility is available in all villages within 10 km radius. Literacy rate of the study region is from 46.15% to 90.91%. On the basis of survey for literacy rate data it is interpreted that there is need to promote educate more and more people. Almost all the villages have more than 50 % people as non-workers. It indicates that the problem of unemployment can be solved by providing proper training and education. There is also need to establish more industries so that maximum number of employment can be generated. Basic amenities like Education facilities Health care facilities, water supply, electric power supply, mode of transportation etc. are available in all villages.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 108

CHAPTER 4 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES This chapter presents the identified environmental impacts due to the proposed project and outlines alternatives any mitigation measures for minimizing adverse impacts. 4.1 IMPACT ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY An environmental impact identification matrix has been developed to present an overview of possible interactions between project aspects and components of the environment which may get affected. The matrix considers physical, biological and socio-economic components of the environment on one axis (X axis) and activities of the proposed drilling project on the other side (Y axis). Aspects and impacts on environmental components which would be relevant to the different phases of the project e.g. pre-drilling activities, drilling, early production and decommissioning have been addressed in the matrix. Environmental and socio-economic components were identified based on reviewing of applicable legislations project specific features and baseline environment, site reconnaissance visits, discussions with stakeholders.

Potential environmental impacts that may result from any of the identified project activity has been identified in a matrix based on activity-component interaction and is presented in Table 4.3. The impact which has been identified in the matrix has been assessed for its significance based on significance criteria delineated in Section 4.1.1 and 4.1.2. 4.2 IMPACT CRITERIA AND RANKING Once all project environmental aspects were comprehensively identified for the different activities of the project, the level of impact that may result from each of the activity-component interactions has been assessed based on subjective criteria. For this, three key elements have been taken into consideration based on standard environmental assessment methodologies:  Severity of Impact: Degree of damage that may be caused to the environmental components concerned;  Extent of Impact: Geographical spread of impact around project location and corridors of activities; and  Duration of Impact: Time for which impact lasts taking project life-cycle into account. These elements have been ranked in three levels viz. 1 (low), 2 (moderate) and 3 (high) based on the following criteria provided in Table 4.1 below: Table 4.1 Impact Prediction Criteria Impact S. No Category Description of category Adverse Beneficial 1. No impact - 0 0 2. No appreciable impact Short term reversible -1 1 3. Significant impact Long term reversible -2 2 4. Major impact Irreversible but of lesser extent -3 3 5. High impact Irreversible but of medium extent -4 4 6. Permanent impact Severe irreversible impact -5 5

S. Cumulative Meaning No. Score 1. +ve / -ve Beneficial impact / adverse impact 2. 0-150 No appreciable Beneficial impact / adverse impact Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 109

3. 151-300 Appreciable but reversible adverse impact-mitigation measures are needed 301-450 Significant adverse impacts: most of the impacts are reversible. Mitigation measures 4. are crucial. 451-600 Major adverse impacts; most of the impacts are reversible. Alternative site selection 5. to be considered. 6. >600 Permanent irreversible impact; alternatives to the project need to be explored

4.3 IMPACT SIGNIFICANCE The significance of impact has been determined based on a multiplicative factor of three element rankings. The Table 4.2 (below) depicts impact significance in a scale of LOW-MEDIUM-HIGH and will be used for delineation of preventive actions, if any, and management plans for mitigation of impacts.

Impact significance has been determined considering measures which have been factored in the design and planning phase of the project. Legal issues have been taken into account, wherever appropriate in the criterion sets, to aid in Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) effort to comply with all relevant legislation and project HSE requirements. Additionally, the results of quantitative impact prediction exercise, wherever undertaken, have also been fed into the process.

Impact

Very low Low Medium High Very High

1 2 3 4 5

Very High 5 5 10 15 20 25 High 4 4 8 12 16 20 ability Medium 3 3 6 9 12 15 Prob Low 2 2 4 6 8 10 Very Low 1 1 2 3 4 5 Figure 4.1: Impact Quantification Chart

To assist in determining and presenting significance of an impact, an impact evaluation matrix (Table 4.3) has been developed based on the one developed for the impact identification exercise. In addition to ranked weights, significance of impacts has been depicted using colour codes for easy understanding. In case an environmental component is impacted by more than one project activity or the activity would impact a sensitive receptor e.g. settlement, school, hospitals, forest etc. a high significance ranking of “>12” has been considered. A second evaluation matrix presents significance of impacts after considering that proposed mitigation measures will be implemented The impacts on each of the environmental components and its significance during the different stages of the project have been discussed in detail in the following section. This is followed by a point wise outline of mitigation measures recommended.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 110

Table 4.2 Impact Identification Matrix

Environmental Attributes

Activities Air Soil Socio Noise LU/LC Hydro Water Risk & Risk geology Geology Economic Hazardous Biodiversity Ecology and A. Pre-drilling Activities Well Site Preparation and approach road ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ - - ✔ ✔ development Transportation of drilling Rig, Materials ✔ - ✔ ✔ - - - ✔ ✔ ✔ and ancillaries B. Exploratory Well Drilling and Testing Operation of DG sets ✔ - ✔ ✔ ------and machineries Casing and cementing of - ✔ ✔ ✔ - ✔ - - - - exploratory well Preparation of drilling fluid (Mud) - ✔ ✔ - - ✔ ✔ ✔ - and drill cutting disposal Exploratory well ✔ ✔ - ✔ ✔ ✔ - ✔ ✔ ✔ drilling Well testing & Flaring ✔ - ✔ - - - - ✔ ✔ ✔ C. Early Production Flaring of Gas ✔ - - ✔ - - - - ✔ - DG/GEG Set of ✔ - - ✔ ------Emission Produced Water - ✔ ✔ ------D. Decommissioning and Reinstatement Dismantling of rig & associated - - - ✔ ------machineries Transportation of ✔ - - ✔ - - - - ✔ - drilling facilities

4.4 IMPACT ASSESSMENT This section discusses the impacts of the project activities on the environmental receptors that stand to get affected adversely by the project. It discusses probable impacts during various phases of the project lifecycle on the environmental and socio-economic components. Rankings for every activity – component interaction is based on the criterion set earlier and resulting environmental significance with necessary justification that has been recorded below for every set of impacts and the same has been represented in evaluation matrices. In broader context, it is however important to remember that operations related to drilling, testing and completion activities also include positive socio-economic impacts in terms of increase in local business opportunities and on a larger perspective, by providing potential energy security at a national level.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 111 Table 4.3: Environmental Impact Assessment Matrix without Mitigation Measures

Environmental Attributes

Activities Total

Air Soil Risk Socio Noise LU/LC Hydro Water geology Geology Economic Hazardous Biodiversity Ecology and A. Pre-drilling Activities Well Site Preparation and approach road -9 -6 -4 -9 -6 -4 - - -6 -4 -48 development Transportation of drilling Rig, Materials -8 - -4 -8 - - - -6 -4 -4 -34 and ancillaries B. Exploratory Well Drilling and Testing Operation of DG sets -6 - -4 -6 ------16 and machineries Casing and cementing - -9 -6 -8 - -4 - - - - -27 of exploratory well Preparation of drilling fluid (Mud) and drill - -12 -9 - - -4 -12 -4 - -41 cutting disposal Exploratory well -16 -9 - -12 -9 -4 - -12 -6 -4 -72 drilling Well testing & Flaring -9 - -6 - - - - -12 -6 -4 -37 C. Early Production Flaring of Gas -9 - - -8 - - - - -6 - -23 DG/GEG Set of -9 - - -6 ------Emission -15 Produced Water - -9 -6 ------15 D. Decommissioning and Reinstatement Dismantling of rig & associated - - - -9 ------9 machineries Transportation of -6 - - -6 - - - - -4 - -16 drilling facilities Total -72 -45 -39 -72 -15 -16 0 -42 -36 -16 -353 Total Cumulative Score for various Environmental Parameters without mitigation measures is -353 i.e. Significant adverse impacts: most of the impacts are reversible. Mitigation measures are crucial.

4.5 POTENTIAL IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON AIR QUALITY Source of Pollution: The probable sources of impact on ambient air quality during different phase of the project are listed below.  Pre-drilling phase, ─ Site development; ─ Operation of vehicles and construction machinery; ─ Transportation, storage, handling of construction material, disposal of construction waste; ─ Operation of DG sets.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 112  Drilling phase: ─ Operation of DG sets; ─ Emissions from flare stack; ─ Transport of drilling chemical and manpower etc.  Operation of early Production facilities ─ Emission from DG sets/Gas Engine generator ─ Emission from flare stacks  De-commissioning phase: ─ Decommissioning of rig and associated facilities; ─ Transport of de-mobilized rigs and machineries. ─ Embedded Control Measures: Project embedded control measures are as follows:  Vehicle, equipment and machinery used for drilling would conform to applicable emission norms;  Drilling chemical and materials would be stored properly to prevent fugitive emissions;  DG set stacks would have adequate height, as per statutory requirements, to be able to adequately disperse exhaust gases; and  Flare stacks of adequate height would be provided. Assessment of Impact: The potential impact due to above mentioned activities has been discussed in following section. Fugitive emission: Fugitive dust emissions due to the proposed project will be principally associated with emissions of dust during the site preparation. The dust generated would be primarily from the handling and transportation of fill material and re-entrainment of dust during movement of the vehicles on unpaved roads. The generation of such fugitive dust is likely to be governed by micro-meteorological conditions (wind speed and direction). Effects of dust emissions are heightened by dry weather and high wind speeds and effectively reduced to zero when soils and/or ambient conditions are wet. However, dust generated from the site development and construction activity will generally settle down on the adjacent areas within a short period due to its larger particle size. Emissions from Vehicles/Equipment: The pre-drilling, drilling and decommissioning operations would involve movement of diesel operated vehicles and operation of machineries and equipment. Heavy vehicles will be particularly intense during site preparation and decommissioning phases. Gaseous pollutants such as NOx, SO2 and CO are likely to be emitted from operation of vehicles and machineries. Impacts from Operation of DG sets, GEG and Flaring: The proposed project will involve the operation of two diesel driven 350KVA and 1000 KVA generators for drilling of each exploratory wells. Combustion of fuel in a DG sets typically happens at high temperatures resulting in generation of considerable amounts of NO2. The SO2 concentration in emissions is dependent on the Sulphur content in fuel burnt and particulate matter consisting of unburnt carbon particles. The emissions from the DG set will be discharged into the atmosphere through a stack. Flaring of gases primarily during the drilling testing phase will contribute to additional air pollution. Flaring involves high temperature oxidation process to burn combustible gases that may be generated from the proposed well sites. Elevated flaring/Ground flaring will be done during operation of QPU. NOx emission is associated with the flaring activity.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 113 In order to predict the Ground Level Concentrations (GLCs) at various distances from the source, of the above mentioned pollutants, an air modelling exercise has been undertaken and is discussed in the impact prediction section below. 4.5.1 Air Quality Modelling The flue gas stack is considered as a point source to predict the impact on ambient air quality during the operational phase. The prediction has been done by using AERMOD View Gausian Plume Dispersion model. Methodology

The methodology for Air Quality Modeling using AERMOD View Gausian Plume Dispersion model is given in Figure below:

Figure 4.2: Methodology for AQM

Meteorological Parameters Surface meteorological data at project site was collected for March 2019 –June 2019. The hourly meteorological data considered during this period were:

 Wind Speed & Direction;  Ambient atmospheric temperature;

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 114  Cloud cover;  Relative humidity. Following parameters were considered for dispersion modeling – Point Source  Quantity of fuel;  Emission rate of pollutants;  Stack: o Internal diameter at top; and height from ground level; o Exit gas velocity; o Exit gas temperature.

Source of Emission

Point Source  Emission of PM, SO2, NOx from the stack attached to DG Sets & PM, SO2, NOx, HC from the Gas (NG) flare during exploration & appraisal well testing.  Emission of PM, SO2, NOx, HC from QPU’s Flare stack during early production stage.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 115 Stack Gas Exit Fuel PM NOx HC Stac Height Diameter Permissible SO Emitted Scenario Attached Temperature Fuel Consumption Parameters 2 Emitted Emitted Emitted k No. (m) (m) Limit (gm/sec) to (oK) (LPD) (gm/sec) (gm/sec) (gm/sec) DG Set 1 Camp Site 7 0.2 333 HSD 400 0.02 0.0004 0.02 - (350 KVA) DG set for Scenario – Drilling 2 1 Emission 30 0.30 554 HSD 5000 0.24 0.005 0.14 - Site (1000 during KVA) exploratio Gas (NG) 2.03 m n and Flare stack dia & 3 appraisal 30 1000 - - 0.003 0.01 0.002 0.003 Emissions: 0.078 flare well Elevated* dia testing Gas (NG) 2.03 m PM 150 mg/Nm3 Flare stack dia & SO2 100 ppm 4 GL 1000 - - 0.003 0.01 0.002 0.003 Emissions : 0.078 flare NOx 50 ppm Ground* dia HC 15 mg/Nm3 QPU Flare 2.03 m stack stack dia & 5 30 1000 - - 0.02 0.04 0.01 0.002 during 0.078 flare Scenario – production dia 2 Emission GEG (1 6 during 30 0.30 554 HSD 5000 0.24 0.005 0.14 - MW) early DG Set/ ** production (500 KVA) stage 7 for 10 0.2 528 HSD 800 0.06 0.0013 0.03 - emergenc y *flaring of gases primarily during the testing phase (24-48 hrs per well) which is insignificant, hence it is not considered for Air Quality Modeling. ** DG set emissions are not considered (in early production stage ) for modelling purpose, as it is on standby and will operate only when in case of power failure.

Assumptions The dispersion modeling assumptions considered are as follows:

 The emission rate for PM & SO2 was calculated based on the specification of HSD (Ash content 0.01 % and Sulphur content 0.25 %) and the NOx & HC was calculated based on flue gas emission standards.  The terrain of the study area was considered as flat.  The mathematical equations used for the dispersion modeling assumes that the earth surface acts as a perfect reflector of plume and physic-chemical processes such as dry and wet deposition and chemical transformation of pollutants are negligible. Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 116 Isopleths & Results The maximum of 24 hourly highest GLC’s of PM, SO2, NOx & HC due to flue gas emission through the stacks attached to DG sets & Flare (Point source) is summarised in Table 4.6 below: Table 4.4: Summary of Point Source Modeling Maximum of 24 hourly Distance Well No. Pollutant highest Concentration Direction (m) (µg/m3) Scenario-1 Emission during exploration & Appraisal well testing PM 0.39 10 N

1 SO2 22.8 10 WSW NOx 14.9 10 WSW PM 0.33 50 ENE

2 SO2 15.9 50 ENE NOx 10.1 10 E PM 0.32 100 NW

3 SO2 15.3 10 W NOx 8.86 10 WNW PM 0.25 50 SE

4 SO2 12.3 35 SE NOx 9.1 10 NNW PM 0.31 100 N

5 SO2 15.1 50 N NOx 9.14 10 N PM 0.43 100 NW

6 SO2 20.8 17 NW NOx 13.7 15 NNW PM 0.33 50 WSW

7 SO2 15.9 50 SW NOx 9.6 10 SW Scenario-2 Emission during Production PM 0.413 50 S SO 0.825 50 S 1 2 NOx 0.206 50 S HC 0.0413 50 S PM 0.413 50 S SO 0.826 50 S 2 2 NOx 0.206 50 S HC 0.0413 50 S PM 0.413 50 S SO 0.826 50 S 3 2 NOx 0.206 50 S HC 0.0413 50 S PM 0.413 50 S SO 0.826 50 S 4 2 NOx 0.206 50 S HC 0.0413 50 S 5 PM 0.413 50 S

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 117

Maximum of 24 hourly Distance Well No. Pollutant highest Concentration Direction (m) (µg/m3) Scenario-1 Emission during exploration & Appraisal well testing

SO2 0.826 50 S NOx 0.206 50 S HC 0.0413 50 S PM 0.413 50 S SO 0.826 50 S 6 2 NOx 0.206 50 S HC 0.0413 50 S PM 0.413 50 S SO 0.825 50 S 7 2 NOx 0.206 50 S HC 0.0413 50 S

The isopleth of PM, SO2 & NOx is given as follow: Scenario – 1 : Emission during exploration & appraisal well testing

Isopleth for PM emitted from flue gas stacks – Well 1

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 118

Isopleth for SO2 emitted from flue gas stacks – Well 1

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 119

Isopleth for NOx emitted from flue gas stacks – Well 1

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 120

Scenario – 2 : Emission during early production stage

Isopleth for PM emitted from flare stack

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 121

Isopleth for SO2 emitted from flare stack

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 122

Isopleth for NOx emitted from flare stack

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 123

Isopleth for HC emitted from flare stack

The windrose diagram is given as Figure:3.5. Prediction of Incremental GLC of Pollutants on Air Environment Results

The incremental increase in GLC of PM10, SO2 & NOx due to flue gas emission (Point Source) presented in Table 4.7 below: Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 124

Table 4.5: 24 hourly maximum incremental increase in GLC

98th GLC GLC GLC GLC GLC GLC AAQ GLC Percentile (µg/m3) (µg/m3) (µg/m3) (µg/m3) (µg/m3) (µg/m3) Total Location (µg/m3) NAAQS S.No Baseline Due to Due to Due to Due to Due to Due to Predictive Well No. Pollutant Due to Concentration . Concentrati Emission Emission Emission Emission Emission Emission GLC (Name of Emission Limit (µg/m3)[1] on from from from from from from (µg/m3) Village) from Well-1 (µg/m3) Well-2 Well-3 Well-4 Well-5 Well-6 Well-7 C12 = C4+C5+C6+ C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C13 C7+C8+C9+ C10+C11 Scenario – 1 : Emissoin during Drilling Activities PM 55.6 0.06 0.0 0.01 – 0.01 0.01 0.0 55.69 100 Radu 10 1 SO 12.1 2.0 0.2 0.4 – 0.6 0.4 0.3 16.00 80 village 2 NOX 14.6 1.6 0.09 0.2 – 0.4 0.19 0.2 17.28 80 PM 74.4 0.00 0.26 – 0.02 0.01 0.0 – 74.69 100 Bhadyal 10 2 SO 14.2 0.1 12.8 – 1.0 0.4 0.2 – 28.70 80 village 2 NOX 18.8 0.0 9.94 – 0.5 0.2 0.02 – 29.46 80 PM 60.3 0.2 – 0.04 – – 0.0 0.01 60.55 100 Jaroli 10 3 village SO2 16.2 0.8 – 2.0 – – 0.2 0.6 19.80 80 NOX 22.8 0.4 – 1.9 – – 0.14 0.3 25.54 80 PM 64.1 – 0.01 – 0.02 0.0 – – 64.13 100 Baloh 10 4 village SO2 13.6 – 0.4 – 0.9 0.0 – – 14.90 80 NOX 16.5 – 0.23 – 0.9 0.0 – – 17.63 80 PM10 62.1 0.01 0.00 – 0.00 0.02 0.01 0.0 62.14 100 Taroh 5 SO 13.8 0.2 0.2 – 0.1 0.9 0.3 0.0 15.50 80 village 2 NOX 18.3 0.1 0.09 – 0.1 0.6 0.2 0.0 19.39 80 PM10 63.2 0.01 0.01 0.0 – 0.01 0.15 0.0 63.38 100 6 Darbathu SO2 10.4 0.4 0.2 0.1 – 0.5 7.5 0.1 19.20 80 0.12 22.72 village NOX 17.7 0.2 0.0 – 0.2 4.3 0.2 80 PM 55.1 0.02 - 0.01 – 0.00 0.01 0.03 55.17 100 Sunder 10 7 Nagar SO2 13.2 0.6 - 0.7 – 0.1 0.4 2.0 17.00 80 NOX 15.3 0.4 - 0.4 – 0.1 0.21 1.6 18.01 80

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 125

PM10 73.4 – 0.01 – 0.01 0.0 – – 73.42 100

8 Mandi SO2 14.7 – 0.4 – 0.6 0.1 – – 15.8 80

NOX 22.4 – 0.20 – 0.4 0.0 – – 23.0 80 Scenario – 2 : Emission during Early production stage

PM10 55.6 0.273 0.0063 0.012 - 0.013 0.023 0.011 55.94 100

Radu SO2 12.1 0.05 0.01 0.02 - 0.03 0.05 0.02 12.28 80 1 village NO 14.6 0.014 0.01 0.006 - 0.006 0.012 0.0005 14.65 80 X HC BDL 0.003 0.001 0.001 - 0.001 0.002 0.0001 0.01 NS

PM10 74.4 0.0006 0.005 - 0.025 0.009 0.003 - 74.44 100

Bhadyal SO2 14.2 0.001 0.01 - 0.05 0.02 0.01 - 14.29 80 2 village NO 18.8 0.0003 0.003 - 0.013 0.004 0.02 - 18.84 80 X HC BDL 0.0001 0.001 - 0.003 0.001 0.0003 - 0.01 NS

PM10 60.3 0.0252 - 0.036 - - 0.004 0.011 60.38 100 Jaroli SO2 16.2 0.005 - 0.07 - - 0.01 0.02 16.31 80 3 village 0.018 - 22.84 NOX 22.8 0.012 - - 0.002 0.005 80 HC BDL 0.003 - 0.004 - - 0.0004 0.001 0.01 NS PM 64.1 - 0.012 - 0.022 0.002 - - 64.14 100 Baloh 10 - 0.01 13.63 village SO2 13.6 - 0.02 0.004 - - 80 4 NOX 16.5 - 0.006 - 0.002 0.01 - - 16.52 80

HC BDL - 0.001 - 0.002 0.0002 - - 0.00 NS

5 Taroh PM10 62.1 0.0029 0.0106 - 0.005 0.011 0.01 - 62.14 100 Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 126

village SO2 13.8 0.01 0.02 - 0.01 0.02 0.02 - 13.88 80

NOX 18.3 0.001 0.005 - 0.002 0.005 0.005 - 18.32 80 HC BDL 0.0003 0.001 - 0.0002 0.001 0.001 - 0.00 NS

PM10 63.2 0.0045 0.0137 0.003 - 0.020 - 0.010 63.25 100 Darbathu SO2 10.4 0.02 0.01 0.01 - 0.04 - 0.02 10.50 80 6 village 0.002 - 17.72 NOX 17.7 0.002 0.001 0.010 - 0.005 80 HC BDL 0.0005 0001 0.0004 - 0.002 - 0.001 0.00 NS

PM10 55.1 0.0071 - 0.010 - - 0.011 0.049 55.18 100 Sunder SO2 13.2 0.01 - 0.02 - - 0.02 0.10 13.35 80 7 Nagar 0.005 - - 15.34 NOX 15.3 0.004 - 0.006 0.02 80 HC BDL 0.001 - 0.001 - - 0.001 0.005 0.01 NS

PM10 73.4 - 0.0117 - 0.009 - - - 73.42 100

SO2 14.7 - 0.02 - 0.02 - - - 14.74 80 8 Mandi NOX 22.4 - 0.006 - 0.005 - - - 22.41 80 HC BDL - 0.001 - 0.001 - - - 0.00 NS

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 127

Conclusion

Scenario-1 Emission during Drilling activities

3  PM10 concentration is observed in the range of 55.17 – 74.69 µg/m , which is well within the standard limit. 3  SO2 concentration is observed in the range of 14.9 – 28.7 µg/m , which is well within the standard limit. 3  NOx concentration is observed in the range of 17.3 – 29.46 µg/m , which is well within the standard limit Scenario-2 Emission during Production

 PM10 concentration is observed in the range of 55.18 – 74.44 µg/m3, which is well within the standard limit.  SO2 concentration is observed in the range of 10.5 –16.31 µg/m3, which is well within the standard limit.  NOx concentration is observed in the range of 14.65 – 22.84 µg/m3, which is well within the standard limit.  HC concentration is observed in the range of 0.00 – 0.01 µg/m3.

Mitigation Measures: The proposed mitigation measures are as follows:

To minimize emission of fugitive dusts the following measures would be adopted:  Carry out regular water sprinkling at the site during dry season especially during the construction/site preparation and decommissioning activities;  During site preparation, the approach road will be kept clean, free from mud and slurry to prevent any entrainment of dust;  Proper handling of materials to ensure minimal emission of dust.

To minimise emission from the vehicles, equipment and machinery the following measures would be adopted:  Movement of construction/site preparation vehicles will be minimised and a limited speed will be enforced along the access and approach roads;  All diesel-powered equipment will be regularly maintained and idling time reduced to minimise emissions;  Low sulphur diesel will be used in diesel powered equipment.

To minimise the adverse impacts of early production facilities the following measures should be adopted:

 Proper engineering controls to ensure complete combustion of gas;  No cold venting will be resorted instead flaring will be done with combustion efficient elevated flare tip; and  Location of flare stacks to be chosen considering the sensitive receptors adjoining the site.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 128

4.6 POTENTIAL IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON NOISE QUALITY Potential impact on noise quality is anticipated from vehicular movement, operation of construction machinery, access road strengthening during well site preparation and operation of drilling rig and ancillary equipments during drilling operation and early production. Source of Impact: The potential impacts on noise quality may arise out of the following:  Pre-drilling phase, ─ Operation of machineries & equipment; ─ Vehicular traffic; ─ Operation of DG sets.

 Drilling phase: ─ Operation of DG sets and drilling rig ─ Operation of machineries & equipment; ─ Vehicular traffic.

 Early Production: ─ Flaring of the Gas ─ DG/GEC

 Decommissioning phase: ─ Demobilization activity ─ Vehicular traffic. Assessment of Noise Impacts due to Site Activities Driller rotors and the power generators and pumps would be the main sources of noise pollution during the drilling activity. Noise due to vehicular movement will be intermittent but will also add to the background noise levels. The well site during excavation phase of the site preparation where heavy earth moving machinery will be in operation, noise level of the vehicle should not be more than the 90 dB (A). Typically, the noise generating sources for the onshore drilling activity are provided below (in the immediate vicinity)  GEG/Diesel Generator: 75 dB(A)  Pumps at the Rig: 85 to 90 dB(A)  Mud pumps: 73.3-80.5 dB(A)  Control Room & Quarters: 50 to 60 dB(A)  Drilling: 85-90 dB(A)  Flaring: 86.0 dB(A) In order to predict ambient noise levels due to the proposed drilling of exploratory wells. The preparative modeling has been done. For computing the noise levels at various distances with respect to the proposed site, noise levels are predicted using an user friendly model the details of which is elaborated below. Mathematical Model for Sound Wave Propagation During Operation For an approximate estimation of dispersion of noise in the ambient from the source point, a standard mathematical model for sound wave propagation is used. The sound pressure level generated by noise sources decreases with increasing distance from the source due to wave divergence. An additional decrease in Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 129 sound pressure level with distance from the source is expected due to atmospheric effect or its interaction with objects in the transmission path. For hemispherical sound wave propagation through homogenous loss free medium, one can estimate noise levels at various locations, due to different sources using model based on first principles, as per the following equat Lp2 =Lp1-20log (r2 /r1) (1) Where Lp2 and Lp1 are Sound Pressure Levels (SPLs) at points located at distances r2 and r1 from the source. The combined effect of all the sources then can be determined at various locations by the following equation. Lp(total) = 10 x LOG10 (SUM*10^(L1/10) + 10^(L2/10) … (2) Where, Lp1, Lp2, Lp3 are noise pressure levels at a point due to different sources. Based on the above equations an user friendly model has been developed. The details of the model are as follows: Based on the above equations an user friendly model has been developed. The details of the model are as follows:  Noise levels can be predicted at any distance specified from the source;

 Model is designed to take topography or flat terrain;  Coordinates of the sources in meters;

 Maximum and Minimum levels are calculated by the model;  Output of the model in the form of isopleths; and

 Environmental attenuation factors and machine corrections have not been incorporated in the model but corrections are made for the measured Leq levels. Input for the Model The incremental increase in noise levels due to the operation phase of the exploratory drilling has been done. Noise levels are mainly generated from DG sets, air compressors, pumps and transformers. The noise sources have been defined with respect to center of drill site. The input data pertaining to corresponding noise level are tabulated below. Table 4.6 Input Data for Noise Modelling

Noise Levels db(A) at 3m distance Sr. No. Location from source 1 GEG/Diesel Generator ( 2 DG set) 75 2 Pumps at the Rig 85 3 Mud pumps 70 4 Control Room & Quarters 50 5 Drilling 85 6 Flaring 86 Source: https://www.cpcb.nic.in/displaypdf.php?id=SW5kdXN0cnktU3BlY2lmaWMtU3RhbmRhcmRzL0VmZmx1ZW50LzUwMS5wZGY=), www.vurup.sk/petroleum-coal Presentation of Results The model results are discussed below and are represented through line chart in Figure 4.5. The predicted noise level at 500 m distance from the boundary of well site is 42.98 dB (A) and are tabulated in Table 4.7.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 130

Table 4.7 Predicted Noise Levels

Noise Levels at 3m Noise Levels at X distance Name of Source distance from source L1 X (Distance in m) L2 [dB(A)] [dB(A)] Diesel Generator/GEG 75 50 56 100 50 200 44 500 16 Diesel Generator 75 50 56 100 50 200 44 500 16 Pumps at the Rig 85 50 61 100 55 200 49 500 41 Mud pumps 70 50 46 100 40 200 34 500 26 Control Room & Quarters 50 50 26 100 20 200 14 500 6 Drilling 85 50 61 100 55 200 49 500 41 Flaring 86 50 62 100 56 200 50 500 42 Table 4.8 Attenuated Noise Level

Prescribed Noise levels Prescribed Noise levels Predicted Noise Levels Distance (m) at Day time of the at Night time of the dB(A) Residential Area dB(A) Residential Area dB(A) 50 62.98 55 45 100 56.96 55 45 200 50.94 55 45 500 42.98 55 45

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 131

Further, considering drilling to be a continuous operation, noise generated from aforesaid equipment has the potential to cause discomfort to the local communities residing in proximity (within 100m) of the rig facility. So settlements located close to majority of the wells will face discomfort due to drilling operation. Vedanta Limited. (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) will ensure that well location is located as far as possible from the nearest human habitat / sensitive receptors. Occupational health and safety impacts viz. Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is also anticipated on personnel working close to such noise generating equipment. However, drilling activities will be undertaken for short duration and necessary noise prevention and control measures viz. use of acoustic barriers, provisions for proper PPEs, regular preventive maintenance of equipment etc. will be implemented by the proponent to reduce the noise impact on the communities residing in proximity to the well sites.

Mitigation Measures: Typical mitigation measures for noise will include the following:  Installation of adequate engineering control on equipment and machinery (like mufflers & noise enclosures for DG sets and mud pumps) to reduce noise levels at source and carrying out proper maintenance.  Providing Personnel Protective Equipment (PPEs) like ear plugs/muffs to workers at site.  Undertaking preventive maintenance of vehicles to reduce noise levels. 4.7 POTENTIAL IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON LAND USE Source of impact: Land would be required for the drilling operations. The land would be procured from private owners. In case of QPU the same drill site would be used, and no new area would be procured.

Assessment of Impact Site preparation Potential impact on drainage is primarily anticipated in the form of disruption of natural drainage pattern during site preparation and approach road construction. Since site preparation involves rising of acquired land to about 2 m from the ground level it may lead to alteration of onsite micro-drainage pattern leading to potential problems of obstruction of natural flow of water. Since the block is located in the arid region of Mandi and Bilaspur district the impacts may not be pronounced during normal climatic conditions. This problem is likely to be further aggravated due to flash floods experienced in the district. The access to majority of the drill sites in HF-ONHP-2017/1 is characterized by paved and unpaved rural roads. Well specific environmental setting study shows that most of the wells can be approached by an existing road. However, for site approach a road need to be constructed. Well Site Restoration Site restoration will be initiated for well site not indicative of any commercially exploitable hydrocarbon reserves. Unplanned restoration may lead to the long-term disruption in natural drainage pattern and water logging in neighbouring agricultural land abutting the site. However, adequate care will be taken by Vedanta Limited. (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) to restore the site back to its original condition based on the originally existing contours and predominant slope to prevent any such adverse drainage impacts. The impact is considered to be of medium significance with onsite drainage being dependent on the proper site restoration. Mitigation Measure  During the construction of the access road adequate cross drainage structures to be provided considering the topography of the alignment.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 132

 Leveling and grading operations will be undertaken with minimal disturbance to the existing contour, thereby maintaining the general slope of site;  Disruption/alteration of micro-watershed drainage pattern will be minimized to the extent possible.  The excavated material from the drill site should be stored properly and should be away from any drainage channel. 4.8 POTENTIAL IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON SOIL QUALITY Potential impact on soil quality is envisaged in the form of increase in soil erosion and loss of soil fertility resulting from site clearance and top soil stripping during well site preparation. The impact from accidental spillage resulting from storage and handling of mud chemicals is also envisaged. Source of Impact: Soil quality impacts can result from:  Pre-drilling Phase ─ Removal of top soil from the land procured; ─ Compaction of soil; ─ Disposal of construction waste/ MSW in non-designated area; ─ Spillage of chemical/oil on open soil; ─ Surface runoff from material & waste storage areas and oil spillage area.  Drilling Phase/Operation of Early Production facilities: ─ Spillage of chemical, spent mud, hazardous waste, etc.; ─ Surface runoff from waste storage area and spillage area.  Decommissioning Phase: ─ Disposal of decommissioning waste materials in open soil. Embedded Control Measures: The project embedded control measures are as follows:  The drill cuttings and spent drilling mud will be generated at site per well during drilling operations. This will be stored in well-designed HDPE line pit. And will be disposed as per the guideline of GSR & HWM rules.  Topsoil would be removed and stored separately. Soil quality impacts so identified have been assessed and evaluated in the section below.

Site clearance and stripping of top soil As discussed in the baseline section, the soil of HF-ONHP-2017/1block is characterized by loamy sand to clay. To preserve the topsoil stripping of topsoil has been planned before the start of construction activity at the drill site to reduce the impact on the already poor fertility of the land. It is estimated that about 20-30% of topsoil will be removed per well site having an area of 9.0 ha. However, such impact is considered to be temporary as the proper reinstatement of site will be undertaken by Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) in case the wells are not indicative of any commercially exploitable hydrocarbon reserves. Necessary surface run-off control measures will be adopted by the proponent during Site preparation to prevent sediment flow to abutting agricultural land. Further specific mitigation measures will be implemented by Vedanta Limited. (Cairn: Oil & Gas) to stabilize the topsoil and to preserve their fertility characteristics during site restoration. The impact is therefore considered to be of medium significance.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 133

Sourcing of borrow material

The drill sites will also be raised. Site preparatory activities will involve the sourcing of earth-fill from borrow areas. Since in most of the cases efforts would be made to procure the fill material from nearby existing borrow areas/ quarries the impact is considered to be of low significance.

Storage and disposal of drill cuttings and drilling mud It is estimated that nearly about 250-750 tons/well of drill cuttings associated with WBM 500 - 1500 tons/well of drill cuttings associated with SBM, 250 - 500 tons/well of Spent/Residual Drilling Mud, 250 - 500 tons/well of Sludge containing oil & other drilling wastes are likely to be generated from each well during drilling operation., As an embeded mitigation measures HDPE lined impervious pits would be constructed at each of the drill sites for temporary storage of drill cuttings and drilling fluid. The disposal of the drill cuttings and the drilling mud would be carried out in accordance with “CPCB Oil & Extraction Industry Standard – Guidelines for Disposal of Solid Wastes” no significant impact to this regard is envisaged.

Storage and handling of fuel and chemicals Fuels, lubricants and chemical used for the drilling operations (especially daily consumption) would be stored at site. In addition spent lube, and waste oil would also be stored temporarily at site before it is disposed as per the regulatory requirements. Improper storage and handling of the chemicals and fuels, spent lubricants can lead to contamination of soil. Accidentally, spillage of chemicals, oil and lubricants, either during transportation or handling, on soil may contribute to soil contamination. Considering the accidental nature of the event the impact is considered to be of low significance. Embeded controls have been considered in the project design to reduce the impact on soil. Also, most of these impacts on the soil fertility is reversible as the drill sites would be reinstated after the drilling. The contamination of soil due to spillage of chemical and fuel is likely to happen only in case of accidents. Thus the significance of the impact is medium

Mitigation Measures The following mitigation measures are proposed for reducing impact on soil quality:  The top soil will be stored properly;  Manage spills of contaminants on soil using spill kits;  Storage of construction waste/ MSW in designated areas within drill sites/early production facilities;  Adopt best practices e.g. use pumps and dispensing nozzle for transfer of fuel, use drip trays etc. 4.9 POTENTIAL IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON WATER QUALITY Site clearance and stripping of top soil during site preparation will result in an increase in soil erosion potential leading to an increased sediment load in the surface run-off during monsoon. Also, surface run off from drilling waste (cuttings and drilling mud), hazardous waste (waste oil, used oil etc) and chemical storage areas may lead to the pollution of receiving water bodies viz. natural drainage channels etc unless precautionary measures are adopted. However, taking into account the provision of onsite drainage system, sediment control measures, provision of oil water separator will aid discharging of surface run off in compliance with the CPCB Inland Water Discharge Standards, the impact is considered to be of low significance.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 134

Mitigation Measures  Proper treatment of all wastewater and produced water and any water discharge from well site should comply with CPCB Inland Water Discharge Standards for Oil and Gas Industries

 Waste mud to be stored in the HDPE lined pit

 Drainage and sediment control systems at the well site will be efficiently designed

 All chemical and fuel storage areas, process areas will have proper bunds so that contaminated run-off cannot escape into the storm-water drainage system.

4.10 POTENTIAL IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON HYDROGEOLOGY Source of Impacts: In absence of supply of surface water resource, the potential impacts on groundwater resource will be due to ground water abstracted for domestic needs and for construction/ site preparation activities. Potential impact on ground water resource could arise due to:

 Pre-drilling phase, ─ Water required for construction/site preparation of drill sites  Drilling phase - Abstraction of ground water for project use may result in depletion of ground water resources. Mitigation Measures  Optimized use of water during drilling operation.

 Proper spill management plan will be prepared and the entire spill will be contained so that it does not reach any drainage channel.

4.11 POTENTIAL IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON ECOLOGY AND BIODIVERSITY Potential impact on Ecological environment i.e impacts on existing Floral and faunal diversity is envisaged particularly during Site preparation phase and operation phase. The potential impacts on terrestrial Ecology in Site preparation and operational phase is given below.

Source of Impact: The Potential Impacts on the existing floral and faunal diversity may arise due to following activities 1. Vegetation Clearance. 2. Illimitation from Site. 3. Fugitive Dust Emission 4. Generation of Noise Impact Assessment:

Vegetation Clearance It is proposed to developexploratory and appraisal well in Block HF-ONHP-2017/1 which mainly agricultural land. During primary survey, it has been observed that removal of ground vegetation is required for site preparation.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 135

The vegetation observed in the study area is common to these climatological conditions and no endangered floral species is observed in the study area. Further the distribution of vegetation is scattered in nature and no well is located inside the forest land. Clearance of vegetation for site preparation would not require cutting of any mature trees. It is observed that approximately 9 ha land is required for each drill site and clearance of only shrubs and herbs are required. Therefore, the scale of Impact can be considered as low, extent of impact within site. The clearance of vegetation would initiate the change in land use. So, overall impacts would be low.

Generation of Noise and Illumination from site It is anticipated that noise would be generated particularly during the construction/site preparation period and and various operational activities from the drilling site. It is expected to get attenuated to baseline level of noise within 200-300 m from the proposed drilling locations. It is also found during the field visit and confirmed by the Forest Department of Government of Himachal Pradesh that there is no ecologically sensitive area such as National Park, Wild Life Sanctuary in the Block area, the potential impacts on existing wildlife due to generation of noise can be considered as low.

The drill site would be illuminated during both construction/site preparation and operational phase as drilling will be conducted continuously for 24 hrs and thus may cause significant disturbance to local faunal population particularly avifauna.

Mitigation Measures

A range of measures would be adopted during construction/site preparation and drilling phase to mitigate the potential impacts of terrestrial ecology and biodiversity which are described below:

 The working area will always be kept minimum.  For felling of trees prior approval from concern Department shall be obtained;  Appropriate shading of lights to prevent unwanted scattering.  Plantation of Local tree plantation should be undertaken;  Fencing would be done on the camp site to avoid any unfortunate encounter with faunal species.

4.12 POTENTIAL IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON SOCIOECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT The impacts on the socio-economic environment are both adverse as well as positive in nature. Assessment of Impact

The impact on different aspects of the socio-economic environment is discussed as under.

Livelihood

The proposed well sites will be located primarily on temporary fallow and would be at a distance from the residential area. Approximately, 9 ha land would be required per well for proposed drilling activity.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 136

Demand on Infrastructure

The width of some of the access and approach roads are not wide enough to support the movement of vehicles to drill site, hence they have to be widened and strengthened. Transportation of drilling rig and associated facilities to drill and decommissioning of rig and associated structure will increase traffic movement. Increase in vehicular fleet may cause damage to road infrastructure if not properly maintained. The strengthening and widening of the existing road will reduce the significance of impact from medium to low. Influx of Population

Influx of population is anticipated in all stages of the project cycle particularly during exploratory & appraisal drilling. The drill site will involve the operation of about 50 onsite workers during drilling phase. Interaction between workers with villagers of nearby areas might give rise to various issues like conflict of workers with the local population, nuisance caused by workers due to improper sanitation facilities, etc. However, taking into account that majority of the workforce during construction/site preparation phase is likely to be sourced from local villages chances of such conflicts are negligible. Employment opportunities

Project will benefit people living in the neighbouring villages by creating opportunity for direct & indirect employment associated with the various project activities. Site preparation phase will involve certain number of workers and there is a possibility that local people can be engaged for this purpose. Drilling process will involve a number of skilled and unskilled workers. Generation of employment opportunities during the project phase would improve the employment scenario of the area. Cultural & Heritage Site

Impact on cultural environment may occur due to site preparation, operation of drilling rig and also during vehicular movement with respect to the proposed exploration activities. There is no designated historical or cultural spots close to the well sites or access roads hence; no impact in this regard is envisaged. Mitigation Measures  The shortest distance would be considered for access road, with additional care to avoid division of land parcels into agriculturally unviable fractions;  The village road identified for accessing proposed project footprints, would be strengthened and widened as per requirement before starting construction/site preparation work work;  Appropriate awareness program on grievance redressal mechanism, would be designed and implemented for local community around proposed project footprints; 4.13 POTENTIAL IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY Construction/Site preparation Phase

Source of Impact Occupational health and safety impacts during construction phase/site preparation are anticipated primarily from:  Operation of construction machineries/equipment;  Exposure to high noise generation areas.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 137

Embedded Control Measures The project embedded control measures are as follows:  Provision of proper PPEs for the workers onsite;  Provision of safe drinking water facility, sanitation and cooking facilities.

Assessment of Impact Impact on occupational health and safety of workers is anticipated from exposure to high noise generated from operation of machinery/equipment and fugitive dust generated from material stockpiles, earth works and vehicular emission. Continuous exposure of workers to high noise levels and fugitive dust and inadequate facilities and unhygienic conditions at such camps may lead to adverse health impacts viz. headache, asthma, allergy, hearing loss etc. indicating a high receptor sensitivity. However, extent of the impact would be limited to the well site and production facility only hence the impact would be localized only. Also considering the temporary nature of the construction phase/site preparation activities, operation of machinery/equipment will be short term and with provision of proper PPEs and training for the workers scale of the impact will be low. Hence, the impact magnitude for occupation health and safety due to above mentioned construction activities have been assessed to be of medium and significance would be moderate. Operational Phase Source of Impact: The source of occupational health and safety could arise from:  Operation of rig and machineries,  Exposure in high noise generation area. Embedded control measures: The control measures are as follows:  All potential occupational health hazards would be identified;  Permit to work system to be in place;  Provision of PPEs to all workers. Assessment of Impact: Major occupational health hazards encountered in proposed drilling activity would include noise from drilling activity, operation of heavy vehicles and machinery, handling of chemicals etc. both in drill site and production facility.

Drilling Activity Continuous exposure of workers involved in drill activity to high noise levels may lead to adverse health impacts viz. headache, hearing loss etc. which indicates a high receptor sensitivity. It is under stood that extent of the impact would be limited to the well site only hence the impact would be local. As the drilling activity would be continuous of maximum period of up to 3 months and intermittent operation of machinery/equipment duration will be short term and with provision of proper PPEs and training of the workers scale of the impact will be low and magnitude of the impact would be small. Hence, the impact significance of occupation health and safety due to above mentioned construction activities is assessed to be moderate

Quick Production Unit/Early Production Unit Main impact on occupational health safety in production facility will limited to operation of vehicles and machinery, handing of chemicals etc. However, involved of the personal in a production facility per shift is maximum up to 10 persons and it is understood that they will be trained. Hence, the resource sensitivity will be medium. As all the activity of early production facility would be carried out within secure premises extent of impact will be local. As the risk level of a production facility is high as it is handling highly inflammable hydrocodone embedded control of any production facility is very strong so the scale of the impact will be medium. Hence, the magnitude of the impact will be medium and significant of the impact is assessed to be Medium.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 138

Mitigation measures: The mitigation measures are as follows:  Periodic onsite surveillance to be conducted so that the workers use the designated PPEs all the time;  Health surveillance would be conducted of personnel working in the aforesaid areas;  Regular health and safety training to be provided to workers.  Exposure of workers operating near high noise generating sources would be reduced to the extent possible; 4.14 POTENTIAL IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON COMMUNITY HEALTH & SAFETY Community health and safety of inhabitants residing close to the drilling site stands to get affected from frequent vehicular movement along village access roads and due to noise from drilling rig operations. Ensuring Public Safety Since the project involves the movement of vehicles and machinery in the area, the issue of public safety of the villagers, especially children, is an important concern. During the drilling phase and for the rest of the project activities proper safety measures will be undertaken both for transportation as well as the other operations. The drill site would be fenced and gates would be constructed so that the local people are refrained from straying into the site. The movement of traffic is also likely to disrupt access conditions of the inhabitants residing close to the access road. The increase in traffic will have implications on their safety too, as well as create congestion, potential delays and inconvenience for pedestrians. Health and safety impact arising from technological emergencies viz. well blow outs, explosions will be dealt separately in the Quantitative Risk Assessment (QRA) section. Although the aforesaid activities are temporary in nature it may not adversely affect community health and safety in the long term. Mitigation measures will be taken as outlined in environmental management plan to reduce the impacts arising out of project activities. Mitigation Measures:  Drilling activities should be under proper fencing  Proper hoardings in English and local language should be displayed during site preparation and operation phase to prevent people from encroaching the fenced area.  Traffic management plan will be developed and implemented at site.  Grievance redressal mechanism will be in place. Table 4.9 Impact Significance Matrix (with mitigation)

Environmental Attributes

Activities Total Air Soil Risk Socio Noise LU/LC Hydro Water geology Geology Economic Hazardous Biodiversity Ecology and and Ecology

A. Pre-drilling Activities Well Site Preparation and approach road -4 -4 -4 -6 -6 -4 - - -2 -2 -32 development Transportation of drilling Rig, Materials -6 - -4 -6 - - - -6 -4 -2 -28 and ancillaries B. Exploratory Well Drilling and Testing

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 139

Operation of DG sets -4 - -2 -4 ------10 and machineries Casing and cementing - -6 -4 -6 - -4 - - - - -20 of exploratory well Preparation of drilling fluid (Mud) and drill - -6 -4 - - -2 -6 -4 - -22 cutting disposal Exploratory well -6 -6 - -6 -6 -2 - -6 -4 -3 -39 drilling Well testing & Flaring -6 - -4 - - - - -6 -4 -3 -23 C. Early Production Flaring of Gas -4 - - -4 - - - - -3 - -11 DG/GEG Set of -4 - - -4 ------Emission -8 Produced Water - -4 -2 ------6 D. Decommissioning and Reinstatement Dismantling of rig & associated - - - -6 ------6 machineries Transportation of -4 - - -4 - - - - -2 - -10 drilling facilities Total -38 -26 -24 -46 -12 -12 - -24 -23 -10 -215

Most of the impacts are Short term, temporary and reversible in nature.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 140

CHAPTER 5 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES

Consideration of alternatives to a project proposal is a requirement of the EIA process. During the scoping process, alternatives to a proposal can be considered or refined, either directly or by reference to the key issues identified. A comparison of alternatives helps to determine the best method of achieving the project objectives with minimum environmental impacts or indicate the most environmentally friendly and cost- effective options. The consideration of alternatives is most useful when the EIA is undertaken early in the projects cycle. The type and range of alternatives open for consideration include:  Site alternatives (e.g. advantage of proposed site, details of any other sites, if explored, etc)  Input or supply alternatives (e.g. use of raw materials, sourcing, etc)  Technology alternatives (e.g. feasibility of different technologies available and advantage of proposed technology, etc) After analysis of the various factors the most environmentally compatible alternative is selected. Reference may be made to available technologies, policy objectives, social attitudes, environmental and site constraints, projects economic etc. This section provides an analysis of alternatives in relation to the conception and planning phase of the project. This includes the following: 5.1 NO PROJECT SCENARIO The no project scenario has been analyzed to understand what would be reasonably expected to occur in the near future if the proposed development drilling of hydrocarbons and production of hydrocarbon are not conducted in the area. In such a scenario, there would not be any pressure on use of local resources and infrastructure, and no adverse effect on local ecology or incremental pollution to baseline environmental components (air, water and noise levels). At the same time, there would not be any positive impact on socioeconomic status of the area resulting from direct/ indirect employment and economic benefits that such a project can provide. With no project scenario, dependence of the country on import of crude oil and demand for foreign exchange will grow. 5.2 ALTERNATIVES FOR PROJECT SITE The block is allocated by the Government of India under the Revenue Sharing Contract (RSC). Vedanta Limited. (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) is the Operator for this block. Drilling locations are proposed based on geo- scientific information and alternate sites cannot be considered for the proposed project facilities due to the following reasons: The location is within the existing RSC boundary of the /block. The surface locations of wells are selected considering the drilling configuration (reach to potential reservoirs). 5.3 ALTERNATIVES FOR WELL LOCATION The seismic data interpretation of the seismic survey would decide the exact locations of the drilling well. The proposed exploratory well site have been identified based on the study and interpretation of the stratigraphy and already available seismic data. Within the identified location the actual well drilling site will be selected based on the following factors:  Located at a suitable distance from the nearest habitat / sensitive receptors  Located at a safe distance from public road. Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 141

 Ensure natural drainage channels are avoided or drainage channels rerouted to ensure unhindered flow of rain / flood water. Where necessary adequate erosion control measures will be provided. 5.4 ALTERNATIVE OF TECHNOLOGY The technical and process related alternatives are discussed in the section. 5.4.1 Use of Water Based Mud and Synthetic Based Mud During drilling operation, drilling mud will be used, which is essential to lubricate and cool drill bits, removal of drilled rock (i.e. cuttings) from the bottom of the hole and transporting it to the surface and maintaining hydrostatic head in the well to counter natural formation pressures. Drilling mud is basically a suspension / mixture of solids suspended in a liquid phase, which is blended with clays, polymers, salts and weighting agents. The main component/ solvent of drilling fluid are water, oil or synthetic and accordingly they are called as oil-based, water-based, and synthetic-based muds (OBMs, WBMs, and SBMs). All the three types of muds have certain advantages and disadvantages as discussed below. Though the WBMs is a least cost option and widely used but is not found efficient in high temperature and also for water sensitive substrata, i.e., shales and mud. To overcome these limitations, OBM and SBM are used and of the two, SBM is preferred choice and it may be used in different set of environments like high temperatures, hydratable shales, high-angle, extended-reach wells, high-density mud and drilling through salt. Table 5.1 Ranks/Comparison of Different Types of Mud

Aspects Water Based Mud Oil Based Mud Synthetic Based Mud Least Cost 1 2 3 Quantity of Waste discharge 3 2 1 Least Quantity of Water 3 2 1 Required for Preparation Toxicity 1 3 2 Reduced drill time 3 2 1 Note:- 1: Preferable, 2: Less Preferable, 3: Least Preferable The WBM produces large quantity of drill waste as the mud is not recyclable. Moreover, the clay in WBM absorbs water and expands to disperse into the drilling fluid. These fine clay particles increase mud viscosity and inhibit its upward flow. To lower the mud viscosity, water is added to lower the concentration of fine solids and mud products are added to give the drilling fluid the correct density and flow properties. As a result, large volumes of mud are produced to be discharged as waste. On the other hand, the OBM and SBM are recycled several times and only drill cutting are disposed off. The water requirement of SBM is highest as compared to OBM and WBM. Though, OBM are considered more efficient and has wider application in different conditions but recently their use is restricted due to environmental considerations. OBM are considered toxic due to the use of hydrocarbons as solvents and need a proper disposal through land fill. The water-based muds are considered safest in this regard followed by SBM. If all the three types of mud are compared on the drill time, SBM is far superior then OBM and WBM. The less drill time mean shorter operation and hence less emissions from various drilling equipment and limited engagement of workforce. The SBMs have the potential to drill wells more quickly and efficiently than WBMs, while avoiding some of the disposal costs and environmental difficulties associated with OBMs.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 142

Water based mud will be used for initial, shallower sections where massive shales are not encountered. The deeper and difficult to drill formations will be drilled using synthetic base mud (SBM). Synthetic base mud can be re-used. At the end of drilling a well almost the entire amount of the SBM is collected for re-use in next drilling operation. SBM systems promote good hole cleaning and cuttings suspension properties.

5.5 SUMMARY This project is of national importance as it helps to achieve fuel security. The project will have positive benefits in terms of revenue generation to state and central government, increase in job opportunity Site selection would be carried out taking into consideration the nearest habitation, proximity to any sensitive receptor and natural drainage. In addition, Vedanta Limited (Div: Cairn Oil & Gas) will ensure that the final site selection is made after due consideration to all environmental considerations mentioned. Also use of alternate method/technology to avoid sensitive locations will be made to the extent possible. Consideration of these alternatives with strict compliance to the Environment Management and Monitoring Plans suggested will ensure minimal impact on the Environment.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 143

CHAPTER 6 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM 6.0 GENERAL Environmental monitoring is the measurement of environmental parameters at regular intervals over an extended period of time. Monitoring allows the assessment of environmental and biological changes in an ecosystem. All the project activities shall be monitored to ensure that appropriate environmental mitigation activities are being implemented and to identify areas where Environmental Management Plan compliance is not satisfactory. Hence, Environmental quality monitoring of critical parameter is very essential in the routine activity schedule of project operation. An Environmental Monitoring Programme shall be scheduled for the following major objectives:  To verify the result of the impact assessment study in particular with regards to new developments.  To follow the trend of parameters which have been identified as critical.  To check or assess the efficiency of controlling measures.  To monitor effectiveness of control measures.  Regular monitoring of environmental parameters to find out any deterioration in environmental quality.

6.1 POST PROJECT ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM Environmental Monitoring Parameters and Frequency After the commissioning of the project, monitoring parameters and frequency for operation phase shall be as follows: Table 6.1: Environmental Monitoring Parameters and Frequency

S. No. Monitoring Locations Frequency Parameters 1. Ambient Air Quality (AAQ) adequate number of Pre-drilling, during As per NAAQS and monitoring samples at drilling and post- HC, NMHC, H2S and representative drilling VOC location 2. D.G. Stack - Once during As per GSR 771 (E) operation or as specified by Consent to operate issued by State pollution control board (SPCB) 3. Ambient Noise adequate number of Pre-drilling, during Leq (night), Leq Level at Fence/ samples at drilling and post- (day), Leq (24 boundary representative drilling hourly) location 4. Work Place noise Monitoring at point During drilling 8 Hourly (TWA) Monitoring sources of noise emissions 5. Sewage Water Quality Waste water Once during pH, TSS, TDS, BOD, Monitoring operation COD, oil & grease, faecal coliform (MPN per 100 milliliter,

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 144 MPN/100ml or as per CTE/CTO issued by SPCB

6. Ground water monitoring adequate number Pre-drilling and As per IS 10500: of samples at post-drilling 2012 representative location 7. Soil Quality adequate number Pre-drilling and pH, conductivity, of samples at post-drilling texture, bulk representative density, Ca, Mg, Na, location K, P, N, organic matter, organic carbon, Cl, SO4, sodium absorption ratio, Al, Fe, Mn, Boron, Zn, Hg and PAH 8. Fresh Synthetic Oil Based During drilling One sample / well Aromatic content, Mud (SOBM) during drilling Toxicity, (LC50, 96 hours), Hg 9. Fresh Water Based Mud During drilling One sample / well (LC50, 96 hours), (WBM) during drilling Mercury 10. Barite used for mud During drilling One sample / well Hg, Cd preparation during drilling 11. Drill cuttings associated During drilling One sample / well Oil and grease, (LC50, with WBM during drilling 96 hours), Hg and parameters for disposal of waste 12. Drill cuttings associated During drilling One sample / well Oil and grease, (LC50, with SBM during drilling 96 hours), Hg and parameters for disposal of waste 13. Spent WBM before disposal During drilling One sample / well (LC50, 96 hours), Hg during drilling and parameters for disposal of waste

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 145 CHAPTER 7 ADDITIONAL STUDIES

7.0 GENERAL An additional study including Risk Assessment (RA), Disaster Management Plan, Occupational, Health and Safety has been carried out for the proposed project. The study has been incorporated in the EIA report to support the Environmental Management Plan. 7.1 PUBLIC CONSULTATION The applicability of the S. O. 1533 for the proposed project was explored by considering different possibilities and provisions described in the said notification. Considering the products and project location of the proposed project, it is noticed that the proposed project falls under the item no. 1 (b) – Category ‘A’ according to EIA Notification, SO 1533 amended on 14th September 2006. Public hearing is applicable and it shall be carried out as per the procedure of Himachal Pradesh Pollution control Board and Minutes of the meeting for the same will be incorporated in the final EIA/EMP report. 7.2 QUANTITATIVE RISK ASSESSMENT  Risk” is defined as the combination of the expected frequency and consequence of accidents that could occur as a result of an activity. Risk assessment is a formal process of increasing one understands of the risk associated with an activity. The process of risk assessment includes answering three questions:  What can go wrong?  How likely is it?  What are the impacts?  Qualitative answers to one or more of these questions are often sufficient for making good decisions about the allocation of resources for safety improvements. But, as managers seek quantitative cost/benefit information upon which to base their decisions, they increasingly turn their attention to the use of QRA. Figure 7-1 depicts the overall RA process.  QRA is the art and science of developing and understanding numerical estimates of the risk (i.e., combinations of the expected frequency and consequences of potential accidents) associated with a facility or operation. It uses a set of highly sophisticated, but approximate tools for acquiring risk understanding. The Overall approach for the Risk Assessment in brief has been given here with details in the further chapters.  The various steps in the QRA process are described below.  Hazard Identification  Consequence Analysis  Initial Failure Frequency assessment  Construction of Event Trees  Calculation of Average Individual Risk  Risk Assessment and preparation of Risk reduction recommendations

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 146

Figure 7.1: Risk Assessment 7.2.1 Hazard Identification This most important section looks into all incidents, which could result in possible fatalities. For drilling, such incidents typically include the following:  Well fluid releases - small, medium and large well fluid releases from exploratory/appraisal drilling wells. Possibilities include blowouts (due to either downhole or surface abnormality or possible cratering (a basin like opening in the Earth surface surrounding a well caused by erupted action of gas, oil or water flowing uncontrolled)) or other incidents involving drilling fluids, leakage from mud degassing stacks/ vents and others- these are the major category and are deliberated later.  Possibility of dropped objects on the drilling platform due to lifting of heavy equipment including components like draw works, drilling pipe, tubing, drill bits, Kelly, mud equipment, shale shakers, BOP components, power generating equipment and others.  Single fatality occupational incidents such as trips and falls. These are more likely in drilling rigs due to the hazardous nature of operations and general high congestion and large extent of the manual operation involved.  Structural failure of the drilling rig due to excessive static or rotating loads, earthquake, design defect, construction defect etc. It may be noted that rotating loads are induced due to the specific rotating actions of the rotary drilling mechanism (Drill string rotated by means of rotary table etc.).  Loss of containment of fuels (HSD) and consequent pool fire on encountering an ignition source. The HAZID would select the Scenarios for further modeling in the next sections. The HAZID is derived mainly from incidents in Similar drilling installations based on worldwide experience and includes generic data sources.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 147 Table 7.1 Identification of the Accident Event in Oil Well Drilling Activity

Type of Hazardous Event Specific Accident Events included in QRA Hydrocarbon Release Uncontrolled Blow out-medium, large, small Release from diesel tanks- Catastrophic failure, medium and small risks Occupational accidents Single fatality accidents such as slips, trips, falls, dropped objectives etc. Structural failure Structural collapse of drilling rig due to static or rotating load, fatigue, construction defect, design defect, earthquakes etc Source: Cairn 7.2.2 Hydrocarbon Release The events of blowouts during drilling are divided in the databases according to the consequences and well control success. Such blow outs can be ignited or un-ignited. Blow outs are uncontrolled sudden expulsions of oil, gas, water or drilling fluids from wells to the surface which result in loss of control of the well. Sources of hydrocarbon release during the drilling phase include the following:  Dissolved gas which comes out of solution under reduced pressure often while drilling at near balance or under balance hydrostatically or as trip gas during a round trip to pull the drill string around from the hole. Such sources could include releases at bell nipple and around mud return flow line outlet, shale shakers and active mud pits.  As a “kick”, which occurs as the down hole formation pressure unexpectedly exceeds the hydrostatic head of the circulating mud column. Significant releases can occur from the vent lines of the mud /gas separator and other locations.  From residual mud on the surface of the drill pipe being racked in the derrick during the round trip, or on production of coil tubing being withdrawn from the hole, or from core samples laid out for inspection. Usually any liquid hydrocarbon system entering the down hole under normal circumstances are very much diluted by the mud system. However, under conditions of under balanced drilling, the proportion of hydrocarbons in mud returns may be significant with a potential for continuous release.  Small hydrocarbon release from rotating equipment, pipes and pump work occurring during normal operations/ maintenance during drilling. These are not likely to be significant in open derrick or mast structures.  Possible shallow gas blowout – these may occur at sumps or drainage tanks and be conveyed by vents or drains to areas of potential ignition sources resulting in fire/ explosion.  Vapour present in oily drainage systems, vents, and ducting.  Flammable materials used in drilling operations (oil based drilling fluids)- release points could include high pressure mud points, mud degassing equipment, shale shaker, mud pits and active tanks etc. Protection against Blowouts The primary protections against blow outs during drilling are the BOPs or Blow out Preventers. These are used to shut in and control the well in the event of gas or oil being encountered at pressures higher than those exerted by the column of mud in the hole. BOPs typically consist of 2-3 ram preventers designed at high pressures- (ram preventer is basically a double operated valve with one ram or gate on each side of the bore hole). The BOPs are hydraulically operated with a second remote control panel situated someway away from the rig for use in emergencies when the rig is

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 148 unapproachable. Connected to the side of the ram type preventers (usually below the blind rams) are the kill and choke lines which are used to control the well in the event of any imbalance between the drilling fluid column pressure and the formation pressure. Both lines are high pressure 2-3 inch hydraulic pipes, the kill line being connected to the mud circulation system and the high pressure cement pumps and the choke line leading to a back pressure control Manifold and the mud degasser unit. In the event of the high pressure kick with the drill string in the hole, the BOP is closed around the drill pipe and the mud is circulated down the drill string and back to the mud tanks through the choke line and back pressure manifold. The manifold consists of a series of valves and chokes - the choke can be adjusted to give the orifice opening required such as to give a back pressure on the well in order to control it. There would be two chokes in order to allow maintenance on one. If a kick or blow out occurs with the drill string out of the hole, the blind rams are closed and heavy mud is pumped into the well through the kill line. Any gas can be bled off through the choke line and fluids are usually squeezed back into the formation. The correct installation of the drilling equipment and the operational reliability of the BOPs are essential for the safety of well drilling operation. In addition, initial and periodic testing of the BOPs, choke and kill manifolds, high pressure/ heavy mud system etc. before installation and periodically is absolutely essential. Most important is the presence of highly trained skilled personnel on the rig! In addition, the use of the correct drilling fluid in the circulatory system is extremely vital.  The drilling fluid basically does the following:  To cool and lubricate the drilling bit and the drill string  To remove drill solids and allowing the release at their surface.  To form a gel to suspend the drill cuttings and any fluid material when the column is static  To control sub surface pressures  To prevent squeezing and caving if formations  To plaster the sides of the borehole  To minimize the damage to any potential production zone. Pressures associated with the sub surface oil, gas or water can be controlled by increasing the specific gravity of the fluid and thereby by reducing the hydrostatic head of the drilling fluid column. The squeezing of formations in the drilled hole can be checked by increasing the hydrostatic head of the drilling fluid. Special additives for the drilling fluid for controlling viscosity, lubricating properties, gelling properties etc. play an important role in the drilling fluid integrity. Sealing agents such as cellulose, mica can also be added to make up the drilling fluid loss into the porous and fractured formations. The historical records show that the drilling of an exploration well has a higher chance of blow out occurring than does drilling a development well. A blow out can be expected for about 400 exploration wells drilled. As a well takes about 20-25 days to drill this equates to one blow out approximately every 50 years if drilling was continuous. Historically, ignited blowouts have caused an average of three deaths per blow out. 7.2.3 Release of the other flammable material HSD is used in the mobile generators at the drill sites to cater to the power requirement of the drill equipment, area lighting, etc. The material will be stored in 30-60 KL vertical cylindrical tank. The failure cases which may lead to release of hazardous chemicals are as under, out of which maximum worst case shall be considered:  Possible Release/Leakage and catastrophic rupture of tank.  Catastrophic rupture of tank during unloading.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 149  Leakage from unloading arm of tanker. The scenarios of flammable solvent storage tanks (if it is stored in tanks) have been considered assuming unavailability of bunds. Practically a bund shall be provided as per OISD guidelines. The tank design and construction takes into account the possible stress loads imposed due to exploration and appraisal activities at the drill site. Dyke with adequate capacity (110%) is being provided to contain the spill, if any. Standard well area inspection and maintenance procedures of CIL shall be implemented at the exploratory and appraisal wells to identify any abnormalities. 7.2.4 Consequence Analysis/Calculations Consequence analysis involves the calculation of the initial “release rate” and then predicting the consequence of the release through computer modeling- it forms an important ingredient in the QRA approach. Consequence analysis is a complex procedure involving numerous calculations. It must also be noted that a single starting incident could have numerous outcomes depending upon factors such as escalation, ignition and others. The various factors of importance in this drilling rig study with respect to consequence analysis are described below. Loss of Containment- leak sizes It must be understood that there are an infinite range of possible releases of flammable material on the facilities For example, a hole could appear at any point in a well, at any time of the year and the hole could have any size (right from pinhole to catastrophic line guillotine rupture) and also possibly any shape! In order to allow management of the study, it is per force necessary to divide the infinite range into a number of smaller ranges through representation as a single event or a failure case. In the study, only small, medium and large well fluid blowouts were considered. Hydrocarbon Leaks due to Loss of Containment (Leak during Well Testing) were not taken into consideration since they are likely to be controlled about 95% of the time. The category includes releases that may be isolated from the reservoir fluids, typically release from the well testing equipment and mud line. Inventory Inventory can get discharged to Environment due to Loss of Containment. Inventory Analysis is commonly used in understanding the relative hazards and short listing of release scenarios and plays an important role in regard to the potential hazard. The larger the inventory of a vessel or a “system”, the larger the quantity of potential release. The potential release depends upon the quantity of release, the properties of the materials and the operating conditions (pressure, temperature etc. described later). Blowouts A blowout on the topsides may take one of several forms and release locations. Any release not immediately ignited would give a flammable vapour cloud, which could cause a vapour cloud explosion in the drill floor or the mud pit areas. A pressurized jet release could lead to a very large jet fire, producing high levels of thermal radiation. The flame could impinge on structural members in the derrick. These could then fail as they lose their mechanical properties at high temperature. This may lead to objects falling from the derrick and causing more damage below, especially if the derrick has already been weakened by the blast from a vapour cloud explosion. If the fire continues for a long period (say one to two hours) then the derrick may collapse causing serious damage to surrounding areas. However, evacuation is expected to have occurred by any available means before this time. This scenario is a worst-case scenario, which is unlikely to happen in this situation as the bottom hole pressure is low.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 150 Unburnt oil from a potential blowout will typically form running or evaporating pools, which could create a hazard from heat and smoke in all areas that the pools reach. If the blow out originates on the drill floor then the burning oil will run over the side of the drill floor. Consequence Analysis for Blowouts Blowout release rate is taken as 0.12 kg/s assuming 5 times the normal rate from the well. It is expected that the uncontrolled release of fluids on the drill floor will ignite almost immediately and that the resulting fire will engulf the drill floor. Higher ignition probabilities are expected for large releases compared to smaller releases. The flames are likely to impinge on structural members on the drill floor. These may fail as they lose their mechanical properties at high temperature. This may lead to objects falling from the derrick and causing more damage below. If the fire continues for a long period. Weather Conditions The weather stability class is normally Class D on sunny days and Class F for Night time. The average wind speed most of the time is 5 m/s for day time and 1.5 m/s. combining this with stability class D and F, consequence modeling is done for both the weather cases 5 D and 1.5 F. The ambient condition considered in this study is as under: Average Ambient Temperature = 24˚C Average Humidity = 80 % The six representative weather classes on which the analysis is based are detailed in Table 7.2 below: Table 7.2 Pasquill Stability Class

Daytime Conditions Night Sky Strength of Sunlight Surface Wind Speed (m/s) Thin Overcast ≤3/8 Strong Moderate Slight ≥ 4/8 Cloudiness Cloudiness** < 2 A A-B B E F 2-3 A-B B C E F 3-5 B B-C C D E 5-6 C C-D D D D > 6 C D D D D

*Applicable to heavy overcast conditions day or night **Degree of Cloudiness = Fraction of sky above horizon covered by clouds. A- Extremely Unstable Conditions B- Moderately Unstable Conditions C- Slightly Unstable Conditions D- Neutral Conditions* E- Slightly Stable Conditions F- Moderately Stable Conditions In its original form, the Pasquill system contains seven categories (A to F) but joint categories are also common. Categories A (Very Unstable), D (Neutral) and F (Very Stable) are discussed next.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 151 Category A (very unstable) occurs typically on a warm sunny day with light winds and almost cloudless skies when there is a strong solar heating of the ground and the air immediately above the surface. Bubbles of warm air rise from the ground in thermals. The rate of change (decline) of temperature with height (lapse rate) is very high. Category D (neutral) occurs in cloudy conditions or whenever there is a strong surface wind to cause vigorous mechanical mixing of the lower atmosphere. Category F (very stable) occurs typically on a clear, calm night when there is a strong cooling of the ground and the lowest layers of the atmosphere by long wave radiation. There is a strong inversion of temperature (i.e. warm air over cold air). Table 7.3: Weather data used for the study

WIND SPEED (M/S) PASQUILL STABILITY

1.5 F 1.5 D 5 D

Heat Radiation Selection Criteria:  4.73 kW/m2: Maximum radiant heat intensity in areas where emergency actions lasting 2 min to 3 min can be required by personnel without shielding but with appropriate clothing. Corresponds to of painful burns and blistering after 20 second exposure (0% lethality)  6.31 kW/m2: Indicative of second degree burns after 20 second exposure (1% fatality)  12.5 kW/m2: Indicative of piloted ignition for susceptible structures (50% fatality)  37.5 kW/m2: Indicative of total asset loss (100% fatality Explosion Criteria: Blast peak overpressure from explosion for buildings should not exceed the following levels provided in Table-7-4. Internationally recognized and globally accepted TNO Multi energy model was used for the explosion modeling for this Project.

Table 7.4: Overpressure Criteria

LEVEL OF CONCERN TYPE OF DAMAGE 0.02068 bar "Safe distance" (probability 0.95 of no serious damage1 below this value); projectile limit; some damage to house ceilings; 10% window glass broken. 0.070 bar General buildings, offices 0.1379 bar Partial collapse of wells, concreate Block wells, not reinforced, shattered 0.2068 bar 1 bar Range for 1-99% fatalities among exposed population due to direct blast effects 7.2.5 Scenarios Identified For Consequence Analysis for HSD

S. No. SCENARIOS Leak Size Inventory

IS1 Leakage from storage tanks T1 5mm 30KL

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 152 IS2 Catastrophic rupture of T1 Cata. 30KL IS3 Leakage from storage tanks T2 5mm 60KL IS4 Catastrophic rupture of T2 Cata. 60KL Possible Release/Leakage due to failure of IS5 50mm 5KL Unloading Arm of Truck Tanker. IS6 Catastrophic rupture of Tanker Cata. 30KL

7.2.6 Software Used The Software, DNV PHAST was used for the study for assessing the Risk and Consequence calculations. 7.2.7 Consequence Analysis Results Events originating from within the facility may, depending upon the nature and quantity of hazardous chemical and the location of accident have the potential of affecting personnel within the installation or at times the general population in the surrounding area. Flash Fire Scenarios: Concentration Distance (meters) SR. No. Scenario (ppm) Category 1.5/F Category 1.5/D Category 5/D

LFL Frac. 2736.39 2.46 2.47 3.30 1 IS1 LFL. 5472.78 2.42 2.43 3.09

LFL Frac. 2736.39 5.70 5.66 6.03 2 IS2 LFL. 5472.78 5.69 5.65 6.02

LFL Frac. 2736.39 2.64 3.09 3.35 3 IS3 LFL. 5472.78 2.62 3.02 3.19

LFL Frac. 2736.39 10.41 10.29 10.26 4 IS4 LFL. 5472.78 10.39 10.27 10.24

LFL Frac. 2736.39 2.08 2.08 2.14 5 IS5 LFL. 5472.78 2.08 2.08 2.14

LFL Frac. 2736.39 3.70 3.69 3.96 6 IS6 LFL. 5472.78 3.69 3.68 3.95

Explosion Overpressure Scenarios:

Overpressure Downwind Distance (meters) SR. No. Scenario (Bar) Category 1.5/F Category 1.5/D Category 5/D

0.02068 281.70 291.24 291.62 1 IS4 0.1379 80.35 82.82 82.91 Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 153 0.2068 64.43 66.34 66.42

Late Pool Fire Scenarios:

Radiation Level Distance (meters) SR. No. Scenario (KW/m2) Category 1.5/F Category 1.5/D Category 5/D

4 30.38 30.40 33.27

12.5 18.11 18.13 23.21 1 IS1 25 10.58 10.60 13.42

37.5 8.98 9.00 9.97

4 78.66 78.38 91.11

12.5 35.48 35.30 37.45 2 IS2 25 NR NR NR

37.5 NR NR NR

4 12.08 12.59 13.11

12.5 8.53 9.03 10.04 3 IS3 25 6.70 7.20 8.66

37.5 5.33 5.83 7.09

4 103.13 103 118.53

12.5 48.82 48.68 51.07 4 IS4 25 NR NR NR

37.5 NR NR NR

4 49.69 49.69 57.84

12.5 21.46 21.47 24.45 5 IS5 25 NR NR NR

37.5 NR NR NR

4 77.68 77.65 90.18

12.5 34.95 34.87 36.90 6 IS6 25 NR NR NR

37.5 NR NR NR

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 154  CONSEQUENCE CONTOURS

IS_1 Flash Fire:

IS_1 Late Pool Fire:

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 155

IS2_Flash Fire:

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 156 IS2_Late Pool Fire:

IS3_Flash Fire:

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 157

IS3_Late pool Fire:

IS4_Flash Fire:

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 158

IS4_Late Pool Fire:

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 159 IS4_VCE:

IS5_Flash Fire:

IS5_Late pool Fire Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 160

IS6_Flash Fire:

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 161

IS6_Late pool Fire:

 COMMENTS / RECOMMENDATIONS BASED ON CONSEQUENCE ANALYSIS

Flash Fire and UVCE Scenarios:  In case of release of IS4 vapors travels to the farthest distance (10.41 m) in 1.5/F weather condition. If it gets a source of ignition within this radius, it will create UVCE (Unconfined vapor cloud explosion) and effects of overpressure (0.02068 bar) would be felt up to 291.62 mt.  Evacuation plan to be designed considering the worst case scenario of Hexane as mentioned above.

Late Pool Fire Scenarios:  In case of release of IS4 in 5/D weather condition for 4 KW/m2 radiation level of Late pool fire is 118.53 mt.

Recommendations:  Evacuation routes shall be planned such that alternate route is available from any corner in more than one direction.  Extra precautions to be taken in unloading of flammable chemicals.  Fire fighting arrangements shall be provided as per the guidelines of OISD.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 162  Details on hazard identification i.e. HAZOP, HAZAN, Fault tree analysis, Event tree analysis, Checklist Audit, safety audit and their compliance, etc. to be adopted for the safe operation of plant at appropriate stage.

7.2.8 Calculation of Individual & Societal Risk Individual Risk or IR represents the geographical distribution of risk to any individual. Societal Risk is representing the risk the project poses to society as a whole. The Societal Risk or Group risk (F-N) curves indicate the cumulative frequency (F) of (N) number of fatalities. Society is typically not willing to accept industrial installations that result in many fatalities, even with a low frequency rate! The estimation of risks in the software is done through estimation of “risks” attributed to each failure case by determining the impact in terms of fatalities. In this step, the hazard or effect zone information, ignition source, population distribution, meteorological data and other relevant details are combined to determine risks. In order to estimate risks (IR or SR), the number of fatalities for each incident outcome case is calculated and the frequencies of outcomes with equal fatalities summed up. 7.2.9 Comparison to Risk Acceptance Criteria This penultimate step compares the estimated risk with respect to the Company’s internal risk acceptability criteria or specific legislative or regulatory (as applicable in the country of operation) risk acceptability criteria. In this step, the risk “band” is determined- typically, the project risk band is determined to be negligible, acceptable, not acceptable are the risk assessment stage determines whether the risks are “Broadly Acceptable”, “Intolerable” or “Tolerable if ALARP”. Vedanta Limited (Cairn Oil & Gas) Risk Acceptability Criteria Vedanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) risk acceptability criteria are derived from interpretation of the risk acceptability criteria published by UK HSE-92 and is applied when assessing the tolerability of risk to persons for Vedanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) facilities, sites, combined operations or activities. It broadly indicates as follows:  Individual risk to any worker above 10-3 per annum shall be considered intolerable and fundamental risk reduction improvements are required.  Individual risk below 10-3 for but above 10-6 per annum for any worker shall be considered tolerable if it can be demonstrated that the risks are As Low As Reasonably Practicable (ALARP).  Individual risk below 10-6 per annum for any worker shall be considered as broadly acceptable and no further improvements are considered necessary provided documented control measures are in place and maintained.  Individual risk to any member of the general public as a result of Vedanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) Businesses activities shall be considered as intolerable if greater than10-4 per annum, broadly acceptable if less than 10-6 per annum and shall be reduced to As Low As Reasonably Practicable (ALARP) between these limits.  Vedanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) shall strive to achieve lower risks compared with that typical for existing facilities, down at least to an individual risk to any worker of 10-4 per annum, by the appropriate use of best practice including technology and management techniques. The risk acceptability criteria are indicated in the following pages. Risk Acceptance

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 163 In India, there are no defined criteria for risk acceptance. However, in IS 15656 – Code of Practice for Hazard Identification and Risk Analysis, Annexure E summarizes the risk criteria adopted in some countries. Extracts for the same is presented below:

RISK CRITERIA IN SOME COUNTRIES Maximum Tolerable Risk Negligible Risk Authority & Application (Per Year) (Per Year) VROM, The Netherlands (New) 1.0E-6 1.0E-8 VROM, The Netherlands (Existing) 1.0E-5 1.0E-8 HSE, UK (Existing Hazardous Industry) 1.0E-4 1.0E-6 HSE, UK (New Industry) 1.0E-5 1.0E-6 HSE, UK (Substance Transport) 1.0E-4 1.0E-6 HSE, UK (New Housing Near Plants) 3 x 1.0E-6 3 x 1.0E-7 Hong Kong Government (New Plants) 1.0E-5 Not Used To achieve the above risk acceptance criteria, ALARP principle was followed while suggesting risk reduction recommendations In the absence of any standard levels of acceptable risk in India, the values given in this report can be taken only as an indicative figure and not absolute which means the most damaging accident and the least damaging incident. It could be seen that the combined risk curves show that the operation areas and the storage tank areas can create a marginally higher risk levels to the surroundings in the form of individual and societal risk. Therefore, the recommendations have been arrived at taking into consideration the existing safeguards so that the risk levels can be brought down to the best advantage of the plant and its operations.

Figure 7.2: UK HSE-Individual Risk Criteria

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 164

Figure 7.3: UK HSE-Offsite Group Risk Criteria Scenarios with risk values higher than 1.0E-04 It could be seen from the above LSIR and FN Curve, The combined Individual risk is 1E-007/Avg Year and Societal Risk is 6.30000E-008 that the maximum contributors to the individual as well as societal risk is the Catastrophic Rupture of HSD Storage tanks notwithstanding the safeguards provided. 7.2.10 ALARP Demonstration Wherever risks are found to lie in the ALARP region, this suggests existing risk mitigating measures must be sustained and Best Industry Practices used. Any specific new risk reduction options may be evaluated through Cost Benefit Analysis (CBA). 7.2.11 Hazard Identification (HAZID), Consequence Analysis and Risk Results for the Project Hazard Identification is a very important and critical first step in the QRA process. The HAZID identifies process and non-process hazards affecting the project execution and operational stage. The main objective of the HAZID is to identify potential major accident events- it is important to ensure scenarios identified in the HAZID are factored into the QRA. 7.2.12 Shortlisting of Release Scenarios The range of incidents possible in the facility is established through identification of “Isolatable sections”, from which the different categories of leakages/ releases may occur. The Isolatable Sections comprise those where Emergency Shutdown Valves are in place isolating the section, even in emergency. Assumption Meeting for the purpose of identifying such sections and estimating inventories, release rates and other details relevant to the quantitative analysis. Guideline was utilized for deriving failure scenarios, release rates, inventories etc. Isolatable Sections are identified as follows:

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 165  The initial step is the identification of sources and their physical location  Calculation of the hold-up volumes within isolatable sections with respect to fluid within equipment and associated piping. The process isolation times, inventory release times etc. for the various leak sizes considered were taken at 5 minutes for small leaks (5 mm), 3 minutes for minor leaks (25 mm)- safe distance can be used for layout purpose 2 minutes for large leaks and 1 minute for catastrophic rupture. 7.2.13 Risk Calculation Risk Calculation is done by combining the Consequence Analysis results given vide section 8.3 with the estimated failure frequency and estimates of population within and outside the facility. However, other key study assumptions were discussed with Vedanta Limited (Cairn Oil & Gas). 7.2.14 Population The following plant population has been assumed for the study: - Table 7.5: Population

S. No Area Population (Day) Population (Night) Process Area (Heater Treater, Fuel Gas, Coalesing 1 25 25 Fiilter etc.) Process Area (Oil Storage Area, Instrument Air 2 5 5 etc.) 3 Loading, Unloading Area 2 1 4 Operator Bunker 2 1 5 Diesel Storage Area 2 1 6 Waster Area (Water, SBM etc.) 15 15 7 Toilet Block 2 0 8 Drilling/ Well Area 40 40

7.2.15 FN Curve The FN Curve drawn for this project is presented below. The FN Curve represents combined risk (during 5/D and 1.5 F) covering all the identified scenarios.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 166

Figure 7.4: FN Curve It could be seen from the above LSIR and FN Curve, The combined Individual risk is 1E-007/Avg Year and Societal Risk is 6.30000E-008 that the maximum contributors to the individual as well as societal risk is the Catastrophic Rupture of HSD Storage tanks notwithstanding the safeguards provided. 7.2.16 Location Specific Individual Risk (LSIR) LSIR is the risk for a hypothetical individual who is positioned at that location for 24 hours a day 365 days per year. Since in reality people do not remain continuously at one location, LSIR is a notional risk measure. From the below figure (combined during 5/D and 1.5 F) it can be seen that the maximum risk level lies in the band of 1E-003 /Avge year (within the fence) and 1E-004 /Avge year –this risk band extends towards the west for a distance of approx. 20 meters from the plot boundary. It may be noted that this risk level is on the higher side for public areas (normally acceptable risk level is 1E-006/Avge year). It is suggested that either heater treater unit, Coalescing filter skid and Fuel gas unit may be shifted 20 meters towards east to prevent any outside risk or to ensure there are no vegetating in this area.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 167

7.2.17 Individual Specific Individual Risk (ISIR) The Location Specific Individual Risk is the risk to a person who is assumed to be at the specific location 365 days a year and 24 hours a day. A more representative risk measure is the “Individual Specific Individual Risk (ISIR). This is the risk estimated accounting for the time fraction a person actually spent at a specific location. The calculation for this is done based on the consideration of Personnel working. An average working period of 12 hours per day are considered and the results are presented below in tabular form.  ISIR= LSIR×1/2×1/2×Time Spent/12 Table 7.6 Total ISIR Operations/Maintenance Staff

S. No Area LSIR Time Spent in hrs ISIR 1 Coaleser Area 2.12E-03 6 2.65E-04 2 Control Room 1.14E-03 9 2.14E-04 3 DG Area 7.12E-04 1 1.48E-05 4 Diesel Area 3.87E-04 3 2.42E-05 5 Flare Area 1.12E-04 0.5 1.17E-06 6 Heater Treater Area 5.64E-03 6 7.05E-04 7 Loading Area 1.99E-05 2 8.28E-07 8 Oil Storage Area 6.71E-04 5 6.99E-05 9 Well Area 5.86E-03 4 4.88E-04

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 168 S. No Area LSIR Time Spent in hrs ISIR 10 Fuel Gas Area 2.02E-03 5 2.10E-04 Total 3.44E-06

Table 7.7 Total ISIR Non-Operation/ Maintenance Staff

S. No Area LSIR Time Spent in hrs ISIR 1 Fire Water Area 1.29E-08 2 5.38E-10 2 Toilet Block 1.29E-08 1 2.69E-10 3 Security Cabin 1.00E-07 10 2.08E-08 4 Operator Block 1.00E-07 4 8.33E-09 Total 3.00E-08

From the above values it is seen that the operation/maintenance ISIR value is in ALARP range for operation person and broadly acceptable for Non-operation. The following measures are available to address the same.  Safeguarding of human life is Cairn Oil & Gas top most priority. To this effect, Vedanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) has issued and implemented a comprehensive HSE POLICY backed up with appropriate safety management systems and procedures.  Vedanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) operating procedures lay a strong focus on hazard identification and risk assessment covering each and every hazardous operation, procedure and equipment. Risks and mitigating measures for each are clearly carried out and measures implemented and monitored. This ensures risk minimisation to the worker group.  The facility is built based on the highest international standards and global best practice. Individual equipment is of highest quality, certified and of highest safety integrity. This ensures risk minimisation to the worker group through operational and maintenance periods. In addition, equipment hazard identification has to be carried out for each of the equipment time to time.  Mock drills should be carried out periodically to ensure the highest state of emergency response incase of any incident. All key personnel roles and responsibilities are pre-defined, rehearsed and kept up to date. This would ensure minimum damage during any incident and is an important risk minimisation measure.  Over and above the points indicated, it may he noted that there are several other Safety Management Systems in place to ensure minimum risks to the worker group. Risks to the worker group are recognised and the company management had taken comprehensive steps and measures to ensure minimum risk to the worker group. As and when newer and more advanced measures are identified through the project life cycle, the management is open to implement them.  Oil Spill Contingency plan to be followed throughout the project life cycle.

7.2.18 Risk Reduction Measures The main conclusions drawn from the Consequence Analysis and Risk calculations are given below- critical actions for safeguarding against the incidents are also mentioned below: -  From the F-N Curve, it is observed that the integrated risks lie within the “ALARP” range. -this suggests existing risk mitigating measures must be sustained and Best Industry Practices be used. Any specific new risk reduction options may be evaluated through Cost Benefit Analysis (CBA).  From the below figure it can be seen that the maximum risk level lies in the band of 1E-003 /Avge year (within the fence) and 1E-004 /Avge year –this risk band extends towards the west for a distance of Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 169 approx. 20 meters from the plot boundary. It may be noted that this risk level is on the higher side for public areas (normally acceptable risk level is 1E-006/Avge year). It is suggested that either heater treater unit, Coalescing filter skid and Fuel gas unit may be shifted 20 meters towards east to prevent any outside risk or to ensure there are no vegetating in this area.  It is seen that the control room is falls under 1E-03 /Avge year it advised to shift the Control room to a safe location.  As Living Quarters are likely to be affected due to large incidents on the Rig Floor, it is essential to ensure the upkeep of the safety devices (Smoke Detection, Fast Rescue Craft (FRC), escape routes and it must be ensured that Mock evacuation drills are carried out periodically.  Escape routes for personnel on the Drill Floor towards the LQ must be properly protected and kept free of any debris/obstructions etc. to ensure minimum loss of life.  The correct installation of Safety Critical Equipment and their operational reliability are essential for the safety of the facility. In addition, initial and periodic testing of the Safety Critical Equipment before installation and periodically is absolutely essential and the same must be ensured.  Storage tank enclosures must be drained periodically during the rainy season in particular.  As hydrocarbon related risks exist at the facility, ignition source control must be ensured during routine and non routine operations.  Ensuring that the public in vicinity of the facility is made aware of the hazards and also the hazards of unplanned and irregular third-party activities- this may be done through frequent safety awareness programmes, warning signage, explicit display of Do’s and Don’ts etc.  Emergency Response Drills must be carried out frequently both internally within Vedanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) and also involving external authorities. Lessons learnt must be assimilated and disseminated to concerned persons.  The correct installation of the Safety Critical Equipment and their operational reliability are essential for the safety of the facility. In addition, initial and periodic testing of the Safety Critical Equipment before installation and periodically is essential and the same must be ensured.  For Jetfire scenarios for small leaks may be safeguarded against through proper fire protection means (Fire and gas Detectors, Passive and Active firefighting systems, structural fire proofing, sprinklers, monitors, hydrants etc). Proper firefighting system design and implementation and fire drills, training etc. are essential and must be sustained through the project life cycle.  The damage distance arises due to the Flash Fire mitigated by ensuring the that the area must be kept free of ignition sources to the extent possible and the same must be ensured even during maintenance activity. Non-sparking tools must be used and personnel entering the area must be “de-earthed” before entering. A hazardous area classification study is suggested for placement of electrical equipment in the classified area.  The damage distance for pool fire arising due the pool fire for small leaks shall be safeguarded against through proper fire protection means (Fire and gas Detectors, Passive and Active firefighting systems, structural fire proofing, sprinklers, monitors, hydrants etc. Proper firefighting system design and implementation and fire drills, training etc. are essential and must be sustained through the project life cycle.  The Fireball result is provided for Catastrophic rupture case of IS-02.  Key non-routine activities must be preceded by a Job Safety Analysis and Job or Task Risk Assessment involving key personnel that would be working on the facility.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 170  Work Permit System must be implemented during the construction and operational phases of the project to safeguard against any accidents. It must subsequently also cover the operational phase.  Trips and falls hazard, electrical hazards etc. must be minimized through periodic safety audits and site inspections using third party and Internal audit teams. Actions arising out of the audits must be implemented in a time bound manner and followed up for closure.  Vedanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) must ensure suitable training to all personnel (Company as well as Contractor personnel) to help prevent incidents/ accidents- such training must be refreshed periodically, and a list of trained personnel must be maintained by Vedanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil & Gas)  The facility and connected equipment/ systems must be ensured to minimize failure potential.  As ignition related risks exist at the facility, ignition source control must be ensured during routine and non-routine operations.  Apart from the process risks assessed, another very important category of incidents possible are those associated with well operations. These risks could include uncontrolled blowouts, incidents associated with rig movement/rig walk, wireline risks during wireline operations, well bore clean out risks, risks associated with specific chemicals during drilling/well repair/ activation/other activities. These must be very closely assessed by a specialist team (should include the workover contractor) prior to start of the activity. Apart from the close study of risks, a SIMOPS or Simultaneous Operations assessment must also be carried out incase specific well workover activities are taking place in proximity to flowing or operational wells. This must be ensured.  On-site personnel are subject to standard occupational risks and Vedanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) must direct effort and resources into reducing these risks. Incidents connected with well operations, dropped objects, personnel falls from height, electrocution incidents etc. are top priorities which Vedanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) should concentrate significant effort to prevent, prepare for and respond to. This must be implemented through the Vedanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) HSE Management System.  HAZOP to be done once design is reasonably complete and before start up. In addition, a basic safeguarding must be in place during the testing/early production phase- well shut/ surface facilities basic shut down must be possible. A basic functioning F&G system too must be put in place with well shut down incase of F&G activation. Initial phase well behavior could be unpredictable and necessary safeguarding must be in place- essentially, the EPS must be equipped with basic shutdown facilities, typically “fit for purpose”. It is also necessary that initial well operations are manned continuously- this of course, will be the case, since data logging/monitoring would also be taking place.  Storage Tank vents to be routed at safe height and location to acvoid toxic/sudden vapour egress with toxic/flammable hazard.  Heater Treater BMS to be checked thoroughly before being put on line and necessary leak and performance tests to be ensured properly. Burner light up sequences should be properly established and necessary site verification tests etc. carried out  Choke internals to be of suitable anti abrasive material-= this will be able to cater to possible sanding issues, well debris etc.  Specific procedures to address sanding operations/ sand flushout must be in place.  It must be ensured that Storage Tanks and Road Tankers are NOT overfilled (not more than 80%)- set points/ SOP to capture the same

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 171  Road Tanker Bottom filling option is preferred- in case of top loading, OISD 157 (https://oilweb.oilindia.in/OISD_Standard/oisd%20standard_old/Std-157.doc) guidelines to be followed for critical points  Ensure proper (metallic/ metal braided) hoses, gaskets etc. and Road tanker earthing is properly executed.  F&G system periodic testing and maintenance to be ensured to prevent major escalation scenario.  Periodic cleaning to be ensured for flame arrestors of storage tanks to prevent any Blockage/LOC scenario.

7.3 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN In view of the hazardous nature of products / process handled in the project, Disaster Management Plans (DMPs) has been prepared. These plans are based on various probable scenarios like Well Blow Out, Fire, Explosion, Natural Calamities, etc. The consequence arising out of such incidents are accurately predicted with the help of latest technique available by various Risk Analysis Studies. To minimize the extent of damage consequent to any disaster and restoration of normalcy is the main purpose of DMP. The on site Emergency Plans will deal with handling of the emergency within boundary of the plants mainly with the help of industry’s own resources. Also, when the damage extends to the neighbouring areas, affecting local population beyond boundaries of plant, Off-site Emergency plans will be put into action in which quick response and services of many agencies are involved e.g. District Authorities, Fire Services, Civil Defence, Medical, Police, Voluntary Organizations etc. 7.3.1 Objective of DMP The following are the main objective of Disaster Management Plan:  Safeguarding lives both at installations and in neighbourhood.  Containing the incident & bringing it under control.  Minimizing damage to property & environment.  Resuscitation & treatment of causalities.  Evacuating people to safe area.  Identifying persons and to extend necessary welfare assistance to causalities. Finally, when situation is controlled, efforts are to be made to return to normal or near normal conditions. 7.3.2 Emergency Identified Typical emergency situations which the Vedanta Ltd. (Cairn Oil & gas) business has identified that could occur within its field of operations are:  Well Blowout  Fire / Explosion  Gas Leakage (H2S, Natural Gas, etc.)  Natural disaster such as earthquake, floods, storms, etc.  Human injuries from accidents, falls, etc.  Motor vehicle, road incidents  Security incidents such as hold-ups, kidnapping, bomb threats, etc 7.3.3 Emergency Classification - Tiers of Emergency Response Response strategies shall be commensurate with the nature, scale and associated hazards and risks for relevant emergency event. The emergencies are classified as Tier 1, 2 & 3. The examples of Tier 1, 2 and 3 incidents are given in table below.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 172 Table 7.8: Emergency Classification & Response Team

Emergency Category Response Health & Safety Environment Security / Levels Community Tier 1 ─ A minor Incident where ─ Emergency Response Teams ─ Minor medical or injury case ─ Minor oil spill < 100T(700b bls) ─ Minor security breach Local site / location team ─ (IRT)/(ERT) requiring no external ─ Onsite environmental Exposure ─ Theft from site Reactive requires no external support contained with internal efforts ─ Local unrest assistance and can control ─ Equipment damage with e.g. chemical spill the incident with local loss of production ─ Notification of cyclone within resources ─ Minor fire with minor injury 72 hrs ─ Incident Controller must or plant damage notify the leader of the ─ Rescue of trapped and ERT or EMT as applicable injured personnel Tier 2 ─ Substantial Incident ─ Emergency Management ─ Any incident requiring ─ Oil spill from >100T but <1000T ─ Community protest or Tactical ─ EMT leader decides to Team additional / external (700–7000bbls) security breach activate EMT ─ (EMT) resources ─ Environmental exposure ─ Major criminal activity ─ EMT leader must notify ─ Fire or Explosion requiring outside help CMT Leader ─ Injury or illness requires ─ Earthquake evacuation ─ Flood or Cyclone warning ─ Traffic accident requires Yellow alert –within 12 hours external assistance ─ Well blow out Tier 3 ─ Crisis situation ─ Crisis Management Team ─ Incident leading to loss of ─ Oil spill more than 1000T ─ Terrorist activities /bomb Strategic ─ CMT leader decides to (CMT) facility (7000bbls) threat activate CMT CMT leader ─ Incident leading to ─ Major Earthquake ─ Kidnap or extortion /threat must notify the Chief significant financial loss ─ Major civil unrest Executive Officer ─ Incident leading to multiple /community protest injuries or fatality ─ Total loss of marine vessel / vessel hitting platform ─ Helicopter crash ─ Well blowout ─ Incident which could lead to international media interest ─ Major traffic incident with multiple casualties

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 173 7.3.4 On-site Emergency Response Plan The Onsite & Offsite Disaster Management Plan (DMP) and Emergency Response Plan (ERP) are planned for facilities, which are also extended to proposed activities. The scope of the DMP On-site Emergency Preparedness Plan is to evaluate the various types of emergencies that can occur at rig installations and processing/production facilities (Drilling and Production activities) and to formulate emergency plans, procedures that can be implemented by Vedanta Ltd. (Cairn Oil & Gas) in house. In case the contingency exceed in dimension or geographical coverage beyond Vedanta Ltd. (Cairn Oil & Gas)’s capability, the offsite Emergency plan shall be activated concurrently with the help of District administration Based on the incident classification and response team matrix mentioned above, Incident Response Team, Emergency Response Team and Emergency Management Team gets involved. Tier 1 Incident Response Team (IRT):  The emergency or incident can be effectively and safely managed, and contained within the site, location or facility by local staff.  Emergency or incident has no impact outside the site, location or facility. IRT may provide support through effective interaction with local stakeholders.  Loss of life or severe environmental damage or material loss of asset or organisation’s reputation is not a consequence of event / emergency. Tier 1 incidents are managed by Site IRT, each site has own IRT. Tier 1 Emergency Response Team (ERT):  The ERT provide assistance and local support to the IRT’s in relevant area.  The ERT have access to local outside site / external emergency services.  For tier 2 emergency events. Tier 2 Emergency Management Team (EMT)  The incident cannot be effectively and safely managed or contained at the site location or facility by operational local staff and additional support is required.  The incident is having or has potential of impact beyond the site, location or facility and external support may be required.  Loss of life or severe environment damage or loss of asset or organisation’s reputation is possible consequence of event / emergency.  IRT may provide support through effective interactions with local stakeholders.  ERT acts as interface between EMT and IRT for Midstream pipeline operations. Tier 2 EMT is primarily for tactical response to the incident but may on occasions required to act in reactive mode. Tier 3 Crisis Management Team (CMT):  The incident has escalated to a level having potential of loss of life, adverse effect on public or company’s operations / reputation.  Incident may have requirement of immediate action / guidance from Top Management. Tier 3 incidents are incident escalating to the point requiring involvement of CMT

7.3.5 Responsibilities of the Individual Response Organizations The Incident Response Team is responsibility for managing all incidents and emergencies which may occur at or in close proximity to their operational area. For emergencies where additional / external support is required the person in charge of the incident response, the Incident Controller at a remote location, site or facility must notify and request support and assistance from the next level in

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 174 the emergency management organisation. The ERT / EMT should be notified of all incidents within 30 minutes of the IRT activation at a remote location, site or facility. The key role and responsibilities of the IRT Leader will be  To manage the response to any and all incident or emergencies at the Site, Plant or Field Location  To Control the incident by preventing escalation and minimizing risk to personnel  Direct and coordinate the activities of the Incident Control and Forward Response Teams.  Ensuring sufficient trained and competent personnel are available to support the Response Teams.  Ensuring the safety of all personnel working at the Site, Plant or Field location  Evaluate and initiate immediate actions, to contain and mitigate effects of the incident or emergency. Monitor the situation & determine need for evacuation.  Establish head count and potential whereabouts of any missing personnel and if necessary prepare search, rescue and recovery plan.  Follow Incident Response Plan and if required develop a plan of action to deal with the incident or emergency and communicating this plan to the IRT members Emergency Response Team (ERT) – Pipeline (Reactive/Tactical) This is Emergency Response Team, responsible for coordinating overall incident and emergency response for pipeline incident at any of midstream pipeline locations. The role and responsibilities of the ERT Leader will be:  Co-ordination and Support of responses for all incident and emergency situations for the pipeline;  Reporting all incident and emergency situations in the pipeline operations to the EMT Leader in line with notification requirements;  Provide and deploy additional resources as needed by the Incident Controller;  Ensure all direct communications with the EMT;  Determine the actual and possible impact of the incident;  Ensure that information associated with the incident is promptly considered by the Support Team; Emergency Management Team (EMT) – Tactical/Strategic Response In the event of an incident or emergency the Emergency Management Team Leader will make a decision whether or not to mobilise the EMT. If the decision is taken to mobilise the EMT then all EMT duty personnel are required to proceed promptly to the Emergency Management Team Room and manage emergency in accordance with their role, responsibility and as directed by the duty EMT Leader. DOA shall be nominated for absence. The EMT organisation has following roles and responsibilities:  EMT Leader – In overall in-charge / team leader, responsible for Company’s tactical response to all emergency situations in respective SBU. They are also responsible for reporting incidents to the regulating authorities.  Human Resources Coordinator – Responsible for providing HR services advice and support  Logistics Co-ordinator – Responsible for providing transport and logistics support as required  Operation and Technical Coordinator – Responsible for providing operational and technical support and advice

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 175

 Finance – Responsible for providing financial support and advice.  HSE Coordinator – Responsible for providing health, safety, environmental support and response.  Recorder – Responsible for maintaining a timed log of key events and actions  Security Coordinator – Responsible for providing security support advice and assisting others as required by EMT Leader The above list identifies a number of key EMT roles, following additional supporting roles may be called on when as and when required, typical roles being:  Air Medevac Nodal Officer – Responsible for facilitating air medevac.  IT/Telecommunication Co-ordinator – Responsible for providing the EMT with technical support associated with the communications hardware and software  Company Medical Officer – Responsible for providing advice and assistance on health and medical issues.  Legal – Responsible for providing support on legal / regulatory aspects.  Public Relation / Corp Com – Responsible for communication with media and external stake holders.  Contractor’s representatives – who may be called in to assist the EMT should the incident involve members of their organisation Crisis Management Team (CMT) Roles The Crisis Management Team is comprised of small core of senior executives. The CMT will collectively have responsibility for all major actions taken before; during, and after the crisis situation has occurred. The role and responsibilities of the CMT will be:  Select additional specialist resources to join the CMT or to advise the CMT during a crisis, depending on the nature of the crisis  Develop and implement crisis management strategy  Develop and communicate the operating mandate of the CMT to those with responsibility for the on-scene activities  Nominate spokesperson to cover media interviews  Establish contact and communicate with appropriate government or other agencies  Prepare to coordinate business continuity and recovery strategy

7.3.6 Emergency Response Strategies / Evacuation Plan Emergency response strategies (ERS) are the documented decisions on required emergency response measures for identified emergencies, based on risk evaluation and assessment process. It shall consider all statutory requirements applicable to the installations. The objective of ERS is to identify the means to be used to secure adequate emergency response. It provides basis for monitoring of the adequacy of the emergency response measures so that they can be modified when essential. ERS should include appropriate standard of performance for response measures associated with each type of identified major accident hazard and installation specific factors. ERS should include the following elements:  Organisation  Procedures  Equipment  Information

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 176

 Competency building measures (Training & refresher courses and Drills & exercises)  The role of any other measure essential for achieving successful emergency response Emergency response measures shall consider the available resources as below:  Installation resources: They are immediately available on the installation and are under control of installation Manager / In-charge. These include personnel and equipment that can be assigned emergency role.  Area resources: These resources are available on the installations in the vicinity, within same area and are not under control of Installation In-charge. The resources may be available within the Vedanta Ltd. (Cairn Oil & Gas) or available by a mutual aid or cooperation agreement.  External resources: These resources are available by a mutual aid or cooperation agreement at regional, national or international level and include organisations, professional bodies and resource persons. The general requirements as per Vedanta Technical Standard VED/CORP/SUST/TS 13 on Emergency and Crisis Management are:  Crisis situations shall be managed centrally by Cairn Oil and Gas business, in accordance with the requirements outlined in the standard.  SBU operations shall also have procedures in place to ensure crisis situations are escalated to Cairn Oil and Gas business and Vedanta Group as appropriate.  Emergency situations shall be managed by SBU operations and reported to Cairn Oil and Gas business and Vedanta Group as appropriate.  Incidents shall be managed at the SBU operation level and reported in accordance with SBU operations, Cairn Oil and Gas business, Vedanta Group and regulatory reporting requirements. Also refer Management Standard MS11 on Incident Reporting, Escalation and Investigation.  Emergency Preparedness and Response Plans shall be developed, implemented and maintained at the SBU operation, Cairn Oil and Gas business and Group level to deal with incidents, emergencies and crisis situations. Additional Vedanta Ltd. (Cairn Oil and Gas) requirements are:  The objective of emergency response planning is to have clear written procedures for expected actions during anticipated emergencies. Emergency response plan includes operational and procedural requirements for various emergency scenarios that are relevant for the installation.  Ensure that appropriate resources and incident / emergency response plans are prepared, practiced and available. The procedures shall include provision for emergency arrangements with contractors.  Critical resources of emergency response should include: o Emergency power systems o Fire and gas detection systems o Active fire protection o Passive fire protection o Shutdown system o Explosion mitigation and protection systems o Evacuation, escape and rescue arrangements  Every Cairn business unit (including projects and offices) shall be covered by trained Incident and Emergency Management Teams who will manage and execute the emergency plans.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 177

 All members of the emergency organisations should be trained and competent to perform their assigned role within the incident response (IRT) / emergency response (ERT) / emergency management (EMT).  Arrangements for emergency medical treatment shall consider injuries to persons as a result of minor accidents & major accidental events, illness of persons on installation, transportation & evacuation of sick and injured personnel.  Controlled medicines shall be stored in a secure place accessible only to those who are trained to administer these.  The level of medical facilities and trained personnel provided should be in line with the requirements identified in emergency response strategy. Key points to be considered is identification of medical facilities / hospitals  Emergency response plans shall comply with all relevant legislative and regulatory requirements to ensure emergency capabilities are maintained and achieved.  Procedure for designing emergency response measures should be based on:  Integration of emergency response with / into design and operations  Automatic or remotely operated safety systems to mitigate the effects of an incident  Emergency response organisation structure  Wherever applicable offsite emergency response / disaster management plans shall be ensured.  Essential safety system (such as control stations, temporary refuge, muster areas, fire pumps) shall be located where they are least likely to be affected by fires and explosions.  Emergency shut down (ESD) system shall be designed such, that it is capable of fulfilling its function under the conditions of incident. If installation is in operation, the essential shutdown functions shall be available during maintenance activities, which affect the operation of the ESD system. ESD system shall contain facilities for testing of both input / output devices and internal functions.  Evacuation and escape routes shall be provided from all areas of an installation where personnel may be expected to be present during their normal activities. Alternative means to allow persons to safely leave the installation in an emergency shall be provided.  Evacuation and escape routes shall have adequate illumination with emergency lighting and shall be marked to ensure that ‘they can be used during emergency conditions’. All escape routes shall be unobstructed (including vertical clearance) and readily accessible.  Personal protective equipment for use in major accident hazards should be suitable for the circumstances in which it may have to be used and the individuals who may have to use it.  PPE for use in an emergency should be for all persons on the installation for use in condition of fire, heat, gas release or smoke to enable them to reach muster areas, temporary refuges and evacuation or escape points. Those with specific emergency duties shall also be provided appropriate PPE for use like fire suits and breathing apparatus etc.  During an emergency, security arrangements shall ensure that unauthorised persons do not enter the incident site by controlling assess and if need arises the area around the site can be evacuated and cordoned to ensure safety of the persons.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 178

 Environmental emergency response should consider: o Oil-pollution control equipment that should be located on the installation o Environmental conditions that may be present when the equipment is deployed o Capacity of the oil recovery system o Characteristics of the oil / emulsion to be recovered o Means to identify the extent of the spill o Facilities to handle any recovered oil.  International conventions have introduced the requirements to develop national plans for oil-spill response in offshore, and Offshore Assets / SBUs / Operations should ensure that their installations’ emergency response plans are aligned with the national requirements. Responsibilities of the Employees The establishment and maintenance of best possible conditions of work is, no doubt, the responsibility of the Project Management. It is also necessary that each employee follows prescribed safe methods of work. He should take reasonable care for the health and safety of himself, or his fellow employees and of other persons who may be affected by his action at work. With this in mind, employees shall be trained to be health and safety conscious in the following aspects: Report Potential Hazards Observe Safety rules, procedures and codes of practice Use Tools and equipments with all care and responsibility Participate In safety training course when called upon to do so. Make Use Of safety suggestion schemes. Take An active and personal interest in promoting health and safety Each unit shall identify and document the resources required to ensure the effective implementation of the emergency and crisis management procedures. Resource requirements shall meet the requirements of the Vedanta Management Standard MS01 on Leadership, Responsibilities and Resources. The following resources shall be considered and made available as necessary:  Trained and competent personnel;  Equipment and other materials including Personal Protective Equipment (PPE);  Warning devices;  Medical services, including personnel trained in first aid, and medical equipment that is appropriate to the type of operation;  Emergency services support; and  Emergency funding, along with an appropriate mechanism for delivering funds. The capacity of external resources, such as local firefighting capacity, shall be assessed, and additional resources acquired and maintained at the operation where external resources are deemed insufficient. The resources identified shall be maintained and tested on a regular basis, and their adequacy reviewed periodically. Communication Systems Emergency response relies upon effective and reliable communication between all personnel involved in response. Communication systems shall:  Provide sufficient reliable information / alarm to personnel on the installation to enable them to take the appropriate emergency actions.  Provide means for those on the installation to communicate with the person in overall charge.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 179

 Provide reliable arrangements to allow the person in overall charge to communicate with all personnel on the installation regarding the nature of any emergency and the actions they are required to take.  Provide reliable means to allow the person in overall charge to communicate with area and external resources who have a role in emergency response.  Suitable equipment, information processing and procedures shall be in place to enable effective communications. The means of communication shall be selected based on the need for communication in likely scenarios including operational conditions under which they are to function like, noise, ambient conditions and susceptibility to damage. So far as reasonable, communication arrangements should remain available throughout the emergency  Alarm signals used and their meanings should be described in the emergency response plan along with the procedures to be followed in the event of an alarm. Persons should be provided with adequate information to allow them to, initiate alarms where necessary, distinguish between alarms and respond to alarms.  Adequate alarms and warning devices, along with other forms of communication, shall be maintained to reliably alert persons across the whole site in the event of an emergency.  Independent secondary / back-up communications systems shall be provided in case the emergency incident makes the normal communication system inoperable. Ensure that the means are in place to alert to the connected installations, the local community / neighboring businesses in the event of an emergency that has the potential interface with them.

7.3.7 Training and Emergency Response Drills / Mock All persons on the installation or in connected activities (including contractor’s personnel) shall be trained periodically for emergency response and evacuation procedures. Training for employees having assigned roles in emergency response shall be completed before they are called upon to perform in real emergencies. Emergency response organisation structure (IRT/ERT/EMT/CMT) shall ensure command by competent persons, which can be maintained, so far as is practicable, throughout an emergency.  Key persons such as the Installation Incharge and Shift Incharge / control room operator shall be assessed for required competence to perform emergencies duties before assigning of duties. As far as possible, assessment should be under simulated emergency conditions.  Competency and training needs shall meet the requirements of the Vedanta management Standard MS06 on Competency, Training and Awareness  An emergency response table top exercise / emergency response drill is a focused activity that places the participants in a simulated situation requiring them to function in the capacity that would be expected of them in a real event. Its purpose is to ensure preparedness by testing policies and plans and by training personnel. One objective of an exercise is to be able to identify problem areas for resolution/ corrective action before an actual emergency occurs.  The drills need to address the readiness of personnel and their familiarity / proficiency with emergency equipment and procedures. All personnel on the installation involved including contractor’s employees should participate in the drills.  The drills and table top exercises shall be carried out as often as appropriate, against documented schedule. To be scheduled regularly, at least once a year for full drills and

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 180

six monthly for desk-based exercises, although the exact frequency and type of drills may depend on the nature and scale of the operations, and the associated risks.  Emergency response plan shall be reviewed and revised as appropriate in line with the findings from drills and table top exercises.  Involve external emergency response agencies and other external stakeholders, where appropriate.

7.3.8 Performance Measures  Key elements of functionality, survivability, reliability and availability shall be included in performance standards. Achievability of performance standards should be validated.  Effective operations, inspection, testing and maintenance procedures shall be established to ensure that the functional requirements of the equipment and systems provided for emergency escape, evacuation and rescue response are maintained.  A written scheme shall be prepared, detailing the inspection, testing and maintenance routines and frequencies to be followed. All emergency equipment and systems shall be thoroughly inspected, following established procedures. Adequate records of the results of the inspection, testing and maintenance shall be kept and shall be periodically reviewed to confirm that the written scheme is appropriate and is being adequately implemented. 7.3.9 Monitoring, Evaluation and Review Documented reviews should be carried out after all drills and actual emergency responses to determine the effectiveness of the Emergency Preparedness and Response Plans, with a full debrief to identify what worked well and what aspects require improvement. Lessons learned following exercises or actual emergency situations/incidents shall be documented, and any gaps in planning and implementation shall be addressed in revised versions of the Emergency Preparedness and Response Plans. Lessons learned shall be shared across Vedanta’s operations where appropriate. All Emergency Preparedness and Response Plans shall be reviewed and updated periodically, at least on an annual basis, to ensure they remain appropriate and relevant. Reviews shall also meet the requirements of the Vedanta Management Standard MS14 on Management Review and Continual Improvement.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 181

7.3.10 Preventive and Mitigation Measures for Well Blow out Blow-out (uncontrolled gushing of oil & gas) is the worst situation, which may arise at oil wells during drilling, work-over operations, perforation, and reservoir studies at active wells, etc. or due to some unforeseen reasons. A blow out, though rare, in a drilling operation is often accompanied by fire and explosion exposing workers to serious danger to their lives, burns and poisoning. To understand the failure modes resulting to formation of kick and subsequent blow outs, one has to understand the safety systems installed for blow out prevention. Prevention of blow outs rests primarily on control of any kick in the well bore. A kick means entry of formation fluids into well bore in large enough quantity to require shutting in the well under pressure. Once a kick is detected, steps can be taken to control entry of formation fluids into the well bore by over balancing the expected bottom hole pressure with properly conditioned mud and operation of safety valves i.e. Blow Out Preventer (BOP), whereby the space between the drill pipes and the casings can be closed and well itself shut off completely. Several instruments are provided on a drilling rig for detection of kicks.

7.3.11 Instrumentation in Mud System Continuous monitoring of condition of mud in the well provides information useful for well control. The following processes are used in the drilling mud system for this purpose:  A pit level indicator registering increase or decrease in drilling mud volume. It is connected with an audio-visual alarm near the drillers control panel.  A trip with float-marking device to accurately measure the volume of mud going in to the well. This is useful to keep the well fed with required quantity of mud at all times.  A gas detector or explosive meter installed at the primary shale shaker together with an audio-visual alarm at the drillers control panel to indicate the well presence of gas-cut mud in the well.  The kick in the well is prevented by keeping the hydrostatic head of the drilling fluid greater than the formation pressure. The primary control can be lost in the following situations:  If there is reduction in hydrostatic pressure in the well due to swabbing, which maybe caused if the drilling string is pulled out too fast or by a balled-up or clogged bit, which is indicated by insufficient filling of mud. 7.3.12 Preventive Measures for Handling Natural Gas The natural gas is a colourless, odourless, flammable gas, mainly methane which may cause flash fire. Electrostatic charge may be generated by flow, agitation etc. No occupational exposure limits have been established for natural gas. The preventive measures to be taken to avoid impact due to leakages are  Provide local exhaust ventilation system: Ventilation equipment should be explosion- resistant if explosive concentrations of material are present.  Gloves: Wear appropriate chemical resistant gloves.  Respirator: Under conditions of frequent use or heavy exposure, respiratory protection may be needed.

7.3.13 Leakage of H2S Gas Hydrogen sulphide is a colourless, flammable, extremely hazardous gas with “rotten egg” smell. Low concentrations of H2S irritate the eyes, nose, throat and respiratory system e.g. burning / tearing of

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 182 eyes, cough, and shortness of breath. Repeated or prolonged exposures may cause eye inflammation, headache, fatigue, irritability, insomnia, digestive disturbances and weight loss. The preventive measures to be taken up in case of leakages are:  Stop the source of leakage (i.e. close the well)  Remove victim, if any to fresh air, if breathing, maintain victim at rest & administer oxygen, if available, if person is not breathing, start artificial respiration immediately or start mechanical/ automatic resuscitator. Call ambulance and sent victim to hospital or doctor.  Avoid & extinguish all naked flames  Pull out all inflammable material i.e. HSD, Gas Cylinders, Chemicals etc. from the premises of well / installation.  Pull out all possible equipment to safe distances.  Call for fire tender and start spraying water on the sources of leakage to dissolve H2S in water.  Evacuate personnel in 500 mts area from down wind direction.  Warn nearby inhabitants, if required.  Cordon off the area & do not allow entry of any unauthorized person. Vedanta Ltd. (Cairn Oil & Gas)’s operations in the Block have indicated that there is no naturally occurring H2S in the reservoir and therefore release of H2S during drilling operations is not expected.

7.3.14 Preventing Fire and Explosion Hazards Fire is one of the major hazards, related to oil and natural gas well. Fire prevention and code enforcement is the area of responsibility of the fire service. Safe operating practices reduce the probability of an accidental fire on a platform. Personnel should understand their duties and responsibilities and be attentive to conditions that might lead to fire. The following precautions are recommended:  Fire control cannot be achieved until the source of fuel and ignition is isolated. Fire control cannot be achieved until the source of fuel and ignition is isolated. An emergency shut down (ESD) system shall be provided to isolate the installation from the major hydrocarbon inventories within pipelines and reservoirs, which if released on failure, would pose an intolerable risk to personnel, environment and the equipment / assets.  There should be provision for safe handling and storage of dirty rags, trash and waste oil. Flammable liquids and chemicals spilled on platform should be immediately cleaned.  Containers of paints and HC samples, gas cylinders should be stored properly. Gas cylinders should be transported in hand-carts  Cutting and welding operations should be conducted in accordance with safe procedures  Smoking should be restricted to designated platform areas and “no smoking” areas should be clearly identified by warning signs  Platform equipment should be maintained in good operating condition and kept free from external accumulation of dust and hydrocarbons. Particular attention should be given to crude oil pump, seals, diesel and gas engines which could be potential source of ignition in the event of a failure

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 183

 The Disaster Management Plan will address the issue of a fire event at any location on the well and the procedure to be adopted in the very unlikely event of this occurring. If a fire starts in any well, that section of the well will be isolated by closing the section (block) valves, as quickly as possible and surrounding facilities will be cooled with water.

7.3.15 Off-site Emergency Plan The Off-Site Emergency Plan is a compilation of various emergency scenarios and also includes the probable impact off-site locations due to emergency and the action plan to combat / mitigate the consequences of a disaster situation. Emergency is a sudden unexpected event, which can cause serious damage to personnel life, property and environment as a whole, which necessitate evolving off-site emergency plan to combat any such eventuality. Emergencies can be handled by an organized multi-disciplinary approach. If it becomes necessary to evacuate people, then this can be done in orderly way. Under the Environmental (Protection) Act 1986, the responsibility of preparation of Off-Site Emergency Plan lies with the State Government. The Collector/ Deputy Collector by virtue of their occupation are normally nominated by the concerned State Government to plan Off-Site Emergency Plan. The different agencies involved in evacuation of people are civil administration (both state and central) and police authorities.

Purpose  To save life and prevent/reduce loss of properties  To make explicit inter related set of actions to be undertaken in the event of an accident posing hazards to the community  To plan for rescue and recuperation of casualties and injuries. To plan for relief and rehabilitation  To plan for prevention of harms, total loss and recurrence of disaster. It will be ensured that absolute safety and security is achieved within the shortest time The activities of the government, Non-Government organizations and concerned personnel involved in off-site disaster management plan are as follows: These will include the safety procedures to be followed during emergencies such as posters, talks and mass media in different languages including local language. Leaflets containing do’s/ don’ts should be circulated to educate the people in vicinity Medical Help consisted of doctors and supporting staff for medical help to the injured persons because of disaster should be formed. Functions and duties of the committee include, providing first Said treatment for injured at the spot or at some convenient place and shift those to nearby hospitals for further treatment if required The police will assist in controlling of the accident site, organizing evacuation and shifting of injured people to nearby hospitals. The fire brigade shall organize to put out fires other than gas fires and provide assistance as required. Approach roads to accident site and means of escape should be properly identified. Chief fire officer should co-ordinate entire fire control measures. Routine training of fire fighting equipment and special rescue equipment should be carried out. Concerned officer should ensure adequate supply of fire water and fire fighting agents at the site of emergency. Maintenance of standby equipment / personnel for fire fighting should be ready at any given time.

Mutual Aid

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 184

Disaster / emergency / risk, when becomes difficult to control by in house team / management, help from nearby industries, institutions, etc. can be taken. A group of mutual aid can be formed where emergency control systems like ambulance, fire fighting equipments, medical & fire-fighting team, etc. can be shared in the event of need.

Post Emergency Relief to the Victims The Public Liability Insurance (PLI) Act, 1991 provides for the owner who has control over handling hazardous substances to pay specified amount of money to the victims as interim relief by taking insurance policy for this purpose. The District Collector has definite role in implementation of this act. After proper assessment of the incident, he shall invite applications for relief, conduct an enquiry into the claims and arrange payment of the relief amount to the victims.

7.3.16 General Health and Safety The project will adhere to health & safety norms of The Factories Act, 1948 and Uttar Pradesh Factory Rules, 1951, as applicable along with Best Industry Practices. General health and safety issues during various project activities are similar to those of most large infrastructure and industrial facilities and their prevention and control. These issues include among others, exposure to dust and hazardous materials, hazardous materials components, and physical hazards associated with the use of heavy equipment, etc. Specific health and safety issues primarily include the following:  Physical hazards  Chemical hazards  Confined spaces Physical Hazards - The main sources of physical hazards are associated with machinery and vehicles. General electrical equipment safety, working in confined spaces, hot work, high temperature areas are expected to be present. Chemical Hazards - workers may be exposed to chemical hazards especially if their work entails direct contact with fuels or chemicals, flare & DG set emission or depending on the nature of activities. Work with fuels may present a risk of exposure to volatile organic compounds (VOC) via inhalation or skin contact during normal use or in the case of spills. Noise - Noise sources include drilling, DG operations, including vehicular traffic, and boats. In order to evaluate the impacts of proposed project on the health of workers, baseline health studies will be carried out on every worker before joining their duties. The hierarchy of control specific for health & safety (in order of priority):  Eliminate the use of a harmful product or substance and use a safer one;  Substituting wherever reasonably practicable, a non-hazardous material which presents no risk to health, where a hazardous material is used intentionally, i.e. use a safer form of the product;  Modifying a process to eliminate the use of risk, the production of a hazardous by- product or waste product, including reducing the quantities of the hazardous material which are used & stored, i.e. change the process to emit less of the substance;  Enclose the process so that the product does not escape;  Extract emissions of the substance near the source;  Provide personal protective equipment (PPE) such as gloves, coveralls and a respirator. PPE must fit the wearer.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 185

7.3.17 Personal Protective Equipment Often it is not possible, or practicable, to eliminate exposure to materials hazardous to health completely. In such cases, operations should consider how to prevent employees being exposed and the prevention of exposure should be achieved by measures other than the use of PPE or Respiratory Protective Equipment (RPE), which is the last line of defense. Situations where PPE/RPE will normally be necessary include:  where adequate control of exposure cannot be achieved solely by good practice and the application of operational or engineering measures;  where new or revised assessment shows that PPE/RPE is necessary until adequate control is achieved by other means;  where there is temporary failure to achieve adequate control of the process, e.g. because of plant failure, and the only practicable solution to maintain adequate control in the time available may be the provision and use of suitable PPE/RPE; and where maintenance operations have to be carried out. Key personal protective equipments will include:  Body suit  Hand gloves  Helmet  Safety shoes  Safety harness  Breathing apparatus  Eye shield  Ear muffs

7.3.18 First Aid Medical services, including personnel trained in first aid, and medical equipment that is appropriate to the type of operation will be provided at project. All persons on an installation should have at least basic training in emergency response, basic first aid, use of life saving appliances and firefighting. Individual competencies shall be periodically tested to identify further requirement of training and knowledge to perform emergency duties. It will be ensured that any auxiliary medical teams e.g. nurses and first aid personnel are fully trained and conversant with their roles and responsibilities. Contact details & capacities of nearby medical facilities and medical experts will be made available at strategic locations.

7.3.19 Disaster Management Plan for Natural Hazard Key natural hazards that occur in Uttar Pradesh are earthquake, flash flood, hailstorms, sand storm, etc.  Earthquake - As per the BMPTC Atlas, various parts of the State of Uttar Pradesh fall under earthquake zones III. General awareness and wide dissemination of do’s and don’ts through electronic and print media issued by state disaster management agency should be followed.  Flood - Though most parts of Uttar Pradesh receive scanty rainfall, the State has a history of floods and inundations, mostly along the basins of rivers like Luni. Besides the floods in natural drainage systems, there are other reasons for inundation. Changes in rainfall patterns have also increased the risk of flash floods in many areas that were not flood prone historically. IMD and other government department warnings should be Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 186

monitored and in case of any such warning, relevant steps as guided by on site disaster management plan should be followed. Instruction given by key departments like IMD, district disaster management center, etc. to be followed  Hailstorms - cause heavy damage to crops and vegetations. Secondary hazards like snapping of electric poles due to uprooting of trees, disruption of communication links, etc. are also attributed to hailstorms. Frost is a regular feature in many parts of Uttar Pradesh. Measure like avoiding traveling, clearing of area, etc. should be taken along with on site disaster management plan.  Sand storms are typical features of south-western Uttar Pradesh. High velocity winds along with sand, often cyclonic in nature, blow through most of the western districts, particularly in months from March to June. High wind and sand storms severely disrupt the routine life, transportation, electricity and other essential services.  Human Epidemics - Although, Uttar Pradesh has a history of disease outbreaks such as Cholera, Gastroenteritis, Acute Diarrhoea/ Dysentery, Infective Hepatitis, Encephalitis, Poliomyelitis, Typhoid and recently H1NI; the State is particularly prone to Malaria. Conduct regular hygeine awareness and conduct targeted vaccination drives as required. Workers to be trained for hygienic work environment, sanitation & living conditions. It has been observed that natural hazards can be minimized by the presence of a well functioning communication / warning system. A well prepared administration needs to have its communication/early warning system in place to enable precautionary & mitigation measures on receiving warning for impending disasters and in the process minimize loss of life & property. Data from different reliable sources should collected and monitored in real or near real time and analysed to generate a warning alert in the event of likelihood of a disaster.  The Indian Meteorological Department (IMD) will be the nodal agency for the monitoring of seismic activity, flood, etc.  Tie up / contacts / communication with State Disaster Response Force (SDRF), district disaster management center should be maintained SDRF has been constituted in the State with stations at locations i.e. Jodhpur, Jaipur & Kota.  Local Search and Rescue Team at the local level comprising of retired Army and Police personnel, Civil Defense and Home Guard, volunteers can be identified and trained to perform initial Search and Rescue operations.  Apart from the above, Community volunteers/ representatives would be identified and trained on search and rescue operations through community Based Disaster Management programme.  Disaster Management and Relief Department website/ communication along with other line departments like fire, police, health, etc. will be checked.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 187

CHAPTER 8 PROJECT BENEFITS The proposed exploration and appraisal project will establish the potential of hydrocarbons in the Block. The development of the oil Block will result in considerable growth of service sector and will also generate direct/indirect employment and business opportunities in the area. The major benefits of the project include reduction of the oil import bill of the nation as well as reduction of the imbalance in oil production and consumption. The commercial development will also lead to investment in Himachal Pradesh , bringing oil and gas revenues both to the State and to the Central Government. The presence of Cairn Oil & Gas in the region will substantially improve the socio-economic conditions of the region. Employment opportunity for local people as contract/daily wages in nearby areas. 8.1 EMPLOYMENT POTENTIAL The employment of local people in primary and secondary sectors of project shall upgrade the prosperity of the region. This in-turn will improve the socio-economic conditions of the area.  During site preparation of the proposed project, this project will provide temporary employment to many unskilled and semi-skilled laborers in nearby villages; During the site preparation for drilling, approximately 30-35 workmen will be employed per drill site.  During the drilling phase, about 50 workmen per shift will be working on site. This will include technical experts, who will be responsible for various drilling related activities and some technical manpower engaged are either from Vedanta Limited (Cairn Oil & Gas) or contractor’s crew as applicable. It is anticipated that, at any given time, there will be about 80 - 100 personnel working on site including technical staff, drilling crew, security staff etc.  This project will also help in generation of indirect employment to those people who render their services for the personnel directly working in the project; and  The present trend of out migration for employment is likely to reduce due to better economic opportunities available within the Block and adjoining. 8.2 CORPORATE ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSIBILITY (CER) Vedanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) has taken up various CSR initiatives in and around present operational areas for the benefit of the residents as per the CSR Act and Rules, Govt. of India. CSR measures will be taken up by Vedanta Limited. (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) in case of commercially viable hydrocarbon discovery & further full-fledged development of the fields and production and associated facilities as per provision of government regulations and guidelines..

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 188

CHAPTER 9 ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS

9.0 GENERAL

Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis (CBA) is an analytical way to make an educated decision regarding the commencement of an industrial activity or similar trade/commercial/infrastructure activity. This involves a comparison of the costs of an action with considerations of the benefits associated with that action. CBA assists the regulators to evaluate the benefits and challenges imposed by the upcoming activity in commercial terms with respective to the impact on the environmental scenario such as human wellbeing, quality of life and environmental wellbeing. An important component of a CBA is a base situation which is a situation when no changes take place. All decisions are then compared to the base situation. Once the base and a relevant time period are established, benefits and costs can be calculated in terms of human and environmental well-being. In this case, a benefit is defined as anything that increases human well-being, and a cost is anything that decreases it. CBA aims to maximize economic efficiency at a point where marginal benefits and marginal costs are equal.

9.1 APPLICABILITY OF CBA AND SUMMARY During the scoping/ToR stage, no recommendation of environmental cost benefit analysis was suggested by the appraisal committee.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 189

CHAPTER 10 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN 10.0 GENERAL This section describes the Environmental Management Plan (EMP) for the proposed project. The EMP is aimed at managing the environmental parameters in a sustainable manner. The EMP section is organized as follows: 1. Organizational structure for HSE management– This subsection describes the current HSE organization in Cairn oil and Gas which will be responsible for implementing this EMP. 2. Proposed Environmental Management Plan – This Plan consists of a detailed description of the positive and negative environmental impacts anticipated from the proposed project, mitigation/ management measures and the persons/ parties responsible for ensuring implementation of such measures. 3. Additional Plans - Additional plans such as Waste Management Plan, Oil Spill Response Plan have also been provided. 4. EMP implementation review process – This subsection describes the requirements for periodic review and updating of the EMP to address any new impacts due to change or modification of the project. 5. Budgetary allocation for EMP implementation – Provides the details of budget allocation for the various mitigation measures proposed for the Project. 10.1 ORGANIZATION STRUCTURE FOR HSE MANAGEMENT Vedanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) has formulated a Health, Safety and Environment (HSE) Policy for its operations. Through the HSE Policy, Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil and Gas) is committed to protect the health and safety of everyone involved in its operations, and the sustainability of the environment in which it operates. Vedanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) strives for continual improvement and the adoption of international codes and standards. Vedanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) aims at ensuring that all its operations comply with applicable health, safety and environmental laws, regulations and other requirements. The organization structure and HSE Policy of Vedanta Limited is presented in figure below.

Figure 10.1 Vendanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil and Gas) HSE organizational structure for implementation of EMP Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 190

The HSE team will have the following responsibilities:

Figure 10.2 HSE Policy of Vendanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil and Gas) Ensure effective implementation of the Environmental Management Plan (EMP) through review and periodic updation; Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil and Gas) would have the ultimate responsibility of implementing the environment management plan along with drilling contractor. The drilling contractor will have an HSE management system, which will be reviewed by Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn oil and Gas) prior to implementation.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 191

10.2 AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN The Air Quality Management Plan (AQMP) encompasses Site preparation, drilling and early production phase activities that has the potential to affect ambient air quality due to the proposed project. The AQMP establishes specific measures and guidelines aimed at effectively addressing and mitigating the air quality impacts that may arise as result of site preparation, , drilling operations, operation of production facilities and decommissioning/site closure of well sites. The plan also details out roles and responsibilities of Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) and the contractors to ensure effective implementation of the plan.

Mitigation Measures

Phase Mitigation Measures drill Site Preparation  Vehicles delivering raw materials like fine aggregates will be covered to prevent fugitive emissions;  Storage and handling of construction material and debris to be carefully managed to prevent generation of fugitive dust;  All vehicles use in transportation of raw material and personnel will have valid Pollution under Control Certificate (PUC).  The excavated top soil will be stored properly.  Adequate stack height to be provided to DG sets in accordance with CPCB standards.

Dust Suppression

 Sprinkling of water on earthworks, material haulage and transportation routes on a regular basis, especially in dry season. Drilling and early Operation of Machineries, Vehicle & Drilling Rig production  Exhausts of diesel generators will be positioned at a sufficient height to ensure dispersal of exhaust emissions;  Vehicles involved in the transportation of project personnel will have valid PUC Certificate and will be subjected to periodic maintenance;

Periodic Maintenance of Machinery and Vehicles

 Periodic maintenance of DG/GEG sets will be undertaken;

 Flaring will be undertaken in accordance with the CPCB Guidelines

for Gaseous Emissions for Oil & Gas;

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 192

10.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

The Waste Management Plan (WMP) is applicable for all process and non-process waste streams which are generated during various phases of Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) proposed drilling and testing of hydrocarbons in this block. The major waste streams covered under this plan includes drill cuttings, waste drilling mud, drilling wash water, kitchen waste and sewage. In addition, waste oil and lead acid batteries generated from the proposed project operations have also been dealt in this plan.

The WMP establishes specific measures to ensure proper collection, storage, treatment and disposal of the identified process and non-process waste streams in accordance with the applicable national regulations and guidelines and also to ensure compliance with Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) corporate HSE Policy. The plan also outlines roles and responsibilities of both Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) and the contractors involved in the implementation of the plan. Mitigation Measures

The following mitigation measures need to be adopted and implemented by Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) and its contractors for the major waste streams identified in the plan.

Waste Quantity Mitigation Measure

 Drill Cuttings Drill cuttings associated with Drill cuttings separated from drilling fluid WBM: 250-750 tons/well, Drill will be adequately washed and Cuttings associated with SBM temporarily stored and disposed in an (500-1500 tons/well) impervious pit lined by High Density Poly Ethelyn (HDPE)  All drill cuttings will be disposed as per Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016;  Spent/Residual Spent Mud – 250-500 ton/well Recycling of drilling mud would be ensured drilling Mud to the maximum extent possible.  Temporary storage of drilling fluid and wash waste water would be done in an impervious pit lined with HDPE.  ETP would be constructed for treatment of drilling wash water to achieve the CPCB effluent standard for prescribe for oil and gas industry.  Waste oil/ Used oil 1-2 tons/well Hazardous waste (waste and used oil) would be managed in accordance with Hazardous Waste (Management, Handling & Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2008.  .  Municipal Solid 25-30 kg/well The waste will be segregated at source

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 193

Waste Quantity Mitigation Measure

Waste (organic/inorganic) and disposed accordingly.  All kinds of waste will be disposed in accordance with the requirement of CPCB/RSPCB.

3  Sewage 16-25 m /day per well Sewage generated from campsite would be treated through mobile STP.  Treated waste water will be used for dust suppression, green belt, landscape, etc  Recyclables viz. Depending on usage Proper segregation and storage of paper, plastic, recyclable waste in designated bins. packaging waste  Recyclables will be periodically sold to etc. local waste recyclers. 10.4 SOIL QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN Soil Quality Management Plan is applicable for Site preparation of well sites, drilling operations, operation of early production facilities and decommissioning/site closure that has the potential to adversely impact the soil quality.

Mitigation Measures

Project Phase Mitigation measures

Construction/Drill Site  Use appropriate machinery and/or protective boarding during top Preparation soil stripping to ensure minimum compaction.  Debris and excavated material generated during construction activities would be stored properly. No material would be disposed in adjacent land surrounding to the site boundary.  Provide embankment all around the heap of excavated top soil and cover it with tarpaulin sheet to avoid erosion by the action of rains/strong winds.  Drip trays to be used during vehicular/equipment maintenance and during refueling operations.  In case of a spill, the spilled soil is to be removed and stored in hazardous waste storage area.

Drilling and Early  Fuel and chemical storage areas would be paved and properly production bunded.  Spill kits would be made available at all fuel and chemical storage areas. All spills/leaks contained, reported and cleaned up immediately.  Drip pans/trays would be used in areas identified having spillage

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 194

Project Phase Mitigation measures

potential but not limited to drill rig engine; electric generator engine; pumps or other motors; maintenance areas; fuel transfer areas.  Management of drill cuttings, waste drilling mud, waste oil and domestic waste would be made in accordance with “Waste Management Plan”

Decommissioning/Site  Decommissioning at the end of project life/drilling would have Closure some impacts in terms of increase in soil erosion and would require adequate mitigation measures to minimize any impacts. The mitigation measures would be similar to those outlined for construction phase activities as discussed earlier.

10.5 SPILL / RELEASE MANAGEMENT PLAN

Potential spill / release scenarios The following section details the potential spill scenarios associated with the drilling activities as well as the oil spill incident responses. Spill incidents from drilling activities can be classified into three types based on the level of response required. A description of the three types are as follows: Type 1 A small oil or chemical spill incident which can respond to and can be controlled with the existing resources, equipment and resources at the site and without any further escalation. Most of the potential drill stage spill risks are Type 1. As the spill / release incident as the volumes involved are limited due to the extent of hydrocarbons or chemicals used or stored at site. Such possible incidents are likely to include:

 Diesel spills from refuelling i.e., drill rig ‐ hose leaks, overfilling or connection/disconnection incidents.  The use of liquid chemicals i.e., during drilling the volumes are limited by the storage containers used, drums etc.  Hydraulic oil spill resulting from a split hydraulic hose or failed connector (moderate pressure, low volume lines).  Drilling fluid leaks from tanks, pumps or other associated equipment within the closed loop recirculation system. Type 2 Type 2 spill / release incidents are those that are beyond capability of the immediate resources on‐ site to effectively manage and contain, requiring additional external resources to assist with the response to the spill incident. Type 2 spill incidents may require initiate Emergency operations and will involve call out of the Fire Service (in the event of danger to people) and/or regional resources. For such potential spill incidents, the resources of the local administration or suppliers may be required. Such possible incidents are likely to include:

 Transportation incidents associated with the delivery of diesel or drilling fluids to site i.e., truck rollover or collision from external suppliers (drilling fluids and diesel).

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 195

 Complete failure of an on‐site drilling fluid (base oil) storage tank(s).

Type 3 Type 3 spill / release incidents are significant spill incidents that escalate from a Type 1 or 2 and exceed the capabilities of the on‐site and local administrative resources to respond, requiring a State /National response. An uncontrollable well blow out scenario would fall into this category. Spill / Release Response Strategies

Spill / release response strategies for combating spill / release incidents include:  Prevent or reduce further spillage.  Monitoring and evaluation (no active intervention but the spill is under observation).  Mechanical containment and recovery.  Protection of sensitive areas.  Clean‐up, and  Any combination of the above strategies. A brief explanation of these various response strategies is provided in the following sections.

Prevent or reduce a spill / release incident

One of the first response actions, if safe to do so, is the isolation or prevention of the source of the spill / release in an attempt to limit any further discharge. Such first response actions can involve an emergency shutdown of the particular equipment, isolation of a valve or line causing the spill or providing some immediate containment to prevent the further spread of a spill / release. Such measures are only a first immediate response prior to a more coordinate effort being planned and undertaken.

Monitoring and Evaluation

Knowing the position of spillage / release source and having the ability to forecast its movement or direction is an essential component of spill response. Monitoring and evaluation is used to: Determine the location and movement of the spill / release (if any). Describe its appearance. Estimate the size and quantity of the spill / release Note changes in the appearance and distribution of the spill over time. Assess the potential threat to the environment and the resources required to combat the spill / release (more effective and coordinate response)

Mechanical Containment and Recovery

Mechanical containment and recovery is the restriction of a spill / release movement through the use of booms or some other form of physical barriers and its subsequent removal using skimmers and other mechanical means. These operations may be required for large spills or spills / release which may impact environmentally sensitive areas. This response option will be used if the spill / release:

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 196

The spill is unlikely to be removed by natural processes.

The feasibility of a containment and recovery response is dependent upon having surface pollution that is capable of being contained and recovered and having suitable conditions for equipment deployment. The spill containment plan shall be addressed in line with the recommendation of QRA analysis as prescribed in chapter 7.

Waste Management

Spill response operations have the potential to generate liquid and solid wastes, if there are clean‐up operations. The types and quantities of waste material largely depend on the amount of liquid material spilt and the specific clean‐up methods employed. Disposal options for oily wastewater may include high temperature incineration, bioremediation or disposal at secured landfill sites. Any disposal option selected will need to comply with the the Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016. 10.6 NOISE QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN The noise management plan is applicable for site preparation, early production system, drilling operations and decommissioning/site closure of well sites. The noise control plan to ensure specific measures to minimize noise levels in the project site as 75 dB(A) per CPCB noise rules. The plan also outlines roles and responsibilities of both Vedanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) and the contractors involved in the implementation of the plan. Mitigation Measures

Project Phase Mitigation measures

Construction/Drill Site  Selection and use of low noise generating equipment Preparation equipped with engineering controls viz. mufflers, silencers etc.  All vehicles utilized in transportation of raw material and personnel will have valid Pollution under Control (PUC) Certificate  Periodic maintenance of vehicles as per manufacturer’s schedule to ensure compliance with the vehicular noise limits specified by CPCB  All high noise generating equipment would be identified and subjected to periodic preventive maintenance.  No night time operation of vehicles and construction activities would be undertaken.  Engines of vehicles and construction equipment would be turned off when not in use for long periods.

Drilling, Well Testing and early  Siting of drilling rig and facilities away from sensitive production receptors viz. schools, settlements etc. with all reasonable screening being utilized where necessary.  Installing acoustic enclosures and muffler on engine exhaust

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 197

Project Phase Mitigation measures

of DG sets to ensure compliance with generator noise limits specified by CPCB.  Periodic monitoring of noise levels on site and nearby receptors to ensure compliance with Noise Pollution (Regulation & Control) Rules 2000.

Decommissioning/Site Closure  Management measures to address noise impacts with respect to operation of equipment/machinery and movement of vehicles during decommissioning/site closure phase are similar to those discussed in the “Construction Phase” of this section

10.7 SURFACE WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT The Surface Water Quality Management Plan is applicable during preparation of site, drilling operations, operation of early production facilities and decommissioning/site closure of well sites that has the potential to affect the surface water quality. The Surface Water Quality Management Plan establishes specific measures and guidelines aimed at addressing and mitigation of surface water quality impacts that may arise at different phases of the project. Project Phase Mitigation measures

Construction  During site preparation and construction, surface water run-off will be managed through implementation of proper drainage system.  Regular inspection of surface water drainage/diversion system and sediment controls would be undertaken.

Drilling  Drip trays would be used during preventive maintenance of rig installations, vehicles and machinery.  Chemicals and fuel container will be stored in bunded and lined area equipped with proper spill control equipment and secondary containment.

Decommissioning/Site Closure  No significant impacts to surface water quality can be associated with activities during decommissioning/site closure phase. Any possible impacts that may arise due to surface run-off will be mitigated in manner similar to that discussed during site preparation activities.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 198

10.8 GROUND WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN Ground Water Quality Management Plan is applicable for site preparation and drilling operations, operation of early production facilities and decommissioning/site closure of well sites that has the potential to affect the ground water quality. Project Phase Mitigation measures

Construction  No significant impact on the ground water quality can be associated with the site preparation activities

Drilling  Proper casing and cementing of well will be done as per national and international standard.  Periodic monitoring of ground water quality will be carried out for surrounding wells.

Decommissioning/Site Closure  No significant impacts to ground water quality can be associated with activities during decommissioning/site closure phase

10.9 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PLAN The Storm Water Management Plan refers to the proper management of surface run-off generated during monsoons for various phases of activities involved in the project. The purpose of Storm Water Management Plan is to ensure prevent and control any adverse impact of discharge of storm water from the well site to nearby natural drainage channels and community water bodies. Mitigation Measures

The following mitigation measures need to be adopted and implemented by Vedanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) and its contractors in construction, operation and decommissioning phase.  Necessary measures would be undertaken during site preparation to prevent earth and stone material from blocking cross drainage structures.  Periodic cleaning will be undertaken to cross drainage structures and road drainage system to maintain uninterrupted storm water flow. 10.10 ROAD SAFETY & TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT PLAN Road Safety & Traffic Management Plan outlines specific measures would adopted and implemented by Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) to mitigate any potential impact on community health and safety that may arise out of movement of vehicles and transportation of drilling rig and other heavy equipment during construction, drilling and decommissioning of well sites. Mitigation Measures

 Project vehicular movement will be restricted to defined access routes to be identified in consultation with locals and concerned authorities;  Proper signage will be displayed at important traffic junctions along the predefined access routes. Signage will serve to prevent any diversion from designated routes and ensure proper speed limits are maintained near village residential areas;  Safe and convenient passage for vehicles, pedestrians and livestock to and from side roads and property accesses connecting the project road will be provided; Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 199

 Parking of project vehicles along village access roads would be prohibited;  Traffic flows would be scheduled wherever practicable during period of increased commuter movement;  Traffic Warden will be deployed at major traffic intersection for control of traffic; 10.11 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH & SAFETY MANAGEMENT PLAN The Health & Safety Management Plan (OHSMP) has been formulated to address the occupational health and safety related impacts that may arise from proposed project activities viz. drilling and testing, and decommissioning/site closure. The Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) health and safety standards would be guided by Vedanta HSE policy. Mitigation Measures

The following mitigation measure need to be adopted and implemented by Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) and its contractors in site preparation, drilling, and early production and decommissioning phase.  Workers will be provided with proper PPEs viz. safety boots, masks, protected glass etc.  Provision of ear plugs/ear muffs etc. and rotation of workers operating near high noise generating areas, would be ensured.  Hazardous and risk prone areas, installations, materials, safety measures etc. would be appropriately marked in every conspicuous location.  All chemicals and hazardous materials storage container will be properly labeled and marked according to national and internationally recognized requirements and standards. Materials Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) or equivalent data/information in an easily understood language must be readily available to exposed workers and first-aid personnel.  Workplace must be equipped with fire detectors, alarm systems and fire-fighting equipment. Equipment shall be periodically inspected and maintained to keep in good working condition.  Adequate sanitation facilities will be provided onsite for the operational  Garbage bins would be provided in the camp and regularly removed and the garbage disposed off in a hygienic manner.  Training programs would be organized for the operational workforce regarding proper usage of PPEs, handling and storage of fuels and chemicals etc. 10.12 FLARE & ILLUMINATION MANAGEMENT PLAN The glare from the flare and illumination not only cause visual impacts but also causes ecological impacts. Enclosed Ground Flaring

Ground laring pit eliminates the visual impacts of burning produced gas in a processing facility. Apart from that enclosed ground flare will decrease the amount of smoke and noise. Work Zone Illumination

Low height (less than 8 m), sodium vapour lamp that are most energy efficient can help to reduce the ecological impacts. Further, illumination will be provided only in required locations. Such UV filtered lights have been found to be less distractive to migrating birds. 10.13 SITE CLOSURE PLAN

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 200

In case the well is not economically viable, and no further use of that particular well bore is envisaged. Along with the well site the approach road connecting the well will be restored accordingly. The following activities would be considered in the closure plan:  Plugging & Abandonment of well: Close the well head properly to prevent any further leakage  Decommissioning Phase: Removal of the materials form the site  Waste/mud pit closure and reclamation  Reinstatement Phase: regeneration of the land  Handover Phase : Returning the land to the original owner Plugging & Abandonment of well

As and when the well will be declared as non-productive, plugging of the well will be performed to close and abandon the well to prevent any leakage of oil or gas. Decommissioning

The decommissioning phase includes activities dismantling and removal of surface facilities from the well site and storage in the Material Dumping Area. The activities which are envisaged during this phase are: Waste Management: clean up the site and remove all waste materials e.g. HDPE liners, any waste material etc. The waste will be dumped in the designated area as per the guidelines of Himachal Pradesh State pollution control board. Road Restoration: The fill materials should be removed, and the site would be restored to previous conditions or as per recommendation of administrative department of Tehsil. Waste and Mud Pit Closure and Reclamation

Following decommissioning and abandonment of the well site the waste and mud pits would be subject to closure through onsite burial of solids in accordance with lease and obligations and with local, state and national regulations. Reclamation of closed pits or any other temporary retaining pits, including reserve pits, would be carried out within a period of one year from well closure/abandonment. All such reclamation activities would be carried out based on the climatic conditions.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 201

Table 10.1 Environmental Management Plan S.No Activity Potential Impact Management / Mitigation Measures Responsibility 1. Land  Issues pertaining to If the identified lands are of private landowners then land lease  Vedanta Limited compensation mode will be applied and in case of govt. land, land allotment from (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) Govt. to be applied. Initially temporary and short-term lease will be association with Land taken for 3 - 5 years for exploration purpose and in case of acquisition officer commercially viable discovery of hydrocarbon resources; the land lease would be converted into long term lease up till life of the project. For sites selected are having any settlements, Resettlement & rehabilitation (R&R) plan will be developed and implemented as per the applicable State/ Central Govt. policy. Compensation to affected landowners for any loss of land will be ensured by Vedanta Limited. (Division Cairn Oil & Gas). Vedanta Limited (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) will ensure the livelihood of local community, if any affected by the proposed land take, are identified and compensated through adequate compensation and other livelihood restoration activities directly or indirectly through CSR activities. 2. Site Clearance and  Dust Generation  Top soil would be properly stored for future use.  Vedanta Limited Grading  Loss of top soil  Water sprinkling to be carried out while working in proximity of (Division:Cairn Oil & agricultural fields or settlements/habitations; Gas)  Runoff from drill sites located near ponds and catchment of tankas  Civil Contractors to be channelized through silt trap. 3. Construction /  Handling of excess earth  Temporary storage sheds to be provided for construction material  Vedanta Limited Preparation of Drill material; such as cement; (Division:Cairn Oil & Site  Noise generation  Excavated soil to be used during site preparation; Gas)  Increase in traffic volumes  Friable material to be covered with tarpaulin sheets during its  Vedanta Limited  Health & Safety risks transportation; (Division: Cairn Oil &  All contractors to be provided training on Vedanta Limited Gas) Drilling team

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 202

S.No Activity Potential Impact Management / Mitigation Measures Responsibility (Division Cairn Oil & Gas) Journey Management Plan;  Civil Contractors  Provision and usage of adequate PPEs to workers as applicable and identified for the respective activity. 4. Installation Camp  Structural Failure of crane  Surface conditions to be examined prior to movement of crane;  Vedanta Limited of Site  Crane overturning/Collapse  Provision and usage of adequate PPEs to workers as applicable (Division: Cairn Oil &  Falling Objects and identified for the respective activity. Gas)  Health & Safety risks  Civil Contractors

5. Transportation of  Vehicular emissions  Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) Journey Management  Vedanta Limited Drilling  Damage to road conditions Plan to be instructed to all contractors and maintain a low speed (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) Components and  Oil leaks (30kmph) while travelling through village area.  Only trained drivers with knowledge of on defensive driving to be Rig involved in the movement of rigs.  All movement of major equipment shall be scheduled in the lee hours keeping consideration of the traffic movement in the connecting major arterial road.  Local administration and village administration as applicable to be informed during movement of rigs through village roads;  Training to be provided to drivers involved for movement of rigs;  Breakdown of vehicles to be attended within 2 hours of reporting;  All vehicles to be verified for valid PUC;  Periodic maintenance of all vehicles and rigs to be carried out  Drip pans to be used while parking of the vehicles. 6. Drilling and Well  Additional stress on the local  Water will be sourced for the approved vendor through tanker  Vedanta Limited Testing water resources; (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas)  Potential for contamination due  Two separate Drill cutting disposal pits to be provided for WBM  Vedanta Limited to handling, storage and and SBM cuttings; (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas)

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 203

S.No Activity Potential Impact Management / Mitigation Measures Responsibility transportation of wastes  Drill waste pits to be provided with HDPE lining on bottom and Waste Manager side surfaces;  Vedanta Limited  Used chemical barrels, used oil and other hazardous waste to be (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) sent to RSPCB authorized recyclers;  Drilling contractor- HSE  Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) to also explore disposing drill cuttings containing for co-processing as alternate fuel and or raw material (AFR) in cement industry based on suitability and availability.  Generation of noise  Rotary equipment on rig for drilling to be provided with silencers,  Vedanta Limited (Cairn rubber claddings and noise isolators; Oil & Gas) Project Team  Effective noise barriers to be set up at fence line when working at in association with Site a distance of less than 300m from centre of the well site; HSE Manager  Equipment upkeep and regular maintenance to minimise noise  Drilling contractor- HSE generation from all rotary equipment;  PPE’s such as ear plugs, muffs to be provided to workers at site;  Periodic maintenance of vehicles and machinery to be undertaken;  DG sets to be provided with acoustic enclosures as per requirements under CPCB guideline.  Air emissions  All the emitting stacks including the flare pit shall be positioned  Vedanta Limited orthogonal direction to the prevailing wind direction; (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas)  Cold venting of gas not to be carried out.  Adequate stack heights to be provide for generators, adhering to the EPA standards for diesel generators;  Improper sanitation  Proper sanitation would be provided to the workers.  Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) CSR team

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 204

S.No Activity Potential Impact Management / Mitigation Measures Responsibility  Drilling contractor- HSE  Occupational Health & Safety  Blowout preventers to be provided;  Vedanta Limited Risks  Flare pit to be placed at a safe distance from the well head and (Division: Cairn Oil & fuel storage areas; Gas)Project Team  Firefighting measures to be provided near all welding operations; Drilling contractor- HSE 7. Hydro Fracking  Water resource consumption  In case of significant volume of back flow, the effluent shall be  Vedanta Limited  Movement of tankers solar evaporated and if required shall be treated using mobile (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas)  Potential for groundwater effluent treatment plant at the well site.; Project Team contamination  Drilling contractor- HSE 8 Operation of  Stress on water resources;  All waste to be collected in bins located near each set of porta  Vedanta Limited Campsites  Potential contamination from cabins. Segregation of waste at the source of generation to be put (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) generation of biomedical waste in practice. Project Team  All hazardous waste to be collected and stored on secure and  Wastewater generation  Drilling contractor- HSE paved area, and subsequently sent to authorised recyclers  Waste generation  Food waste to be stored in a closed container;  STP to be provided for campsites.  Waste generation to be separated and disposed of as per the regulatory requirements. 9 Operation of mud  Waste generation  If area not paved, then periodic sprinkling shall be carried out  Drilling Warehouse plant and  Potential contamination due to  All diesel operated generators shall have acoustic enclosures and Manager warehouses mud preparation effective stack heights  Drilling Logistics Manager  Dust due to stacking of the  Waste shall be effectively segregated at the source of generation materials and disposed as per the waste management plan  Emission due to the forklifts and  All the vehicles to be operated inside the mud plant and crane usages warehouse shall follow all the HSE requirements to protect environment. 10 Decommissioning  Demolition of drill cutting pits;  A site restoration approved plan shall be prepared with the  Vedanta Limited and Abandonment detailed checklist; (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas)

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 205

S.No Activity Potential Impact Management / Mitigation Measures Responsibility  All drill cuttings, spent mud, waste oil and other waste to be  Drilling contractor- HSE completely removed from the site and sent to designated disposal place prior to commencement of demolition work;  All concrete or steel installations will be removed to at least 1 m below ground level, so as to ensure that there will be no protruding surface structures. The casing wellhead and the top joint of the casings will be cut below the ground level and capped with a cement plug.  Prior to commencement of any demolition, a planned programme of site clearance will be formulated. All pits, cellars and holes will be removed and filled to ground level, any oil or otherwise contaminated soil will be removed and disposed to Landfill.  Roads and other paving will be removed to sufficient depth to allow soil replacement and revegetation. Any remaining topsoil that has been stocked during the site clearance will be re-spread over appropriate portions of the site. Plantation, if possible will be commenced in and around the site.

10.14 EMP BUDGET

The tentative budget for implementation of the environmental management plans for drilling of each well will be 10 lakhs.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 206

CHAPTER 11 CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATION

HF-ONHP-2017/1 Block is located in bilaspur and Mandi district in the state of H.P and covers a total area of 666 Sq. Km. The Vedanta Limited (Cairn Oil & Gas division) intends to carry out further Exploration and Appraisal Drilling activities in the Block, wherein 7 new drilling (exploratory and appraisal) wells are proposed to be drilled over 5 years. In case of successful discovery of crude oil, setting up of Early Production Units (EPUs)/ Quick Production Units (QPUs) for produced well fluid processing and production of up to 0.6 MMSCFD associated natural gasoil of about 4000 BOPD ToR has been approved by MoEF&CC dated on 28th April, 2019 and MoEF&CC vide File No No. No.IA-J- 11011/103/2019-IA-II(I). The baseline monitoring and all primary data collection was has been conducted for the summer season (March to May), of 2019, as per the requirements of the ToR. This is the Draft EIA report has been prepared for conducting the public hearing. The draft EIA report has assessed the overall significance of environmental impacts likely to arise from Drilling of proposed exploratory and appraisal wells. The overall impacts from the individual drilling sites is have been assessed to be of moderate to minor in nature when appropriate mitigation measures are would be implemented with proper planning and design. To adequately address the impacts, mitigation measures and management plans suggested are as per the best practices followed in the Oil & Gas Industry. These plans include environmental management plan, monitoring plan, labour management plan, traffic management plan. Vedanta Limited (Cairn Oil & Gas) shall put in place a robust mechanism with adequate resources to implement the suggested mitigation measures and management plans. The measures will help to prevent any deterioration contamination of air, soil, groundwater and surface water quality beyond the prevailing status. Adequate safety measures would be adopted along with suitable emergency response and disaster management plan to safeguard against all manmade and natural disasters. Environmental monitoring of ambient air quality, noise levels, surface & groundwater etc. would be carried out at regular intervals to monitor and prevent any deterioration of baseline environmental quality due to the proposed project. Compliance to all legal requirements and adherence to the suggested mitigation measures and plans will also enable Vedanta Limited (Cairn Oil & Gas) in minimizing its impact on environmental and social parameter. This Report would be finalised after obtaining the comments and observations of public during the hearing to modify and strengthen any mitigation measures as required before same is submitted to MoEF&CC for obtaining Environmental Clearance (EC) of the project.

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 207 CHAPTER 12 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANT ENGAGED

Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn Oil & Gas) has appointed Eco Chem Sales and Services (ECSS) for carrying out this Environmental Impact Assessment Study as per the EIA notification, 2006 as amended till date. ECSS has approved EIA coordinators and Field Area Experts for undertaking Environmental and related studies in twenty one (21) approved sectors by NABET, Quality Council of India, New Delhi. 12.1 BRIEF RESUME AND NATURE OF CONSULTANCY ECO CHEM SALES and SERVICES (ECSS) is one of the leading companies in the field of Environmental Consultancy Service providers in India. We are NABET Accredited consultant for conducting Environmental Impact Assessment Studies (EIA) and obtaining Environmental Clearances. We also take up services which include and are not limited to Environment Monitoring and Testing, Environment Audit, Risk Assessment Studies, Turnkey solutions, Operation and Maintenance contracts and obtaining various statutory clearances from Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEFCC) and State Pollution Control Boards. ECSS also has branch offices in Vapi, Dahej and Vadodara, Gujarat.

The accreditation certificate number NABET/EIA/1720/SA 085 is valid up to 20th Feb. 2020. 12.2 EIA TEAM MEMBER Work presented in this report was carried out by Eco Chem Sales and Services with active co-operation from Vedanta Limited (Division: Cairn oil & Gas). The name of the team members associated in the preparation and studies of EIA/EMP is mentioned in Table 12.1.

Table 12.1: EIA Team Member

Name of Internal Involvement Under Approved Activity/ Area Team Member Actual Work Performed Expert Quality Check Understanding of project; Guidance in Mrs. Rekha Shah & Project writing & modification in Contents; Impact EIA Coordinator Mrs. Dipti Patel Coordinator Assessment; Review of EIA/EMP report. Coordination for data collection, data analysis, coordination with FAEs, team Assisting in members; compiling the primary & EIA Report secondary data for EIA report; EIA/EMP Writing and report preparation, assistance in report Ms. Pruthvi Patoliya Meteorology, EC, All FAEs preparation to FAE. Air Quality Assisted FAE for Evaluation of Modeling & meteorological data with collected prediction(AQ) secondary data, Air quality modeling and prediction and report writing. Meteorology, Assisted FAE for Evaluation of Air Quality meteorological data with collected Mr. Vaibhav Rana FAE AQ Modeling & secondary data, Air quality modeling and prediction(AQ) prediction and report writing. Risk and Assisted FAE for preparation of Risk Mr. Deep Kumar FAE RH hazards Assessment and report writing Ms. Nazneen Mansuri Solid and Assisting in solid waste generation FAE SHW

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 208 Name of Internal Involvement Under Approved Activity/ Area Team Member Actual Work Performed Expert Hazardous calculation, preparing solid waste disposal waste (SHW) plan, assistance in FAE Report writing, assisting in identifying hazardous waste generation sources and preparing environmental management plan. Assisted FAE for preparation of land use Mr. Anish Jani Land use (LU) FAE LU map and report writing

12.3 LABORATORY INVOLVED FOR BASELINE MONITORING AND OTHER ANALYSIS NABL accredited Laboratory, Certificate No. TC – 6603, issued on dated 26/10/2017 and valid till 25.10.2019.

------

Eco Chem Sales and Services Doc. No. 2019_ECSS_EIAI2_1900008 Page | 209 Annexure I TOR Letter

No.IA-J-11011/118/2019-IA-II(I) Goverment of India Minister of Enviroment,Forest and Climate Change Impact Assessment Division ***

Indira Paryavaran Bhavan, Vayu Wing,3rd Floor,Aliganj, Jor Bagh Road,New Delhi-110003 28 Apr 2019

To,

M/s M/s Vedanta Limited(Division Cairn Oil & Gas) Cairn Oil & Gas, Vedanta Limited, DLF Atria, DLF Phase-2, DLF City, Gurgaon, Haryana - 122002Gurgaon, Gurgaon-122002 Haryana

Tel.No.124-4594176; Email:[email protected]

Sir/Madam,

This has reference to the proposal submitted in the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change to prescribe the Terms of Reference (TOR) for undertaking detailed EIA study for the purpose of obtaining Environmental Clearance in accordance with the provisions of the EIA Notification, 2006. For this purpose, the proponent had submitted online information in the prescribed format (Form-1 ) along with a Pre-feasibility Report. The details of the proposal are given below:

1. Proposal No.: IA/HP/IND2/100583/2019

Onshore Oil and Gas Exploration, and Appraisal in HF-ONHP-2017-1 block (666 km2) 2. Name of the Proposal: in Mandi and Bilaspur districts of Himachal Pradesh.

3. Category of the Proposal: Industrial Projects - 2

4. Project/Activity applied for: 1(b) Offshore and onshore oil and gas exploration, development & production

5. Date of submission for TOR: 27 Mar 2019 In this regard, under the provisions of the EIA Notification 2006 as amended, the Standard TOR for the purpose of preparing environment impact assessment report and environment management plan for obtaining prior environment clearance is prescribed with public consultation as follows: STANDARD TERMS OF REFERENCE (TOR) FOR EIA/EMP REPORT FOR PROJECTS/ACTIVITIES REQUIRING ENVIRONMENT CLEARANCE

1(b):STANDARD TERMS OF REFERENCE FOR CONDUCTING ENVIRONMENT IMPACT ASSESSMENT STUDY FOR OFFSHORE AND ONSHORE OIL AND GAS EXPLORATION, DEVELOPMENT AND PRODUCTION PROJECTS AND INFORMATION TO BE INCLUDED IN EIA/EMP REPORT

B . STANDARD TOR FOR ONSHORE OIL AND GAS EXPLORATION, DEVELOPMENT & PRODUCTION

1. Executive summary of a project.

2. Project description, project objectives and project benefits.

3. Cost of project and period of completion.

4. Site details within 1 km of the each proposed well, any habitation, any other installation/activity, flora and fauna, approachability to site, other activities including agriculture/land, satellite imagery for 10 km area. All the geological details shall be mentioned in the Topo sheet of 1:40000 scale, superimposing the well locations and other structures of the projects. Topography of the project site. 5. Details of sensitive areas such as National Park, Wildlife sanctuary and any other eco-sensitive area alongwith map indicating distance. 6. Approval for the forest land from the State/Central Govt. under Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980, if applicable. 7. Recommendation of SCZMA/CRZ clearance as per CRZ Notification dated 6th January, 2011 ( if applicable). 8. Distance from nearby critically/severely polluted area as per Notification, if applicable. Status of moratorium imposed on the area. 9. Does proposal involve rehabilitation and resettlement? If yes, details thereof.

10. Environmental considerations in the selection of the drilling locations for which environmental clearance is being sought. Present any analysis suggested for minimizing the foot print giving details of drilling and development options considered. 11. Baseline data collection for air, water and soil for one season leaving the monsoon season in an area of 10 km radius with centre of Oil Field as its centre covering the area of all proposed drilling wells. 12. Climatology and Meteorology including wind speed, wind direction, temperature rainfall relative humidity etc. 13. Details of Ambient Air Quality monitoring at 8 locations for PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx, CO, VOCs, Methane and non-methane HC. 14. Soil sample analysis (physical and chemical properties) at the areas located at 5 locations.

15. Ground and surface water quality in the vicinity of the proposed wells site.

1 STANDARD TERMS OF REFERENCE (TOR) FOR EIA/EMP REPORT FOR PROJECTS/ ACTIVITIES REQUIRING ENVIRONMENT CLEARANCE

16. Measurement of Noise levels within 1 km radius of the proposed wells.

17. Vegetation and land use; flora/fauna in the block area with details of endangered species, if any.

18. Incremental GLC as a result of DG set operation, flaring etc.

19. Potential environmental impact envisaged during various stages of project activities such as site activation, development, operation/ maintenance and decommissioning. 20. Actual source of water and 'Permission' for the drawl of water from the Competent Authority. Detailed water balance, wastewater generation and discharge.

21. Noise abatement measures and measures to minimize disturbance due to light and visual intrusions.

22. Details on wastewater generation, treatment and utilization /discharge for produced water/ formation water, cooling waters, other wastewaters, etc. duringallprojectphases. 23. Details on solid waste management for drill cuttings, drilling mud and oil sludge, produced sand, radio activematerials, other hazardous materials, etc. including its disposal options during all project phases. 24. Disposal of spent oil and lube.

25. Storage of chemicals and diesel at site. Hazardous material usage, storage and accounting.

26. Commitment for the use of water based mud (WBM) only

27. Oil spill emergency plans for recovery/ reclamation.

28. H2S emissions control.

29. Produced oil/gas handling, processing and storage/transportation.

30. Details of control of air, water and noise pollution during production phase.

31. Measures to protect ground water and shallow aquifers from contamination.

32. Whether any burn pits being utilised for well test operations.

33. Risk assessment and disaster management plan for independent reviews of well designed construction etc. for prevention of blow out. Blowout preventer installation. 34. Environmental management plan.

35. Total capital and recurring cost for environmental control measures.

36. Emergency preparedness plan.

37. Decommissioning and restoration plans.

38. Documentary proof of membership of common disposal facilities, if any.

39. Details of environmental and safety related documentation within the company including documentation and proposed occupational health and safety Surveillance Safety Programme for all personnel at site. This shall also include monitoring programme for the environmental. 40. A copy of Corporate Environment Policy of the company as per the Ministry's O.M. No. J-11013/ 41/2006-IA.II(I) dated 26th April, 2011 available on the Ministry's website. 41. Any litigation pending against the project and or any direction/order passed by any court of law against the project. If so details thereof.

***

2 Annexure II RoU